0% found this document useful (0 votes)

457 views461 pages

Ac 31 Grafsoft

Software described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. It is against the law to copy the software except as specifically allowed in that agreement. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the express written permission of ABB.

Uploaded by

antonyamnr

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

457 views461 pages

Ac 31 Grafsoft

Uploaded by

antonyamnr

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 461

Software Manual Advant Controller 31

AC31GRAF
Programming Software
FRCTL 0151 98 GB

ABB PLC Division

1725 S. Johnson Road
New Berlin, WI 53146-1240
(262) 446-0000 Fax (262) 446-0300
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of ABB. The software, which includes information contained in any
databases, described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure
agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of that agreement. It
is against the law to copy the software except as specifically allowed in the license or
nondisclosure agreement. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose
without the express written permission of ABB.

© 1997 CJ International. All rights reserved.

MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows NT is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
General table of contents

General table of contents

ABB Control Page i 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Lexicon

LEXICON
Action List of statements or assignments executed when a step of an
SFC program is active.

Activity of Attribute of a step which is marked by an SFC token. The actions

a step attached to the step are executed according to its activity.

Analog Type of variables. These are continuous integer.

Beginning First step of the body of a macro step. A beginning step is not
step linked to any preceding transition.

Boolean Type of variables. Such variables con only take true or false
values.

Boolean SFC action: a boolean variable is assigned with the activity signal
action of a step.

Cell Elementary area of the graphic matrix for graphic languages such
as SFC, FBD or LD.

Clearing a Run time operation: all the tokens existing in the preceding steps
transition are removed. A token is created into each of the following steps.

Coil Graphic component of an LD program, used to represent the

assignment of an output variable.

Comment Text included in a program, having no impact on the execution of

the program.

Comment Text attached to an SFC step or transition, having no impact on

(SFC) the execution of the program.

Common Range of defined words. Such objects can be used in any

program of any project.

Condition Boolean expression attached to an SFC transition. The transition

(for a cannot be cleared when its condition is false.
transition)

Contact Graphic component of an LD program. It represents the status of

an input variable.

ABB Control Page ii 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Lexicon

Cross Information calculated by the AC31GRAF about the dictionary of

references variables, and where those variables are used in a project.

Current Result of an instruction in an IL program. The current result can

result (IL) be modified by an instruction, or used to set a variable.

Cycle Duration of the central unit execution cycle.

timing

Diary Text file which contains all the notes about the changes made to
one program. Each note is completed with its editing date.

Dictionary Set of internal, input or output variables, and defined words, used
in the programs of one project.

Edge Change of a boolean variable. A rising edge means a change

from false to true. A falling edge means a change from true to
false.

Ending Last step of the body of an SFC macro step. An ending step is
step not linked to any following transition.

FBD Functional Block Diagram language.

Function Graphic component of the FBD language, which represents a

block standard elementary function from the AC31GRAF libraries.

Functional Graphic language: the equations are built with standard

Block elementary blocks from the AC31GRAF library, linked together in
Diagram the diagram.

Global Range of variables or defined words. Such objects can be used in

any program of one project.

Identifier Unique word used to represent a variable or a constant

expression in the programming.

IL Instruction List language.

Initial Set of the initial steps of an SFC program, which represents the
situation context of the program when it is started.

Initial step Special step of an SFC program, which is activated when the
program starts.

ABB Control Page iii 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Lexicon

Input Variables linked to an input device.

Instruction Elementary operation of an IL program, entered on one line of

text.

Instruction Low level literal language, entered as a sequential list of

List elementary operations.

Integer Class of analog variables, stored in a signed integer 16 bit format.

Internal Variable not linked to an input or output device.

Jump to a SFC graphic component, which represents a link, from a

step transition to a step. The graphic symbol of a jump is an arrow,
numbered with the reference of the destination step.

Keyword Reserved word of the language.

Label (IL) Identifier put at the beginning of an IL instruction line, which

identifies the instruction, and can be used as an operand for the
JMP operations.

Ladder Graphic language mixing contacts and coils, for the design of
Diagram boolean equations.

LD Ladder Diagram language.

Level 1 of Main description of an SFC program. Level 1 groups the chart

the SFC (steps and transitions), and the attached comments.

Level 2 of Detailed description of an SFC program. It is the description of

the SFC the actions within the steps, and the boolean conditions attached
to the transitions.

Library Set of hardware or software resources, which can be directly

inserted in any application.

Local Range of variables or defined words. Such objects can be used in

only one program of one project.

Macro step SFC graphic component. A macro step is a unique group of steps
and transitions, represented as a unique symbol in the main
chart, and described separately.

Message Character strings used for ASCII communication.

ABB Control Page iv 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Lexicon

Modbus Master-Slave protocol. The CS31 central unit can be a Modbus

slave for the link with an external system (such as supervisory
systems) in a complete architecture.

Modifier Single character put at the end of an IL operation keyword, which

(IL) modifies the meaning of the operation.

Non-stored SFC action: it is a list of statements, executed at each central unit

action cycle, when the corresponding step is active.

Operand Variable or constant expression processed by an elementary IL

(IL) instruction.

Operation Basic instruction of the IL language. An operation is generally

(IL) associated to an operand in an instruction.

Output Variables linked to an output device.

Power rail Main left and right vertical rails at the extremities of an ladder
diagram.

Program Basic programming unit in a project. A program is described with

one language, and is placed in the hierarchy architecture of the
project in case of modular project.

Project Programming area, which groups all the information (programs,

variables, ...).

Pulse SFC action: it is a list of statements executed only once when the
action corresponding step is activated.

Reference Decimal number (from 1 to 65535) which identifies an SFC step

number or transition in an SFC program.
(SFC)

Register Current result of an IL sequence.

(IL)

Separator Special character (or group of characters) used to separate the

identifiers in a literal language. A separator may represent an
operation.

Sequential Graphic language: the process is described as a set of steps,

Function linked by transitions. Actions are attached to the steps.
Chart Transitions are detailed as boolean conditions.

ABB Control Page v 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Lexicon

Sequential Group of the programs of a project. The execution of those

section programs follows the dynamic rules of the SFC language.

SFC Sequential Function Chart language.

Step Basic graphic component of the SFC language. A step represents

a steady situation of the process, and is drawn as a square. A
step is referenced by a number. The activity of a step is used to
control the execution of the corresponding actions.

Sub- Program written with any language excepted SFC, and called by
program another program, called its owner program.

Token Graphical marker used to show the active steps of an SFC

(SFC) program.

Toolbox Small child window of an graphic editing tool window, which

groups the main buttons for the selection of the graphic
components.

Transition Basic graphic SFC component. A transition represents the

condition between different SFC steps. A transition is referenced
by a number. A boolean condition is attached to each transition.

Validity of Attribute of a transition. A transition is validated when all the

a preceding steps are actives.
transition

Variable Unique representation of elementary data which is processed in

the programs of project.

ABB Control Page vi 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

A User’s guide

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User’s guide

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

A USER’S GUIDE
1 Getting started...........................................................................................................A-3
2 Using the project manager .......................................................................................A-4
2.1 Project manager description...................................................................................A-4
2.2 Printing a project document ...................................................................................A-7
3 Making a modular project......................................................................................A-11
4 Using editors ............................................................................................................A-15
4.1 Using the FBD/LD editor.....................................................................................A-15
4.1.1 Basics of the FBD/LD languages ..................................................................A-15
4.1.2 Entering a FBD diagram................................................................................A-17
4.1.3 Working on an existing diagram ...................................................................A-19
4.1.4 Display options..............................................................................................A-21
4.1.5 Other AC31GRAF tools................................................................................A-22
4.1.6 Style and modification tracking.....................................................................A-23
4.2 Using the SFC editor............................................................................................A-26
4.2.1 SFC language main topics.............................................................................A-26
4.2.2 Entering SFC chart ........................................................................................A-28
4.2.3 Working on an existing SFC chart ................................................................A-30
4.2.4 Entering the level 2 programming.................................................................A-31
4.2.5 Selecting a variable from list.........................................................................A-35
4.2.6 Using the SFC gallery ...................................................................................A-36
4.3 Using the Quick LD editor...................................................................................A-37
4.3.1 Basics of the LD language.............................................................................A-37
4.3.2 Entering a LD diagram ..................................................................................A-39
4.3.3 Working on an existing diagram ...................................................................A-42
4.3.4 Display options..............................................................................................A-43
4.3.5 Calling other AC31GRAF tools ....................................................................A-43
4.3.6 Selecting a variable from list.........................................................................A-44
4.4 Using the IL editor ...............................................................................................A-45
4.4.1 File commands ..............................................................................................A-45
4.4.2 Editing commands.........................................................................................A-46
4.4.3 Options ..........................................................................................................A-47
4.4.4 Selecting a variable from list.........................................................................A-47
5 Editor common tools ...............................................................................................A-48
5.1 Declaring variables ..............................................................................................A-48
5.1.1 Using the variable list in declaration mode ...................................................A-48
5.1.2 Using the variable list in selection mode.......................................................A-49
5.2 Cross References..................................................................................................A-53
5.3 Build the application ............................................................................................A-55
5.4 Creating graphics .................................................................................................A-56
5.4.1 Drawing chart ................................................................................................A-56
5.4.2 Object description .........................................................................................A-58
5.4.3 Commands of the "File" menu ......................................................................A-60
5.4.4 Options ..........................................................................................................A-60
6 Control panel ...........................................................................................................A-62
6.1 Using the control panel ........................................................................................A-62
6.2 Time diagrams .....................................................................................................A-66
6.3 On line list............................................................................................................A-68

ABB Control Page A-1 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

6.4 Status / Diagnosis.................................................................................................A-71

6.5 Configuration .......................................................................................................A-72
7 User’s library...........................................................................................................A-75
7.1 User’s function.....................................................................................................A-75
7.2 Variables for a user’s function .............................................................................A-76
7.3 Compiling a user’s function.................................................................................A-76

ABB Control Page A-2 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

1 Getting started
This chapter covers the installation of the AC31GRAF workbench. It also includes a
short example of an AC31GRAF application, giving the user a brief outline of its main
features and enabling the immediate use of AC31GRAF.

Installing AC31GRAF

This chapter covers the installation of the AC31GRAF Workbench and how to set up
the computer for application development.

Hardware and software requirements

The AC31GRAF Workbench can be installed on any computer meeting the minimum
qualifications for Windows Version 3.1. However, the following hardware is
recommended for application development:

• A personal computer using an 80486 or higher microprocessor

• 8 megabytes of conventional and extended memory
• One 3.5-inch (1.44 megabyte) disk drive
• One hard disk with at least 20 megabytes of available space
• A graphic VGA or SVGA adapter and compatible monitor
• A mouse (required for graphic development tools)
• A parallel LPT1 port

Before installing the AC31GRAF workbench, one of the following software should
already be included on the system:

• Windows Version 3.1 running in 386 enhanced mode

• Windows 95
• Windows NT Version 3.51 or 4.00

Using the installation program

The AC31GRAF Workbench is installed by using SETUP. This program copies the
AC31GRAF software from the AC31GRAF disks onto the user's hard disk.

SETUP is a Windows program.

To install AC31GRAF, the following steps must be performed:

• Insert Disk 1 into the appropriate drive

• From Program Manager, select the "SETUP.EXE" to start the installation.

ABB Control Page A-3 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

2 Using the project manager

2.1 Project manager description

To create a new project, push the "New" button. Following this, a dialog box appears
allowing the user to give a name to the project, to select the CPU type (serie 40,
series 50, Controller, series 90 or series 30), and finally to select the language (SFC,
FBD/LD, Quick LD , IL or modularize).

ABB Control Page A-4 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The new project name must conform to the following rules :

- the name cannot exceed 8 characters

- the first character must be a letter
- the following characters can be letters or digits.

It is possible to take the modularize choice instead of a specific language in order to

build a modular project. If the project is not modular, the editor of the selected
language is opened and the program has the name «main» by default.
On the other hand, if the project is created as modularize, the Program management
window is opened in order to create programs.

Editing the project descriptor

The ”File / Project descriptor” command is used to edit the project text descriptor.
This document fully identifies the project from the others on the project list. The
project descriptor can also be used to record any remarks during the project lifetime.

The History of modifications

AC31GRAF stores any information relative to a component of a project in a history

file. Each modification is identified in the history by a title, a date and a time. There is
one history file for each project.
The “File / History” command allows the user to view or print the history of
modifications for the selected project. The user can select one or more items in the
main list, and press the following buttons:

OK...................................... closes the window.

Print ................................... sends the contents of the list to the printer.
Selected ............................ removes the selected items from the list.
Erase /All ........................... clears the complete list.
Search/Find....................... find a pattern in the list.

Make a project document

The “File / Print” command allows the user to build and print a complete document
about the selected project. This document can group any component (program,
variable, parameters...) of the selected project.
See description at the chapter «Printing a project document»

Using the library management

The “File / Library” command launches the user library manager.

Renaming a project

The “File / Rename” command allows the user to change the name of a selected
project.

Copying project

ABB Control Page A-5 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The “File / Copy” command allows the user to copy all the contents of the selected
project in the same CPU or to another one. When the user enters the name of the
copy, according to the rules of above, he is able to choose the CPU.

Deleting a project

The “File / Delete” command deletes the entire contents of the selected project.

Modularizing a project

The “File / Modularize” command allows the user to edit the Program management
window in order to create other programs, subroutines or interruptions.

Closing an application

The “File / Exit” command closes the application.

Uploading an application

The “Options / Upload application” command allows the user to upload the code of
a CPU. First, the user creates a new project and next, he has to select the time out
value and the COM port he wants to use, then the Control panel window is editing
and displays a default choice of the program start and a program end of the upload
address that the user can change.

Finally, the code is uploaded and the original project edited.

The uploaded project consists of a main program and, if any, of subroutines and
interruption programs. The IL editor is necessary to read the code of these different
programs.
All the variables used in the uploaded project are recorded in the global variables file.

Changing the Central Unit

The “Options / Change the Central Unit” command allows the user to change the
current CPU of the selected project.
According to the new CPU, the behavior of the project will be affected (possibility of
subroutines, interruptions, area addresses for the variables, new list of blocks).

ABB Control Page A-6 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

2.2 Printing a project document

The AC31GRAF Document Generator allows the user to build and print a complete
document for the selected project. Unlike the "Print" commands from the other
windows of the AC31GRAF Workbench, the Document Generator can be used to
print more than one component of the project in the same document, with global
format and page numbering.

The Document Generator is selected from the Project manager with :

File / Print

The "File / Print" command of the Document Generator generates the document
and send it to the printer, according to the specified table of contents. The "Print" job
may take few minutes to build and format the document. It is highly recommended to
wait until "Printing Job" is done in the AC31GRAF Document Generator window,
before running other commands of the AC31GRAF Workbench. Building the whole
document may require a large space on the hard disk. An error message will be
displayed if the disk is full. In such a case, the user will have to either free up disk
space by removing files, or reduce the size of the print job. When the "File / Print"
command is run, a dialog box appears. It allows the user to enter a note describing
the actual print command. Those notes are stored in a history file, and will be printed
on the first page of any future document (including the present one).

ABB Control Page A-7 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The commands of the "Edit" menu are used to define the elements of the project
that must be inserted in the document. A choice of commands allow the user to use
a default table (with all the components of the project), build a specific table (with
only some components) or move items in the table and modify it. Any information
about the project may be inserted in the project document. No information from
another project or from AC31GRAF libraries may appear in this document.

Inserting a new item

When the "Edit / Insert" command is run, the "Add item" dialog box appears. It
allows the user to insert items (components of the project) into the table of contents.

For an item relative to a program, use the "Program" combo box to select a program
name. Press the "Add" button to insert the selected item to the table of contents.
The same item can appear only once in the table.

Clearing table

The "Edit / Clear" command resets the table of contents, so that it can be totally
rebuilt using single item insertion.

Default table

The "Edit / Default list" command defines a standard table of contents for the
document, which includes all the components of the project. The standard table
consists of:

• Project descriptor
• Global variables
• MAIN: Local variables
• MAIN: Source code
• Condensed cross references
• Detailed cross references
• History of modifications

Cut and paste

The "Edit / Cut" and "Edit / Paste" commands move items in the list, in order to
customize the order of the table. The Document Generator allows multiple selection
so that a group of items may be cut and pasted.

The commands of the "Options" menu are used to define and customize the format
of the generated document.

Page format

ABB Control Page A-8 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The "Options / Page format" command is used to define the main parameters
operated by the Document Generator when formatting a page. The following
parameters can be specified:

• Left margin: (1 or 2 centimeters, or no margin)

• Page border: When this option is selected, a border is drawn around any printed
page.

Page title

The “Options / Page Title" command is used to define the contents of the title box
printed at the bottom of any page. The standard layout of this box is as follows :

Text1 date
AC31GRAF - Project
ABB Text2 'PrName'
Text3 page

The first line of the main title (with the name of the AC31GRAF project), the current
date and the page number are automatically generated by the Document Manager,
and cannot be changed.

The three lines of text on the left side of the box (text1, text2, text3) and the second
line of the main title are user defined. The user also can change the logo printed in
the box on the left. To use another logo, the user has to specify the pathname of a
bitmap image file (.BMP). The image can have any dimension. It will be stretched or
shrunk, according to the exact dimensions of the printed page. Clicking on the logo
area, in the dialog box, shows the new specified image. The image file must be on
the disk (at the specified directory and with the specified filename) when the "File /
Print" command is run.

Selecting character fonts

The "Options / Text font" and "Options / Title font" commands are used to define
the fonts of characters used when printing text, and titles for any item of the
document. The size and style of characters may also be selected for text and titles.
The selection of a font is made with the standard dialog box defined by Windows.
Any text (literal programs, names within diagrams...) will be printed with the selected
size, style and font of characters. Only titles will be printed with the font selected for
titles.

If the fonts of characters are not defined, the standard font of the printer will be used
for any text, with the following styles:

• "Normal" style for texts and names within diagrams

• "Bold" style for titles

Separate SFC levels

ABB Control Page A-9 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The "Options / Separate SFC levels" option directs the system to print, for each
SFC program, first the level 1 of the SFC (chart and comments), and then the level 2
programming. When this option is not checked, levels 1 and 2 appear together on
the same printout.

ABB Control Page A-10 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

3 Making a modular project

There is two ways to have a modular project :
-select modularize in the dialog box when create a project.
-select the modularize menu item on a no-modular project.

So, the program management window is edited and then the user is able to create
some programs.

Creating a new program

The “File / New” command allows the user to create a new

program/subroutine/interruption for the project.
For a subroutine and an interruption, SFC editor can not be used.

The user has to enter the name of the program, the language and the type of the
program.

If a program is created, a blue icon appears in the window program management, for
a subroutine, the icon is green and for an interruption the icon is red. The name of
the program is set at the right of the icon.

Icon for IL language :

Icon for FBD/LD language :

ABB Control Page A-11 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Icon for SFC language :

Icon for Quick LD language:

A project can contains only three interruption programs : two hard interruptions and a
soft one.
For a interruption program, the name contains the type of the interruption (#1 or #2
for a hard interruption, and the cycle time for the soft interruption).

Some CPU do not support subroutine and interruption program, they are : serie 30
and serie 90.

The Subroutines and interruption tasks are called in the main program (Il or FBD
language) with directly their name as a function block or a format parameter.

Editing a program

The “File / Edit” command displays the editor of the selected program. It has the
same result as the button open.

Editing the variables list

The “File / Variable list” command allows to edit the list of variable window.
The global variables and the local variables of the current program are shown.

Editing a diary file

The “File / Program descriptor” command allows the user to start editing the diary
file of the current edited project program. This is a text file which contains all the
notes about the modifications made to the program during its time life.

Setting an interruption program

The “File / Parameters” command allows the user to change the cycle time of the
soft interruption of the project.

Renaming a program

The “File / Rename” command allows the user to change the name of the selected
program.
The new program name must conform to the following rules :

- the name cannot exceed 8 characters

- the first character must be a letter
- the following characters can be letters or digits.

Deleting a program

ABB Control Page A-12 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The “File / Delete” command deletes the selected program/subroutine/interruption

from the current application.

Copying a program

The “File / Copy” command allows the user to copy the selected program to the
same project, so the user has to give a name for the copy and then nothing happens
for the variables.
Furthermore, the user can copy the selected program to an other project. First, there
is a detection of conflict name, and then the program is added to those of the target
project. There is a detection on variables conflict.
Each variable not used in the target project will be added to the global variables file
of this project.

Closing the program manager

The “File / Exit” command closes the program management window.

Making a graphic

The “Make / Graphics” command runs the graphic editor. This tool allows the user to
define graphic images that will be refreshed during debug, based on the state of the
application variables. The images are built with standard windows bitmap (.BMP) and
icon (.ICO) files. This requires additional graphic editing tools, such as PaintBrush,
to create bitmaps and icon files.

Building the application code

The “Make / Code generation” command starts the project code generation.
Before generating the code, any program that is still not verified is checked to detect
the syntax errors.

Verifying a program

The “Make / Verify” command allows the user to verify the syntax of the program
currently selected. When a program is verified, with no error detected, it is not re-
verified during the code generation.

Running the cross reference editor

The “Make / Cross references” command allows the user to calculate, view or print
the cross references of the project. The cross references show the user all the
occurrences of each variable in the source code of the programs, in the entire
project. This function is very useful to detect an access to a variable or any global
source, or to the list all the occurrences of a global variable in the source code.

Running the communication

The “Communication / Run communication” command opens the communication

main window, and closes the program management.

ABB Control Page A-13 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

This open is then re-opened in debug mode as soon as the communication is

established between the debugger and the target application.

Setting the communication parameters

The “Communication / Communication parameters” edits the dialog box enables

the user to define the parameters of the link for communication between the
debugger on the host PC and the target system.

The communication parameters are:

- the communication port

- the time-out (ms)
- an option for fast download. This option allows the communication to
transfer a program in the PLC about seven times faster.
WARNING : Sometimes if you use a modem, an RS485,.. the
communication works not well. In this case do not select this option.

ABB Control Page A-14 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

4 Using editors

4.1 Using the FBD/LD editor

The AC31GRAF FBD/LD graphic editor allows the user to enter complete FBD
programs, which may includes parts in LD. It combines graphic and text editing
capabilities, so both diagrams and corresponding inputs and outputs can be entered.
As the editor is more dedicated to FBD language, pure LD diagrams should rather be
entered using AC31GRAF Quick LD editor.

4.1.1 Basics of the FBD/LD languages

The FBD language is a graphic representation of many different types of equations.
Operators are represented by rectangular function boxes. Function inputs are
connected to the left side of the box. Function outputs are connected to the right
side. Diagram inputs and outputs (variables) are connected to the function boxes
with logical links. An output of a function box may be connected to the input of
another box.

The LD language enables graphic representation of boolean expressions. Boolean

AND, OR, NOT operators are explicitly represented by the diagram topology.
Boolean input variables are attached to graphic contacts. Boolean output variables
are attached to graphic coils. Contacts and coils are connected together and to left
and right power rails by horizontal lines. Each line segment has a boolean state of
FALSE or TRUE. The boolean state is the same for all the segments directly linked
together. Any horizontal line connected to the left vertical power rail has the TRUE
state.

ABB Control Page A-15 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

LD and FBD diagrams are always interpreted from the left to the right, and from the
top to the bottom. Refer to the AC31GRAF Manual Part B for more details about LD
and FBD languages. These are the basic graphic components of the LD and FBD
languages, such as supported by the FBD/LD editor:

Left power rail

Rungs must be connected on the left to a left power rail, which represents the initial
"TRUE" state. AC31GRAF FBD editor also allows to connect any boolean symbol to
a left power rail.

Right power rail

Coils may be connected on the right to a right power rail. This is an optional feature
when using the AC31GRAF FBD/LD editor. If a coil is not connected on the right, it
includes a right power rail in its own drawing.

LD vertical "OR" connection

LD vertical connection accepts several connections on the left and several

connections on the right. Each connection on the right is equal to the OR
combination of the connections on the left.

Contacts

A contact modifies the boolean data flow, according to the state of a boolean
variable. The name of the variable is displayed upon the contact symbol. The
following types of contacts are supported by AC31GRAF FBD/LD editor:

....................................... direct contact

....................................... negated contact
....................................... contact with positive (rising) edge detection
....................................... contact with negative (falling) edge detection

Coils

A coil represents an action. It must be connected on the left to a boolean symbol

such as a contact. The name of the variable is displayed upon the coil symbol. The
following types of coils are supported by AC31GRAF FBD/LD editor:

....................................... direct coil

....................................... negated coil
....................................... "set" action coil
....................................... "reset" action coil

Function blocks

ABB Control Page A-16 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

A block in an FBD diagram can represent a function, a function block, a sub-program

or an operator. Inputs and outputs must be connected to variables, contacts or coils,
or other block inputs or outputs. Formal parameter names are displayed inside of the
block rectangle.

Labels

Labels can be placed everywhere in the diagram. Labels are used as targets for
jump instructions, to change the execution order in the diagram. Labels are not
connected to other elements. It is highly recommended to place labels on the left of
the diagram, in order to increase the diagram readability.

Jumps

A jump symbol always refers to a label, placed elsewhere in the diagram. Its left
connection must be linked to a boolean point. When the left connection is TRUE, the
execution of the diagram directly jumps to this target label. Note that backward jumps
are dangerous as they may lead to a blocking of the PLC loop in some cases.

Variables

Variables in the diagram are represented inside small rectangles, connected on the
left or on the right to other elements of the diagram.

Connection links

Connection links are drawn between elements put in a diagram. Links are always
drawn from an output to an input point (in the direction of the data flow).

Connection links with boolean negation

Some boolean links are represented with a small circle on their right extremity. This
represents a boolean negation of the information transported by the link.

User defined corners

User defined points may be defined on links. They allow the user to manually control
the routing of a link. If no corner is placed, the AC31GRAF FBD/LD editor uses a
default routing algorithm.

4.1.2 Entering a FBD diagram

To enter a diagram, you have to place elements (blocks, variables, contacts, coils...)
in the graphic area, and draw links between them.

Inserting objects

ABB Control Page A-17 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

To insert an object in a diagram, select the corresponding button in the toolbar and
click in the graphic area, where you want to insert it.

Selecting objects

Selecting graphic objects is needed for most of the editing commands. The
AC31GRAF LD/FBD graphic editor enables the selection of one or more existing
objects in the diagram area. To select objects, the "select" (button with an arrow)
choice must be checked in the editor toolbar. To select one object, the user only has
to click on its symbol. To select a list of objects, drag the mouse in the diagram and
select a rectangle area. All the graphic objects that intersect the selection rectangle
are marked as "selected". A selected object is drawn with little black squares around
its graphic symbol. By making a new selection, all previously selected objects are
unselected. To remove the existing selection, simply click with the mouse on an
empty area, outside of the rectangle which borders the selected objects.

Inserting comments

Comments may be inserted anywhere in the diagram. Comments have no influence

on the program execution. They allow a higher readability of the diagram. To insert a
comment block, select this button in the toolbar, and drag the mouse to select the
rectangle area where comment must be drawn. Then enter the text of the comment.
No special leading or trailing characters such as "(*" and "*)" are needed when
entering the text of a comment block. A comment block may be resized by dragging
the corners of its border when it is selected.

Moving objects

To move objects in the diagram, you have to select them, and drag the mouse to
move the selected area in the diagram. To move connected objects, the user simply
has to move the graphic symbols put on the diagram. The AC31GRAF LD/FBD
editor will automatically redraw the connection lines between the objects that were
moved, based on their new location.

Drawing links

Select one of these buttons in the toolbar to draw a link between connection points of
existing elements. If you draw a link from a connection point to an empty location in
the diagram, it is automatically terminated by a user defined corner, so that you can
continue drawing another segment.

Changing link drawing

The "Tools / Move line" command is used when a link is selected in the diagram to
change its automatic routing. This command has no effect when the link is
connected to a user defined corner. When a link is drawn as three segments, this
command changes the position of the second segment. Below are examples:

ABB Control Page A-18 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Changing the type of a link

You can easily change the type of link (with or without boolean negation) by double
clicking with the mouse on its right extremity.

Drawing LD rungs

To draw a new LD rung, first insert the left power rail. Then place a coil: it will be
automatically linked to the power rail. Other contacts and vertical OR connections
may be directly inserted on the rung line, without drawing any new connection link.
When a new LD contact or coil is inserted in an empty space of the editing area, the
new horizontal rung line is automatically drawn from the new inserted element to the
existing power rails on the left and on the right. This line is not automatically drawn if
the new contact or coil is not placed between power rails. The new inserted contact
or coil can then be freely moved on the drawn rung. The horizontal lines created by
the editor while inserting a LD contact or coil symbol can be selected and deleted.
You can insert a new LD contact or coil symbol on the horizontal line of an existing
rung. The editor automatically cuts the rungs and connects it to the left and right
connection points of the new inserted contact or coil.

Multiple connections

A multiple connection can be created on the right of any output point. It means that
the information is broadcasted to several other points in the diagram. The same
state is propagated on each extremity on the right. The number of lines drawn at the
right of an output connection point is not limited. Two connection lines cannot have
their right extremity connected on the same input point, except for the following LD
symbols:

........................................ right power rail

........................................ multiple connection on the left (OR) operator

These LD symbols can have an unlimited number of inputs.

4.1.3 Working on an existing diagram

The commands of the "Edit" menu are used to change or complete an existing
diagram. Most of these commands act on the elements currently selected in the
diagram.

Correcting a diagram

The DEL key can be used to remove the selected elements. Pending links are
deleted with selected elements. Use "Edit / Undo" command to restore elements

ABB Control Page A-19 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

after a DEL command. The DEL command can also be applied to a group of
elements selected in the diagram. The "Cut", "Copy", "Paste" commands of the
"Edit" menu are used to move or copy selected elements.

Find and replace

The "Edit / Find" and "Edit / Replace" menu commands are used to find and
replace texts in the diagram. Only complete names can be found. Research acts on
contacts, coils, block names, variables and labels. It cannot be used to find a string
in a comment text. The Replace command cannot be used to change the name of a
block. The research can be made upward or downward, starting at the current
selection position. It "loops" when the limits of the diagram are reached.

Displaying the execution order

When an FBD diagram includes backward loops, the execution order cannot follow
the single left to right / top to bottom method. In order to avoid confusion, use the
"Tools / Show execution order" command or press Control + F1 keys to display
the execution order that will be used at compiling time. Tags numbered from 1 to N
are displayed close to symbols that lead to an action (coils, set variables and
function blocks).

Entering symbols and texts

Double click with the mouse on an element to enter the associated symbol or text.
This applies to variables, contacts and coils, comment texts and labels. When used
on a contact or coil, this also allows to change its type (direct, negated...).
If the "Auto input" mode is checked in the "Options" menu, the variable symbol
must be entered immediately each time a new contact or coil is inserted.
The symbol must always be entered immediately when a variable or label is inserted.

Variable name Button to call the

variable list

If the “Manual keyboard input” mode is selected in the “Options” menu, the
variable name is directly catch in a field. Enter the new text and hit Enter to validate,
or Esc to give up. The field used for this mode can not be closed with the mouse.
When you enter the variable name and you hit Enter, if the variable does not already
exists, the variable list is opened to complete the variable definition.
When you click on the button to call the variable list, if the variable already exists, the
variable list will be opened on this variable.

Selecting function block type

Double click with the mouse on a block is used to change its type. The block type is
selected from the list of available operators, functions and function blocks. This

ABB Control Page A-20 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

command also allows to change the number of input points in the case of a
commutative operator (e.g. AND, OR, ADD, MUL...).

Getting free space

When you press the right button of the mouse in the FBD drawing area, a popup
menu is displayed. It contains the following commands that can be used to insert or
remove free space at the location of the mouse cursor:

Insert rows ........................ This command inserts horizontal free space,

made of 4 rows according to the grid step, starting
at the position of the mouse cursor where popup
menu is open.

Delete rows ....................... This command removes unused horizontal space

(rows) starting at the position of the mouse cursor
where popup menu is open. This command
cannot be used to remove FBD elements.

When popup menu is open, a gray line in the FBD drawing area indicates where
empty space will be inserted or removed.

4.1.4 Displaying options

The commands of the "Options" menu are used to customize the drawing of the
FBD diagram on the screen.

Layout customization

The "Options / Layout" command opens a dialog box where are grouped all the
parameters and options concerning the editor workspace and the drawing of the
graphic diagram. Use the check boxes in the "Workspace" groupbox to display or
hide editor toolbars and status bar. Options of the "Document" groupbox allows you
to show or hide points of the editing grid, and to enable/disable the use of colors for
the drawing.

Switching name and address

The “Options / Name/address” command switches the symbol of a variable by his

address and vice versa.

Selecting LD toolbar

The “Options / LD toolbar” command selects the LD toolbar.

Selecting FBD toolbar

ABB Control Page A-21 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The “Options / FBD toolbar” command selects the FBD toolbar.

Auto input variable list manager

The “Options / Auto input” command edit the variable list manager when a variable
is put.

Manual keyboard input

The “Options / Manual keyboard input” command allows the user to enter directly
the symbol of the variable.

Setting the communication parameters

The “Options / Link configuration” command allows the user to modify the
communication parameters.

Zoom

Options of the "Zoom" groupbox allows you to select a main zoom ratio. You can
also use the "zoom" button in the editor toolbar to swap between default zoom ratios.

4.1.5 Other AC31GRAF tools

Verifying (compiling) the program

The "File / Verify" command runs the AC31GRAF code generator to verify the
programming syntax of the currently edited program. In case of SFC language, both
level 1 and 2 are checked.

Running debugger

The "File / PLC communication” command runs the AC31GRAF graphic debugger
real connected mode, and re-opens the edited FBD/LD program in debug mode.
Used in debug mode, no modification can be entered in the program.

Editing the variable list

The "File / Variable list" command is used to edit the list of variables for the current
application and the current program.

Making a Graphic

The “File / Graphics” command runs the graphic editor. This tool allows the user to
define graphic images that will be refreshed during debug, based on the state of the
application variables. The images are built with standard windows bitmap (.BMP) and

ABB Control Page A-22 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

icon (.ICO) files. This requires additional graphic editing tools, such as PaintBrush,
to create bitmaps and icon files.

Printing the program

The "File / Print" command outputs the edited program on a printer. This command
produces a draft listing of the program. More detailed information is given when the
project document generator is used.

Selecting a variable from the variables list

When editing a text program the "Edit / Insert variable" allows the selection of a
declared variable name to be inserted at the current position of the caret. When
editing LD or FBD programs, variable selection is required for the description of
contacts coils, block I/O parameters or FBD variable boxes. In both cases, the
"Select" dialog box is open to select a declared variable.

To select a variable, click on its name in the list. Its name and comment are then
displayed on the top of the list. Then press the "OK" button to confirm its selection. It
is also possible to directly enter a variable name in the edit control without using the
list.

For the graphicals programs (SFC, FBD and Quick LD) the "Edition / Copy drawing
(metafile)" copy an image of a program in metafile form into the Window clipboard.
So, it can be copied in others applications. For the SFC programs, only the
information of the level 1 are copied into the image (graph, references and
comments).

4.1.6 Style and modification tracking

The AC31GRAF LD/FBD editor enables you to assign a graphic style to any
component of a LD/FBD diagram. A style is mainly defined as a special diagram
colouring. But AC31GRAF also used styles to enable modification tracking in
diagram for version control purpose.

Note that styles are not visible during simulation or on-line debug, as colours (red
and blue) are used in that mode to highlight TRUE / FALSE states of spied variables.

Predefined style

The following styles are pre-defined:

Normal............................... Default drawing (black). For modification tracking,

"normal" style indicates that elements having that
style are part of the original diagram. "Normal"

ABB Control Page A-23 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

style elements are normally scanned during

execution.

Modified ............................ Elements marked as "modified" are painted in

pink. For modification tracking, the "modified"
style is used to highlight elements that have been
added or changed after the original release of the
diagram. "Modified" style elements are normally
scanned during execution.

Deleted .............................. Elements marked as "deleted" are painted in gray,

with dashed lines. Such elements are not taken
into account for the execution of the diagram. This
style is used to keep a track of elements removed
after the original release when version control is
required.

Custom .............................. In addition to predefined style, AC31GRAF

LD/FBD editor allows you to select any color to be
applied to a part of the diagram. Such elements
are considered as having a "Custom" style. The
use of "Custom" style has no effect on the
diagram execution at run time.

Use the commands of "Style" sub-menu in "Edit" menu to manually apply a style to
selected elements.

Modification tracking

The use of styles, and the availability of the "Deleted" style allows automatic
modification tracking in an existing diagram. Use the "Mark modifications"
command in "Edit/Style" menu to enable or disable modification tracking.

When the "Mark modifications" option is set, all elements changed in or added to
the diagram are automatically set with "Modified" style. When an element is deleted,
using "Delete" or "Cut" commands, they are not visually removed from the diagram,
but simply marked with "Deleted" style. This enables the user to automatically keep
a trace of all modifications entered in the diagram.

Use the "Edit/Style/Remove all deleted items" to actually remove all elements
marked with "Deleted" style from the LD/FBD diagram. This command does not take
care of the current selection, and always applies to the entire diagram.

To "restore" one element marked with the "Deleted" style, select the desired element
and apply to it the "Normal" style, the "Modified" style or any "Custom" style. Such
operation may lead to invalid connections (more than one link connected to the same
input point) that will be detected during next program verification.

ABB Control Page A-24 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

For graphic programs (SFC, FBD), you can also use the "Edit / Copy drawing"
command to copy in the clipboard the drawing of the chart in metafile format, so that
it can be pasted in other applications such as word processors. For SFC programs,
only the level 1 information (chart, numbering and level 1 comments) appears on the
copied metafile.

ABB Control Page A-25 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

4.2 Using the SFC editor

The SFC language is used to describe operations of a sequential process. It uses a

simple graphic representation for the different steps of a process, and conditions that
enable the change of active steps. An SFC program is entered by using the
AC31GRAF graphic SFC editor. SFC is the core of the IEC 1131-3 standard. The
other languages usually describe the actions within the steps and the logical
conditions for the transitions. The AC31GRAF graphic SFC editor allows the user to
enter complete SFC programs. It combines graphic and text editing capabilities, thus
allowing the entry of both the SFC chart, and the corresponding actions and
conditions.

4.2.1 SFC language main topics

The SFC language is used to represent sequential processes. It divides the process
cycle into a number of well-defined successive steps (self-contained situations),
separated by transitions. Refer to the AC31GRAF Languages Reference Manual
PART B for more details on the SFC language.

SFC components are joined by oriented lines. The default orientation of a line is up
to down. These are the basic graphic components used to build an SFC chart:

........................................ Initial step

........................................ Step
........................................ Transition
........................................ Jump to a step
........................................ Macro step

ABB Control Page A-26 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

........................................ Macro beginning step

........................................ Macro ending step

The SFC programming is usually separated into two different levels: The Level 1
shows the graphic chart, reference numbers of the steps and the transitions, and
comments attached to the steps and the transitions. The Level 2 is the IL
programming of the actions within the steps and IL or Quick LD for the conditions
attached to the transitions. Actions or conditions may refer to sub-programs written
in other languages (FBD, LD, Quick LD or IL). Below is an example of level 1 and
level 2 programming:

Level 1: Level 2:

10 Start mixing 10 Start mixing

Action (P):
LD VAL_10
Mixing done ST MixLevel
11
End_action;

Mixing done
11
LD MixLevel
GT V_100;

The level 2 programming of a step is entered in a text editor. It can include action
blocks programmed in IL. The level 2 programming of a transition can be entered
either in IL or Quick LD languages.

Divergences and convergences

Divergences and convergences are used to represent multiple links between steps
and transitions. Simple divergences or convergences represent different inclusive
possibilities between different sub parts of the process.

Single divergence (OR)

Warning: following transitions are not
implicitely exclusive

Single convergence (OR)

Double divergences represent parallel processes.

ABB Control Page A-27 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Double divergence (AND)

These are parallel

processes

Double convergence (AND)

Jump to a step

The SFC editor only allows the user to draw links in the up to down direction. A
jump to a step can be used to represent a link to an upper part of the chart.
Following charts are equivalent:

1 1

2 4 2 4

3 5 3 5

6 6

Jump to a transition is forbidden, and must be explicitly represented as a double

(AND) convergence.

Macro steps

A macro step is a unique representation of a stand-alone group of steps and

transitions. A macro step begins with a beginning step and terminates with an
ending step.

The detailed representation of a macro step must be described in the same SFC
program. The macro-step symbol must have the same reference number as the
macro beginning step. A macro step description may contain another macro step.

4.2.2 Entering SFC chart

To draw an SFC chart, the user simply has to introduce the significant components
of the chart. All the single lines joining two elements (horizontally or vertically) are

ABB Control Page A-28 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

drawn automatically by the SFC editor. To place an SFC component on the chart,
the user has to move the selection to appropriate location and select the type of the
component in the editor toolbar. The symbol is inserted at the current position. The
following keyboard sequences can also be used:

.................................... Insert an initial step

.................................... Insert a single step
.................................... Insert a transition
.................................... Insert a jump to a step
............................. Insert an OR divergence or convergence / Add
branches
............................. Insert an AND divergence or convergence / Add
branches
.................................... Insert a macro step
............................. Insert begin or end step for the body of a macro
step

(The " " symbol indicates a combination with SHIFT key)

The editing grid shows matrix cells. An editor option allows the user to show or
hide the grid during chart input. The grid is very useful for initial layout of SFC chart,
or selecting sub-parts of the chart. Use the "Options / Layout" command to display
or hide the grid.

The AC31GRAF SFC editor always shows the current position in the matrix. The
focused cell is marked in gray. The small square on its bottom right corner can be
used to freely resize the cells. The X/Y ratio of the cells can also be changed this
way.

Creating a divergence or convergence

Divergences and convergences are always drawn from the left to the right. To
draw a divergence or a convergence, its left corner has to be placed on the chart
area. The type of drawing (simple or double) is set by selecting one of these buttons
in the toolbar.

............................. Insert an OR divergence or convergence / Add

branches
............................. Insert an AND divergence or convergence / Add
branches

Adding branches to divergences

The start and stop position of each auxiliary branch is placed on the divergence or
convergence line using these buttons in the toolbar. The left corner of the divergence

ABB Control Page A-29 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

or convergence must be present before inserting new branches. The right corners
have the same style (simple or double) as the main left corner. Right corners cannot
be placed if the main left corner has not been added.

............................. Insert an OR divergence or convergence / Add

branches
............................. Insert an AND divergence or convergence / Add
branches

Inserting a macro step

This button is used to insert a macro step in the main chart. The body of the macro
step must be entered elsewhere in the same SFC program.

Body of a macro step

Macro steps must be described in the same SFC program as the main chart. A
macro step must start with a beginning step and stop with an ending step. The
sub-chart described as the macro implementation must be self-contained. The
macro beginning step must have the same reference as the macro-step symbol of
the main branch.

4.2.3 Working on an existing SFC chart

You can use either the mouse or keyboards arrows to select a rectangle area in the
chart. The whole selected area is marked in gray. The commands of the "Edit" menu
can then used:

Cut / copy / delete / paste commands

The following commands are available from the "Edit" menu when the "arrow"
button is selected in the editor toolbar:

Cut ..................................... Move selected rectangle from the screen to the

SFC clipboard
Copy .................................. Copy selected rectangle from the screen to the
SFC clipboard
Delete ................................ Clear (delete) selected rectangle
Paste.................................. Insert contents SFC clipboard at the current
position

The "Edit / Paste" copies SFC clipboard to the screen. Copy / Paste commands
work on both SFC chart and step/transition level 2 programming. It is also possible to
copy a chart in a program and paste it in another SFC program. Elements are
inserted before the currently selected position.

Move elements

ABB Control Page A-30 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

When SFC elements are selected in the SFC chart, you can move them to another
location of the chart by dragging the selection with the mouse. While you drag the
selection, the initial location of selected elements is hatched.

The destination area for moved elements must be empty. No insertion is possible
while moving SFC symbols.

Renumbering steps and transitions

Each step or transition is identified by a logical number in the SFC chart. The "Edit /
Renumber" command allows the user to automatically set up numerically sequential
reference numbers for any of the steps and the transitions of the currently edited
SFC program. When a step number is changed, all the jumps to this step are
automatically updated with the new reference number. (this also applies to macro
steps and beginning steps)

Direct access to a step or transition

The "Edit / Go to" command allows the user to access an existing step or transition.
The scrolling position is automatically adapted so that the step or transition is visible.

Find and replace texts

The "Edit / Find Replace" command can be used to find or replace text strings in the
complete program (all steps and transitions). The Find/Replace dialog box is used to
enter a searched text and directly open the level 2 programming section where text
occurs.

4.2.4 Entering the level 2 programming

To enter the Level 2 text, the user must double click on the step or transition symbol.
The level 2 programming is displayed on the right of the SFC window. The
separation line between SFC chart and level 2 programming can be freely moved.

You can open one or two level 2 areas at the same time. The following commands
are available from keyboard, mouse or the "Edit" menu:

Keyboard Mouse "Edit" menu

Open in last default window Enter Double Click Edit level 2
Open in separate window Ctrl+Enter Ctrl + DoubleClick Edit Level 2 in separate window

ABB Control Page A-31 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

When two level 2 windows are visible, the separation between them can be freely
moved. The button on the right of the level 2 title bar is used to close a level 2
window.

The language for Level 2 programming is IL (Instruction List) or Quick LD. An

independent window is opened to enter the level 2 programming. You can open
several level 2 windows at the same time.

When working on a level 2 programming window, you can still access the commands
of the "Edit" menu in the main window to work on the active level 2 text or diagram.

The “Options / Refresh” can be used at any time when level 2 windows are open to
refresh the main SFC chart with modified level 2 programs.

Inserting a variable name

When programming in text language, press this button to select a variable declared
in the list of variables and insert its name at the current position of the caret.

P Inserting a Pulse action block in step

When programming the level 2 of a step, press this button to insert the template of a
Pulse action block at the current position of the caret. Below is the format of a Pulse
action block:

Action (P) :
IL statement;
...
End_Action;

Pulse actions are instructions which are executed only once when the step becomes
active. Refer to the AC31GRAF language reference for further details on SFC
programming.

Inserting a Non stored action block in step

When programming the level 2 of a step, press this button to insert the template of a
Non stored action block at the current position of the caret. Below is the format of a
Non stored action block:

Action (N) :
IL statement;
...
End_Action;

ABB Control Page A-32 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Non stored actions are instructions which are executed on every PLC cycle when the
step is active. Refer to the AC31GRAF language reference for further details on SFC
programming.

New P0 and P1 action qualifiers

AC31GRAF supports new P0 and P1 action qualifiers. When programming the level
2 of a step, press these buttons to insert the template of a P0 or P1 action block at
the current position of the caret. Below is the format of such blocks:

Action (P0) : Action (P1) :

IL statement; IL statement;
... ...
End_Action; End_Action;

P1 actions are instructions which are executed only once when the step becomes
active (same as Pulse). P0 actions are instructions which are executed only once
when the step becomes inactive. Refer to the AC31GRAF language reference for
further details on SFC programming.

Boolean actions

Other text semantics are available to directly act on a boolean variable according to
the step activity. Such actions consist of attaching the step activity signal to an
internal or output boolean variable. This is the syntax of the basic boolean actions:

var (N); ............................... assigns the step activity signal to the variable
var; ..................................... same effect (N attribute is optional)
/ var; ................................... assigns the negation of the step activity signal to
the variable

example :
%O62.00 (N); ..................... assigns the step activity signal to the output
%O62.00
%O62.00; ........................... same effect (N attribute is optional)
/ %M00.00; assigns the negation of the step activity signal to
the variable %M00.00

Other features are available to set or reset a boolean variable, when the step
becomes active. This is the syntax of set and reset boolean actions:

var (S); ........ sets the variable to TRUE when the step activity signal becomes TRUE
var (R); ............................... resets the variable to FALSE when the step
activity signal becomes TRUE

example
%O62.00 (S); ..................... sets %O62.00 to TRUE when the step activity
signal becomes TRUE
%M00.00 (R); ..................... resets %M00.00 to FALSE when the step activity
signal becomes TRUE

ABB Control Page A-33 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Transitions written in IL

The level 2 of a transition is a boolean expression. To program it in IL language, just

enter the boolean condition according to the IL syntax. Optionally, a semi colon may
be added at the end of the expression.

Transitions written in Quick Ladder

Quick LD editor is available to program the level 2 condition of a transition. In this

case, the diagram is made of just one rung, with only one coil which represents the
transition. The name of the transition is not repeated with the coil symbol. Below is
an example of transition condition programmed in Quick LD.

When programming in Quick LD, use the keyboard arrows to move the selection in
the programming logical grid, and then use the following shortcuts to insert symbols:

F2 ....................................... insert a contact the before selected symbol /

initiate the rung
F3 ....................................... insert a contact after the selected symbol
F4 ....................................... insert a contact in parallel with the selected
symbol
F6 ....................................... insert a block after the selected symbol
F7 ....................................... insert a block before the selected symbol
F8 ....................................... insert a block in parallel with the selected symbol

You can also click on the function key bar at the bottom of the level 2 window instead
of hitting function keys.

Hit RETURN when the selection is on a contact or a block I/O parameter to select a
variable or enter a constant value. Hit RETURN when the selection is on a function
block to select the type of the function block. You can also double click on a symbol
for the same effect.

Hit SPACE bar when a contact is selected to change the type of contact (direct,
negated or with pulse detection). Refer to the chapter "Using the Quick LD editor" in
this document for more details about Quick LD capabilities.

Verifying a program

The "File / Verify" command runs the AC31GRAF code generator to verify the
programming syntax of the currently edited program. In case of SFC language, both
level 1 and 2 are checked. When syntax verification is complete, the code generator
window must be closed to continue work on the program.

Running the communication

ABB Control Page A-34 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The "File / PLC communication" command runs the AC31GRAF graphic debugger
in connected mode, and re-opens the edited SFC program in debug mode. Used in
debug mode, no modification can be entered in the program.

Editing variable list

The "File / Variable list" command is used to edit the list of variables for the current
application and the current program.

Making a graphic

This "File / Graphics" command runs the graphic editor. This tool allows the user to
define graphic images that will be refreshed during debug, based on the state of the
application variables. The images are built with standard windows bitmap (.BMP) and
icon (.ICO) files. This requires additional graphic editing tools, such as PaintBrush,
to create bitmaps and icon files.

Printing the program

The "File / Print" command outputs the edited program on printer. This command
produces a draft listing of the program. More detailed information is given when the
project document generator is used.

4.2.5 Selecting a variable from list

When editing a text program (IL) the "Edit / Insert variable" allows the
selection of a declared variable name to be inserted at the current position of the
caret. When editing LD or FBD programs, variable selection is required for the
description of contacts coils, block I/O parameters or FBD variable boxes. In both
cases, the "Select" dialog box is opened to select a declared variable.

To select a variable, click on its name in the list. Its name and comment are then
displayed on the different fields. Then press the "OK" button to confirm its selection.
It is also possible to enter a variable name with a double click on the selected line in
the list, or enter manually its symbol without using the list.

4.2.6 Commands of the "Tools" menu

The following commands are available in the Tools menu. They are used to display
information in a small text list at the bottom of the SFC window:

Find in steps and transitions find occurrences of a text in all steps and transitions
and list them in the output window
Hide output window close the output list window

ABB Control Page A-35 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

When error messages or occurrences are displayed in the output window, double
click on a line to directly open the level 2 programming window at the corresponding
location.

4.2.7 Using the SFC gallery

The AC31GRAF SFC editor manages an SFC gallery: it is a collection of SFC
structures that can be inserted in any SFC chart. Elements of the SFC gallery can
optionally embed the level 2 programming of steps and transitions. Use the following
commands of the "Tools" menu:

Copy to SFC gallery ......... copy selected elements to SFC gallery

Paste from SFC gallery .... paste an SFC gallery element at the current
location

When copying to SFC gallery (i.e. creating a new SFC gallery element), you can
optionally ask to embed level 2 programming of selected SFC symbols.

ABB Control Page A-36 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

4.3 Using the Quick LD editor

The LD language enables graphic representation of boolean expressions. Boolean

AND, OR, NOT operators are explicitly represented by the diagram topology.
Boolean input variables are attached to graphic contacts. Boolean output variables
are attached to graphic coils. The AC31GRAF Quick LD editor provides easy LD
diagram entering using either keyboard or mouse. Elements are automatically linked
and arranged on rungs by the Quick LD editor. No connection is drawn manually by
the user. The Quick LD editor also arranges rungs in the diagram so that the space
filled by the diagram is always optimized.

4.3.1 Basics of the LD language

A LD program is expressed as a list of rungs where contacts and coils are arranged.
Below are the basic components of an LD diagram:

Rung head (left power rail)

Each rung begins with a left power rail, which represents the initial "TRUE" state.
AC31GRAF Quick LD editor automatically creates the left power rail when the first
contact of the rung is placed by the user. Each rung may have a logical name, which
can be used as a label for jump instructions.

Contacts

....................................... direct contact

....................................... negated contact

ABB Control Page A-37 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

....................................... contact with positive (rising) edge detection

....................................... contact with negative (falling) edge detection

Coils

A coil represents an action. The rung state (state of the link on the left of the coil) is
used to force a boolean variable. The name of the variable is displayed upon the coil
symbol. The following types of coils are supported by AC31GRAF Quick LD editor:

....................................... direct coil

....................................... negated coil
....................................... "set" action coil
....................................... "reset" action coil
....................................... coil with positive (rising) edge detection
....................................... coil with negative (falling) edge detection

Function blocks

A block in an LD diagram can represent a function, a function block, a sub-program

or an operator. Its first input and output parameters are always connected to the
rung. Other input and output parameters are literally written outside of the block
rectangle.

Rung end (right power rail)

A rung ends with a right power rail. Using the Quick LD editor, the right power rail is
automatically inserted when a coil is placed by the user.

Jump symbol

A jump symbol always refers to a rung label, id. the name of a rung defined
somewhere in the same LD diagram. It is placed at the end of a rung. When the rung
state is TRUE, the execution of the diagram directly jumps to this target rung. Note
that backward jumps are dangerous as they may lead to a blocking of the PLC loop
in some cases.

The "EN" input

On some operators, functions or function blocks, the first input does not have
boolean data type. As the first input must always be connected to the rung, another
input is automatically inserted at the first position, called "EN". The block is executed
only if the EN input is TRUE. Below is the example of a comparison operator, and
the equivalent expression:

ABB Control Page A-38 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

IF en is true
the comparison is valided and
scanned else
q := FALSE;

The "ENO" output

On some operators, functions or function blocks, the first output does not have
boolean data type. As the first output must always be connected to the rung, another
output is automatically inserted at the first position, called "ENO". The ENO output
always takes the same state as the first input of the block.
On some cases, both EN and ENO are required. Below is an example with an
arithmetic operator, and the equivalent code expressed in pseudo language:

IF en is true, the addition is

valided and scanned
en = eno
(* continue rung with eno state *)

Limitations of Quick LD editor

The AC31GRAF Quick LD editor does not allow to continue a rung (insert other
contacts or coils) on the right of a coil. If several outputs have to be made on the
same rung, the corresponding coils must be drawn in parallel.

4.3.2 Entering a LD diagram

All the editing commands of the Quick LD editor may be achieved either with the
keyboard or with the mouse.

The editing grid

The LD diagram is entered in a logical matrix. Each cell of the matrix may contain up
to one LD symbol. Use the arrows of the keyboard, or click on a cell to move the
current selection. The selected cell is marked in reverse. For some cut/copy/paste
operations, it is possible to select several cells. To do that with the mouse, just drag
the mouse cursor in the diagram. With keyboard, use arrow keys with SHIFT key
pressed.

Starting a new rung

To add a new rung to a diagram, move the selection after the last existing rung and
insert a contact (hit F2 or press the corresponding button in the function key toolbar).
A new rung with one contact and one coil is created.

Entering the rung comment

ABB Control Page A-39 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Each rung may be documented with up to two lines of text. To enter a rung comment
text, move the selection on the cell upon the rung and hit ENTER key, or double click
on this cell with the mouse:

Hit ENTER on this cell

Entering the rung label

Each rung may be identified by a name. This name can be used as a target label for
jump operations. To enter or change the label of a rung, move the selection on rung
head and hit ENTER key, or double click on this cell with the mouse:
Hit ENTER on this cell

The AC31GRAF Quick LD editor keeps the memory of the rung labels you already
entered, whether it has been specified for a rung name or a jump operation. The
"Jump/Label"' dialog box gives you the possibility either to enter a new label, or to
select an existing one.

If you enter a new name, it will automatically be added to the list. The "Remove"
button is used to remove the selected name from the list. It does not remove the
label on the rung you selected in the diagram. To do this, just press OK when the
edit box is empty.

Inserting symbols on a rung

The insertion of symbols (contacts, coils, blocks...) on an existing rung is always

made according to the current selection. You have to select a valid cell position
within the rung and hit one of the following function keys to insert:

F2 ....................................... a contact before the selected symbol (on the left)

F3 ....................................... a contact after the selected symbol (on the right)
F4 ....................................... a contact in parallel with the selected symbol
F6 ....................................... a block before the selected symbol (on the left)
F7 ....................................... a block after the selected symbol (on the right)
F8 ....................................... a block in parallel with the selected symbol

ABB Control Page A-40 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The following commands are valid when the selection is on the rung output (coil):

F5 ....................................... add a coil in parallel with the selected one

F9 ....................................... add a "Jump" symbol in parallel with the selected
one
Shift + F9 ........................... add a symbol "Return" in parallel with the selected
one

For parallel insertion (F4/F8), if several contacts of a rung are selected together, the
symbol is inserted in parallel with the group of selected elements. Below is an
example:

To insert symbols in the diagram, you can also use the commands of the "Insert"
menu. With the mouse, you can click on the key tool bar located at the bottom of the
screen, on the type of symbol you want to insert:

Entering symbols

To associate a variable symbol to a contact or a coil, select it and hit ENTER. With
the mouse, double click on the contact or coil. A variable selection box appears.
Refer to chapter "More about program editors" in this document for further
information about how to use this box. To associate a function, function block or
operator to a block, hit ENTER when the selection is on the inside its rectangle. To
associate a variable symbol to an input or output block parameter the selection must
be on the corresponding location, outside the rectangle of the block.

If the mode “Manual keyboard Input” is selected in the “Options” menu, the
variable name is directly catch in a field. Enter the new text and hit Enter to validate,
or Esc to give up. The field used for this mode can not be closed with the mouse.

Changing the type of contacts and coils

The "Edit / Change coil/contact type" changes the type of the selected contact or
coil. A contact may be direct, negated, with positive or negative edge detection. A
coil may be direct, negated, set or reset, with positive or negative edge detection.
Hitting the SPACE bar has the same effect.

Inserting a rung in a diagram

The "Edit / Insert rung" command insert a new rung in the diagram, before the
selected one. The rung is initiated with one contact and one coil.

ABB Control Page A-41 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

4.3.3 Working on an existing diagram

The commands of the "Edit" menu are used to change or complete an existing
diagram. Most of these commands act on the elements currently selected in the
diagram.

Correcting a diagram

The DEL key can be used to remove the selected elements. It is not possible to
remove a coils, a jump or return symbol when it is the only output of a rung. Use
"Edit / Undo" command to restore elements after a DEL command. The DEL
command can also be applied to a group of elements selected in the diagram. The
DEL command can be used when selection is on the rung comment text to reset it.
The DEL command, used when the selection is on the rung head, remove the entire
rung.

Copying symbols

The "Cut", "Copy", "Paste" commands of the "Edit" menu are used to move or copy
selected elements. These commands do not act on rung comments. The "Edit /
Paste special" command gives you the choice to insert the pasted elements:
• before the selected element (on the left)
• after the selected element (on the right)
• in parallel with the selected element

Managing entire rungs

All editing commands (delete, copy, cut...) act on the entire rung if the selection is on
the rung header (left power rail). This provides an easy way to arrange rungs in the
diagram, just by moving the selection in the first column. It is also possible to extend
the selection vertically so that it includes several rung headers. In this case edition
commands may be applied to a list of entire rungs.

Find and replace

The "Edit / Find" and "Edit / Replace" menu commands are used to find and
replace texts in the diagram. Only complete names can be found. Search acts on
contacts, coils, block names, block parameters and run labels. It cannot be used to
find a string in a rung comment. The Replace command cannot be used to change
the type of a block. The research can be made upward or downward, starting at
position of the current selection. It "loops" when the limits of the diagram are
reached. The following shortcuts are also available for quick research of variable
names:

ALT + F2 finds the next element with the same variable name as the element
currently selected. This feature can also be applied to function blocks and rung
labels.

ABB Control Page A-42 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

ALT + F5 finds the next coil with the same variable name as the element currently
selected. This feature is mainly used in debug mode, to quickly find out the rungs
which forces a suspicious variable.

4.3.4 Display options

The commands of the "Options" menu are used to customize the drawing of the LD
diagram on the screen, and to hide or display some types of information.

Rung comments

Use the "Options / Rung comments" command to hide or display the rung
comments in the whole diagram. Hiding the rung comments can be required to have
a more condensed view on a huge diagram, as each comment consumes one row in
the editing matrix. This option does not affect the contents of the existing rung
comments, and can be swapped at any time.

Switching name and address

Each variable, when associated to a contact, a coil or a block I/O parameter is

identified by its symbolic name. When using the menu "Options / Name/address"
the symbol appears to replace the address or vice-versa

Rawing options

The "Options / Layout" command opens a dialog box where are grouped all the
parameters and options concerning the editor workspace and the drawing of the
graphic LD diagram.

Use the check boxes in the "Workspace" groupbox to display or hide editor tool bar,
status bar and function key toolbar. Options of the "Document" groupbox allows you
to show or hide points of the editing grid, and to enable/disable the use of colors for
the drawing.

Options of the "Zoom" groupbox allows you to select a main zoom ratio. You
can also use the "zoom" button in the editor toolbar to swap between default zoom
ratios.

You can also customize the X/Y aspect ratio of cells in the editing grid. This
last option can be used to reduce the default cell width, if you commonly use short
names for variables. You can also use the "width" button in the editor toolbar to
change the X/Y aspect ratio without entering the Layout dialog box.

4.3.5 Calling other AC31GRAF tools

Verifying a program

ABB Control Page A-43 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

window must be closed to continue work on the program. If there is only one
program in the application (the edited one) the application code is generated if no
syntax error is detected. The "Options / Compiling options" command is used to
set compiling and optimizing parameters. Refer to chapter "Using the code
generator" in this document for further information about compiling and code
generation.

Running debugger

The "File / PLC Communication" commands run the AC31GRAF graphic debugger
in real connected mode, and re-opens the edited program in debug mode. Used in
debug mode, no modification can be entered in the program.

Editing the variable list

The "File / Variable list" command is used to edit the variable list of variables for the
current application and the current program. It also contains the entry points to edit
the user defined words. The local declarations or defined words relate to the
currently edited program.

Printing the program

The "File / Print" command outputs the edited program on printer. This command
produces a draft listing of the program. More detailed information is given when the
project document generator is used.

For graphic programs (SFC, FBD and Quick LD) You can also use the "Edit / Copy
drawing" command to copy in the clipboard the drawing of the chart in metafile
format, so that it can be pasted in other applications such as word processors. For
SFC programs, only the level 1 information (chart, numbering and level 1 comments)
appear on the copied metafile.

4.3.6 Selecting a variable from variable list

When editing LD or FBD programs, variable selection is required for the
description of contacts coils, block I/O parameters or FBD variable boxes. In both
cases, the "Select" dialog box is open to select a declared variable.

ABB Control Page A-44 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

4.4 Using the IL editor

This chapter only describes features and commands of the AC31GRAF text editor,
particularly when used to enter the source code of IL programs.

The AC31GRAF text editor is also used to enter the project descriptor, to edit diary
files, technical notes (on line documentation) for library elements, and each time a
text document has to be entered by the user.

4.4.1 File commands

Verifying a program

The "File / Verify" command runs the AC31GRAF code generator to verify the
programming syntax of the current edited program. When syntax verification is
complete, the code generator window must be closed to continue work on the
program.
CAUTION: Verify doesn't compile: only the syntax of each instruction is verified
Missing instruction is not detected.

Running debugger

The "File / PLC communication" command runs the AC31GRAF graphic debugger
in connected mode, and re-opens the edited IL program in debug mode. Used in
debug mode, no modification can be entered in the program.

Editing the variable list

The "File / Variable list" command is used to edit the list of variables for the current
application and the current program.

Making a Graphic

The "File / Graphic" command runs the graphic editor. This tool allows the user to
define graphic images that will be refreshed during debug, based on the state of the
application variables. The images are built with standard bitmap (.BMP) windows and

ABB Control Page A-45 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

icon (.ICO) files. This requires additional graphic editing tools, such as PaintBrush,
to create bitmaps and icon files.

Printing the program

4.4.2 Editing commands

The commands of the "Edit" menu are used to work on the edited text. Most of these
commands act on the characters currently selected in the diagram, or perform an
action at the current location of the caret.

Cut, paste, and copy

The DEL key can be used to remove the selected text. Use "Edit / Undo" command
to restore elements after a DEL command. The "Cut", "Copy", "Paste" commands of
the "Edit" menu are used to move or copy text in the program, or to insert pieces of
texts copied in the clipboard by other applications.

Find and replace

The "Edit / Find" and "Edit / Replace" menu commands are used to find and
replace texts in the program. Any character string can be found. Research can be
performed upward or backward, starting at the current location of the caret. It does
not "loops" when the limits of the program are reached.

Go to line

The "Edit / Go to line" command is used to move the caret to a specific line number.
This can be very useful to have access to a line with an error detected by the
AC31GRAF compiler in an IL program, and referenced by a line number.

Inserting a variable

Use the "Edit / Insert variable" command to insert at the caret position the symbol
of a variable or object declared in the list of variables. Symbol is selected through the
common variable selection box described in chapter "More about program editors" in
this document.

Inserting a file

The "Edit / Insert file" command inserts the whole contents of a file at the current
location of the caret. Note that only pure ASCII text files can be handled by this
command.

ABB Control Page A-46 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

4.4.3 Options
The commands of the "Options" menu are used to display or hide editor toolbars,
and select the character font. The selected character font will be used for any text
editing in all AC31GRAF Workbench.

When used to enter the source code of an IL program, the "Options / Show
keywords" command is used to show or hide a toolbox that groups the most
common keywords of IL language. Click on a button in the toolbar to insert the
corresponding keyword or operator at the current location of the caret.

4.4.4 Selecting a variable from list

Instruction List, or IL is a low level language. It is highly effective for smaller

applications or for optimizing parts of an application. Instructions always relate to the
current result (or IL register). The operator indicates the operation that must be
made between the current value and the operand. The result of the operation is
stored again in the current result.

ABB Control Page A-47 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

5 Editor common tools

5.1 Declaring variables

The AC31GRAF variable list editor is an editing tool for the declaration of the internal
variables of the application.

5.1.1 Using the variable list in declaration mode

When the variable list is edited, all the fields are filled with the characteristic of the
last used variable, and the concerned field has just to be changed. So, the user can:

- change the symbol, the comment or the value of the variable constant in order
to modify it or to change its address to enter a new variable.
- Select an address type among the list and to create a new variable.

The variable will be added to the list when the OK button will be pressed.
When leaving the variable list, the user is able to save all modification occurred to
the list.

ABB Control Page A-48 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

5.1.2 Using the variable list in selection mode

When the variable list is edited, by default, the last selected variable is highlighted in
the list. The user can:
- modify the fields of this variable in order to create an other
- double-click on the variable in the list to take it
- click on the variable in the list and to press OK to take it.

The variable will be added to the list.

Fast way to enter a variable:

(for the select and declare mode)

When the list of variables is edited, the cursor is set on the variable type field.
The user can enter manually the type he wants without using the mouse and with the
‘tab’ key, he can reach the next field in order to complete the address…Finally, he
press OK to enter the variable in the list.

Format of the variable list file

Each variable is described on one line of text. It is not possible to insert an empty
line.
Here is the exact format of the different variable records.

<type>→ <address>→<symbol>→<comment>↵
<type>→ <address>→ → <comment>↵
<type>→ <address>→<symbol>↵
<type>→ <address>↵

type .................................... Variable type ( ex : I,O, IW, …..).

address ............................. Variable address (ex: 62.01).
symbol............................... Variable symbol (ex : MOTOR). If it is a constant,
add “=<constant_value>” (ex : MOTOR=1)
Comment........................... Variable comment (ex : Motor command).
→ ........................................ Tabulation.
↵......................................... Carriage return.

What you have to know on the variable creation:

• Address
For TXT, # and #H type, there is no address.
For I, O, A, E, IW, OW, EW and AW type, the address format is : “cc.cc” or “cc,cc”
where c is a digit. For the other type, the address format is “ccc.cc” or “ccc,cc”.
For more information, to range for one type, select the type choose “Edit / Range
on”.
The maximum size for an address is 6 characters.
You can not have twice the same address.
You can not create a variable outside of its declaration area (see “ Edit / Range on
”).

• Symbol

ABB Control Page A-49 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The first character must be a letter (“a”-“z” or “A”-“Z”). The next characters must be
some letters or digits.
A symbol must not begin by ‘GT”, “GS” or “LG”.
The words BVARTMP, SFC_EVOL and BVARTMP2 are reserved and are forbidden
for symbol.
The maximum size for a symbol is 16 characters.
You can not have twice the same symbol.

• Constant
A constant type is : K, KW and KD. For these types, the field “constant” must be
filled.
The value of a constant KW is between –32768 and 32767.
The value of a constant KD is between –2147483648 and 2147483647
The value of a constant K is 0 or 1.
The maximum size for a constant is 11 characters.

• Comment
The maximum size for a comment is 100 characters.

• Variable scope
A “local” variable is a variable visible only in a program, a sub-routine or a interrupt
program.
A “global” variable is visible in an application. If a variable has no symbol, it is
considered as a global variable for the application.

For the user library:

For the P, PW, PD, Q, QW, QD type, an address and a symbol are necessary.
For types I, IW, O, OW, S: no symbol, just an address.
For the M, MW, MD, KW, KD, just a symbol is necessary.

Saving the variable list

The command “FiIe / Save” allows to save the state of the variable list.

Making the cross references

The command “File / Cross references” runs the cross reference tool.

Importing a variable list

The command “File / Import” allows to select a variable file on the disk and add all
the variables on the bottom of the list. The source file can have a PC33 file format, in
this case, the checkbox "PC33 format" must be selected.
If an address is already used in the project, a message is displayed to inform the
user and the variable is not set in the list, the same thing happens when a variable is
not inside the range value.
If the file is in an 907PC331 format, it is set in the new one.

Exporting a variable list

ABB Control Page A-50 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The command “File / Import” allows to select variables in the list, record them in a
file on a selected directory. (the file extension is ".dcl")

Cut variables

The command “Edit / Cut” erases the selected line(s) in the list and record it in the
clipboard.

Copying variables

The command “Edit / Copy” records the selected line(s) in the list in the clipboard.

Paste variables

The command “Edit / Paste” writes the contain of the clipboard in the variable list.

Inserting an empty line

The command “Edit / Insert” inserts an empty line above the selected one.

Removing a symbol

The command “Edit / Remove symbol” removes the symbol of the selected
variable.

Removing a comment

The command “Edit / Remove comment” removes the comment of the selected
variable.

Searching an address

The command “Edit / Search” allows to search a defined address and highlight the
line where the variable is found.

Sorting the variable list

The command “Edit / Sort” allows to set the list in the alphabetic order on the
variable addresses (I, IW, K, KW,…). If you save the sorted list and you open again
the variable list editor, the variables will be sorted in the alphabetic order. But the
global variables will be displayed in first and the local variables after.

Authorized values area

The command “Edit / Range on type” allows to show the authorized values area for
a selected type. Before to use this command, select a variable in the list with the
correct type ( for example the variable “O 62.00” to see the authorized values area of
the type “O”).

ABB Control Page A-51 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Creating a variables area

The command ‘’Edit / Variables area” runs a dialog box containing the current
address type and allowing to select an area of addresses. When clicking on the OK
button, all the variables are added to the bottom of the list. If an address is already
used in the project, a message is displayed to inform the user and the variable is not
set in the list, the same thing happens when a variable is not inside the range value.

Ex:

If a user selects the M type and the following area:

from: 2.3
to: 2.6

the new addresses added to the list are:

M 002.03
M 002.04
M 002.05
M 002.06

ABB Control Page A-52 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

5.2 Cross References

The AC31GRAF includes a cross-reference editor which provides user with a total
view of the declared variables in the project programs, and where they are used. The
aim of a cross reference is to list all the variables declared in the project, and to
localize at the source of each program the parts of source code where those
variables are used. The cross references are very useful for a global view of one
variable life cycle. They help to localize side effects, and to reduce the time to
understand the project during the maintenance. The cross references may also be
used for a global view of the complete list of variables of a project, so unused
variables are easily found and the complexity of the project measured.

From the variable list editor, the command “File / Cross references” runs the Cross
reference editor.

The list on the left shows the declared objects of the project (programs, variables and
defined words), and the library elements (functions and function blocks) referenced
in the project. The list on the right shows the occurrences in the programs of the
object currently selected in the first list.

Object type selection

Because a project can group a huge number of declared objects, the combo box in
the editor toolbar is used to select the type of objects which must be listed in the
window. This allows the user to have access to selected information.

Each time the cross references are re-calculated, the selection is reset to "All
objects" in order to present the complete list.

Re-calculating cross references

The "File / Re-calculate" command can be used at any time to update the cross
references according to the modifications entered in other AC31GRAF editing
windows.

Exporting cross references

The "File / Export" command is used to write the complete listing of the cross
references in an ASCII text file. This file can then be opened with other applications
such as Windows NotePad or word processors.

Searching an object

The "Edit / Search" command allows the user to directly select an variable in the
editor list. The searched variable cannot be found if it is not actually listed (when
using a selected display). It is recommended to activate the "All" selection in the
toolbar before searching for a variable.

ABB Control Page A-53 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Opening a program

The list on the right contains the occurrences of the selected object in the source
files and I/O connection of the open project. The "Edit / Open program" command
enables the user to directly open a program where the object appears. It is also
possible to double click the mouse on an occurrence (in the occurrence list) to open
the corresponding program.

ABB Control Page A-54 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

5.3 Build the application

The window of build application is automatically open with the “File / Verify”
command from the editors or with the “Make / Verify” command from the program
management window for a modularized project.

Verifying a program

The “Verify” button allows the user to verify the syntax of the program currently
selected (in the program management window or the program currently selected).

Building a project

The “Build” button allows the user to generate the code for a project.
When building a project, a verified program will not be re-verified, until its contents
has not changed.
Indeed, during the build phase, every program that is still not verified is checked to
detect the syntax error.
If no error occurs during the build phase, the code is generated and ready to be
downloaded.

Errors detected

If there is an error, a double-click on a line error sets the cursor

- on the line containing the error for the IL language
- on the picture containing the error for the FBD and LD language
- or on the current line error of the step or transition in cause for the SFC language.

The window can be resized, so the user can read both his errors and his source
code.

Exit

The “Exit” button closes the compiler window.

ABB Control Page A-55 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

5.4 Creating graphics

AC31GRAF contains a graphic editor, which allows the user to define graphic
pictures that can be animated during debug. Graphic objects must be linked to the
variables of the AC31GRAF project. The graphic picture is defined "off line", and
cannot be modified once the communication is running.

5.4.1 Drawing chart

A chart is made of one background picture, and of a set of graphic objects that will
be animated during debug. To enter the chart, the following operations must be
performed:
• Select a background picture
• Insert graphic objects
• Link objects to the variables of the project

The following graphic objects can be inserted in the chart :

Icon (boolean).................... Boolean display: two icons are used to display

either FALSE or TRUE state of the linked variable.

Bar graph (integer ) ........... Rectangle filled with one solid color. The size of
the rectangle is adjusted according to the value of
the linked analog variable.

Numerical (integer)............ Numerical display corresponding to the value of

the linked analog variable.

The background picture

The background picture is contained in a "bitmap" (.BMP) file. This picture either is
built with another tool, or can be copied from an existing graphic library. The
AC31GRAF graphic editor does not include a painting tool. The most common tool to
build bitmap files is Paintbrush, delivered with Windows. The background picture
can have any size. If the AC31GRAF graphic editing window is larger than the
background picture, unused space can be filled with any solid color. The "Draw /

ABB Control Page A-56 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Background picture" command is used to select the bitmap file and also to select a
solid color for empty space. The bitmap file must exist before it is inserted in the
chart. Press the "Browse" button of the dialog box to select an existing pathname on
the disk. A background color can be selected to fill unused space, if the selected
bitmap is smaller than the editing window.

Note: Bitmaps consume a large amount of memory. It is highly recommended to

correctly size the picture, and limit the unused space inside the bitmap rectangle.

Icons

Icons used to display boolean objects are stored in standard icon files (.ICO). These
are 32x32 pixel/16 color pictures, which can use the "transparent" color. Any icon
editor can be used to create .ICO files.

Bar graph and numerical displays

"Bar graph" and "numerical" objects can be linked to analog (or integer) variables.
The sizing direction of "bar graph" objects can be to the left, to the right, to the top or
to the bottom. Any variable of the AC31GRAF project (global or local to one
program) can be linked to a graphic object.

Inserting objects

To insert a graphic object in the chart, the following operations have to be performed:
• Select the type of object in the editor toolbar or in the "Draw" menu
• Click at the insert position in the graphic area
• Enter the definition of the object
Analog "bar graph" and "numerical" objects have a variable size. To insert such an
object, the user has to define the boundary of the rectangle, by dragging the mouse
in the drawing area. The following buttons of the editor toolbar are used to select a
type of graphic object:

........................................ Selection mode (no object can be inserted)

........................................ Insert boolean icon
........................................ Insert analog bar graph
........................................ Insert analog numerical field

Selecting objects

Selecting graphic objects is needed for most of the editing commands. The
AC31GRAF graphic editor enables the selection of one or more existing objects in
the chart area. To select objects, the "select" (button with an arrow) choice must be
checked in the editor toolbar. You can run the "Draw / Select" command or hit the
ESCAPE key to set the selection mode. To select one object, the user simply has to
click on its symbol. To select a list of objects, drag the mouse in the drawing area to
select a rectangle area. All the graphic objects that intersect the selection rectangle
are marked as "selected". A selected object is drawn with little black squares around
its graphic symbol.

ABB Control Page A-57 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

By making a new selection, any previously selected objects are unselected. To

remove the existing selection(s), simply click with the mouse on an empty area
outside of the rectangle which borders the selected objects.

Moving and resizing objects

To move one or more objects in the edited chart, select them and drag them using
the mouse to another location. Some objects, such as analog bar graphs and
numerical fields, have variable height and width. The AC31GRAF graphic editor
enables the user to change the size of such an existing object. To do this, click on
the border of the selected object, and drag the mouse to change the object size.
Boolean "icon" objects have a fixed size (32x32 pixels) and cannot be resized.

Cut and paste

The commands of the "Edit" menu are used to work on currently selected objects.
Below is the list of available commands:
• Cut the selected objects (and copy them in the clipboard)
• Clear (delete) the selected objects
• Copy the selected objects in the clipboard
• Paste the clipboard in the diagram

Pasted objects are marked as selected objects, so they can be moved to another
place in the diagram.

Note: The AC31GRAF graphic editor uses a dedicated clipboard, which contains
logical information about linked graphic files and variable names. This is not the
standard graphic or text clipboard of Windows.

Icons and bitmaps

Icon and bitmap files are created using other tools. The only information stored in the
AC31GRAF graphic definition file is the pathname of these files. It is better to store
icon and bitmap files in the AC31GRAF project directory. Therefore, only the
filenames (and not complete pathnames) are stored. This ensures that the
AC31GRAF graphic file can be transported to another platform, which may have
different directory pathnames. If the AC31GRAF Workbench has been installed in
the "c:\AC31GRAF" root directory, the directory which contains the project named
"ppp" has the following pathname :

c:\AC31GRAF\apl\ppp

Warning: Compressed bitmap files (.BMP files with Run Length Encoding
compression) are not recognized by the AC31GRAF graphic editor.

5.4.2 Object description

The parameters of an existing object can be modified, by double clicking on its
symbol in the graphic area. When the "Name" field is the active field, pressing the
"Browse" button enables the user to find the names of the variables already

ABB Control Page A-58 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

declared in the list of variables. When an "Icon file" field is the active field (for a
boolean icon), pressing the "Browse" button enables the user to find the pathname
of any of the existing icon files.

Below is the list of fields that must be entered when defining a boolean "icon"
object:

Name ................................. Name of the AC31GRAF boolean variable linked

to the graphic object.
"False" icon file ................ Pathname of the icon (.ICO) file used to display
the False" state of the linked boolean variable.
"True" icon file.................. Pathname of the icon (.ICO) file used to display
the "True" state of the linked boolean variable.
Default value ..................... Value used to display the object before it is first
refreshed by the debugger.
Command variable ........... If this option is checked, the user can modify the
value of the linked variable during debug by
double clicking on the corresponding graphic
symbol.

Below is the list of fields that must be entered when defining an analog "bar
graph" object:

Name ................................. Name of the AC31GRAF analog variable linked to

the graphic object.
Range – minimum ............ Indicates the minimum value that can be
displayed. If the value is less than this limit, the
bar graph is not displayed.
Range – maximum............ Indicates the maximum value that can be
displayed. If the value is greater or equal to this
limit, the bar graph rectangle is completely filled.
Default value ..................... Value used to display the object before it is first
refreshed by the debugger.
Direction............................ Indicates the growing direction of the filled part of
the bounded rectangle. When the variable value
increases, the filled rectangle must grow to the
left, to the right, to the top or to the bottom.
Color.................................. Color used to draw the filled part of the moving
bar.
Command variable ........... If this option is checked, the user can modify the
value of the linked variable during debug by
double clicking on the corresponding graphic
symbol.

Below is the list of fields that must be entered when defining an analog
"numerical" object:

Name ................................. Name of the ABB AC31GRAF analog variable

linked to the graphic object.

ABB Control Page A-59 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Format ............................... Indicates whether the value is displayed as an

integer or real value. The decimal part of a
displayed real value is truncated if the "integer"
format is selected.
Justification ...................... Indicates how the text (numerical value) must be
justified (left, right or center) in the bounded
rectangle.
Default value ..................... Value used to display the object before it is
refreshed by the debugger.
Command variable ........... If this option is checked, the user can modify the
value of the linked variable during debug by
double clicking on the corresponding graphic
symbol.

5.4.3 Commands of the "File" menu

The "File" menu contains the commands which allow the user to manage the
complete chart as a file.

The "File / New" command starts the editing of a new graphic chart. The
number of charts defined for a project is not limited by AC31GRAF. Before editing
the new chart, the previously opened chart is closed. The AC31GRAF graphic editing
window cannot be used to edit several charts at once. However, multiple AC31GRAF
graphic editing windows can be opened simultaneously with each used to edit a
different chart.

The "File / Open" command allows the user to close the currently edited chart
and to start editing another chart of the current project. The new selected chart
replaces the current one in the editing window. When selecting the new chart, the
"Delete" button can be used to delete an existing chart, in order to clean up the
project directory. Icon and bitmap files referenced in a chart are not erased when the
chart is deleted.

The "File / Save" command stores the currently edited chart on the disk. If the
chart is a new untitled document, the user must give it a name before saving it.
Naming a chart must conform to the following rules:
• The length of the name cannot exceed 8 characters
• The first character must be a letter
• The following ones must be letters, digits or underscore characters
• Naming is case insensitive
The "File / Save as" command allows the user to store the currently edited chart
under another name.

5.4.4 Options
The "Options" menu contains the graphic editing options for displaying the toolbar,
cursor coordinates, or selecting the state of displayed boolean objects.

The "Options / View false state" and "Options / View true state" commands
are used to select the state (false or true) of the displayed boolean "icon" objects. By
selecting one of these options, the user can simulate the state of the inserted

ABB Control Page A-60 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

boolean objects, in order to display either "false" state or "true" state icons. These
commands apply to all inserted objects. Object states cannot be changed
individually.

ABB Control Page A-61 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

6 Control panel

6.1 Using the control panel

This window is the main window of the PLC communication menu.

It can be reduced to the state of an icon, or to the state of a minimum graphic as
below :

In this state, the window is set at the right corner at the top of the window.

Close the communication

Display the extended graphic

Control menu

Transfer menu

In its normal state there four buttons below the menu items, these are:

Download the program and the constant (the user program is stored into
the flashEprom). The configuration is not sent

Run the program

Warm restart of the program

Abort the running program

Editing the on line list

ABB Control Page A-62 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The “File / On line List” edits the on-line list window. For further information see the
“On line list” chapter.

Making time diagrams

The “File / Time diagrams” command runs the time diagram tool. This tool allows
the user to watch time diagrams corresponding to the changes in the lists of
variables.

Making a graphic

The "File / Graphics" command runs the graphic editor. This tool allows the user to
define graphic images that will be refreshed during debug, based on the state of the
application variables. The images are built with standard windows bitmap (.BMP) and
icon (.ICO) files. This requires additional graphic editing tools, such as PaintBrush,
to create bitmaps and icon files.

Displaying the central unit status

The “File / Status” command edits the status window. This windows display some
information about the central unit. For further information see the “Status / diagnosis”
chapter.

Configuration

The “File / Configuration” command edits the configuration window. This window
allows the user to accede to central unit parameters. For further information see the
“Configuration” chapter.

Aborting a PLC program

The command “Control / Abort PLC program” aborts the program in the central
unit. It is no longer running, when launching this command.

Starting a PLC program

The command “Control / Start PLC program” runs the program in central unit.

Restarting a PLC program

The command “Control / Reset (Warm) of central unit program” restarts the
program in its current state in the central unit.

Cold-restarting a PLC program

The command “Control / Cold restart of central unit program” restarts the
program in its initial state (memory and configuration are initialized) in the central
unit.
Delete PROM

ABB Control Page A-63 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The command “Control / Delete PROM” deletes the program on the FlashEPROM.

Save PROM contents

The command “Control / Save PROM contents” cancels the flashEPROM of the
central unit.

Reactivating a former program

The command “Control / Reactivate program” reactivates the former program.

Erasing PROM contents

The command “Control / Erase PROM contents” fills the central unit program
memory with NOP instructions.

Optimizing a PLC program

The command “Control / Optimize program on PLC” suppresses the NOP

instructions.

Sending a program

The command “Control / Send program” downloads the program (prog.ABB) into
the central unit.

Sending constants

The command “Control / Send constants” sends the constants of the

application.(not the system constants) into the central unit.

Sending all

The command “Control / Send all” downloads the program (prog.ABB) and the
constants of the application, except the system constants into the central unit.

Download / Send system constants

The command “Control / Send system constants” sends the system constants (It is
also be done from the configurator editor) into the central unit.

Minimizing the window

The option “Options / Minimize window” takes the shape as described on the top.

Window always visible

If the option “Options / Always on top” is selected, the window is always above all
other windows.
On the next selection of this menu item, the window no longer on this state.

ABB Control Page A-64 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Editing the historic of the errors

The command option “Options / Error list” edits the historic of the errors occurred
with the date and the time.

ABB Control Page A-65 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

6.2 Time diagrams

The "File / Time diagrams" command of the Communication window enables the
user to watch time diagrams corresponding to the changes in the lists of variables.
Lists are built when debugging the application. They can be stored on the disk and
opened again during other debug sessions. A time diagram list can contain up to 8
variables. Variables of different types can be mixed in the same list. Global and local
variables can be inserted in a list. A list is dedicated to one particular project.

Tracing variables is very useful for the functional testing of an application. Even
though the displayed time diagrams are not precise measurements, they allow the
user to control the synchronization of process events.

Saving lists on hard disk

The commands of the "File" menu are used to create, open and save the lists of time
diagrams. The number of lists for one project is not limited by AC31GRAF. While
naming the lists of variables to be saved on the disk, the following rules have to be
followed:

• name cannot exceed 8 characters

• the first character must be a letter
• the following characters can be letters, digits
• naming of lists is case insensitive

The time diagram editor cannot display more that one list of variables at a time in the
same window. However, the time diagram editor can be run more than once, in order
to spy different lists simultaneously.

Inserting variables in the list

The "Edit / Insert" command inserts another variable in the list of time diagrams.
The variable name is selected in the list of variables defined in the project list
variables. The user does not have to manually enter the identifier. The variable is
inserted before the variable currently selected in the list. The list cannot contain more
than 8 diagrams. The same variable cannot appear more than once in the same list.

ABB Control Page A-66 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

If the project is modular, the user can choose the program for the local variables he
wants to see.

Changing the selected variable

The "Edit / Modify" command replaces the selected variable by another variable.
You can also use the "Cut" command to remove the selected variable from the list.

Diagram scaling

The "Edit / Set scale" command sets up the minimum and maximum values for the
timing diagram of the selected variable. This command has no effect if the selected
diagram shows a boolean variable.

Setting refresh duration

The "Options / Cyclic refresh duration" command enables the user to change the
time scale of the timing diagrams. The time scale is defined by entering the cyclic
refresh duration, which is the time elapsed between two consecutive points of a
timing diagram.

Pause and resume

Another possibility is to pause the cyclic diagram refresh. The ESCAPE key can also
be used to pause or restart refreshing diagrams.

ABB Control Page A-67 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

6.3 On line list

The "On line list" command enables the user to build non-contiguous lists of
variables which are refreshed with their current values. Lists are built when
debugging the application. The lists can be stored on the disk and opened again
during other debug sessions. Variables of different types may be mixed in the same
list. Global and local variables can be inserted in a list. A list of variables is dedicated
to one particular project. The on line list is very useful for the functional testing of an
application. It allows the user to watch the changes of a limited part of the controlled
process, independent of the corresponding source code in the application programs.
The on line list is also useful while debugging IL text programs. The user can easily
group in a list the set of variables used in a program, in order to control or monitor
the execution of the programmed instructions.

To modify a value, double click on a variable and enter a new value or erase the
current value. The new value appears in the column “write”.

Creating a variable list

The “File / New“ command creates a new list of variables.

Opening a variable list

The “File / Open“ command allows the user to select and open a variable list.

Saving a variable list

The "File / Save" command save a variable list. The number of lists for one project is
not limited by AC31GRAF. While naming the lists of variables to be saved on the
disk, the following rules have to be followed:

• name cannot exceed 8 characters

• the first character must be a letter
• the following characters can be letters, digits
• naming of lists is case insensitive

ABB Control Page A-68 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The list editor cannot display more that one list of variables at a time in the same
window. However, the list editor can be run more than once, in order to spy different
lists simultaneously.

Inserting a variable

The “Edit / Insert” command inserts another variable in the list. The variable name is
selected in the list of the global variables and local variables of the selected program.
This way the user does not have to manually enter the identifier. The variable is
inserted before the variable currently selected in the list. The same variable cannot
appear more than once in the same list.
If the variable has no symbol, the address appears in the column name and column
address, on the other hand if the variable is defined with a symbol, this latter is
added in the column name.

Modifying a variable

The “Edit / Modify” command replaces the selected variable by another variable.
You can also use the " Edit / Cut" command to remove the selected variable from
the list.

Cut a variable

The “Edit / Modify” command deletes the current selected line.

Sending new values

The “Edit / Send new values” command allows to download to the central unit the
new value entered in the column “write” to the selected variable.

Resetting new values

The “Edit / Reset new values” command erases the column “write”.

Locking a selected variable

The “Edit / Lock selected variable” command is similar to the send command, but
the variable is locked.
Only for the input/output variables.

Unlocking selected variable

After having selected the “Edit / Unlock selected variable” command, the selected
variable stops to be locked.
Only for the input/output variables.

Adding list of locked variables

ABB Control Page A-69 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

The “Edit / Get list of locked variables” adds the list of locked variables to the
current list in the central unit.

ABB Control Page A-70 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

6.4 Status / Diagnosis

The diagnostic command is run from the control panel and is always available when
the AC31GRAF is used in On Line mode. It displays diagnostic information from the
central unit.

Cycle Time (ms)................ the central unit cycle time is displayed in ms

PLC State .......................... the central unit state (RUN or ABORT) is
displayed
Bar-graph .......................... one represents the CPU load and the other one,
the proportion of the memory used.
Update ............................... refresh the bar-graph and the different messages
displayed.
Errors detected by PLC ... the error messages emitted by the central unit are
analyzed by AC31GRAF and converted into text
strings. Each error is identified by a class number,
an error number in the class and a meaning. If an
address number is indicated with the error
message, you can double clicked on the message
to open the file of the IL code program (prog.txt).
Acknowledge .................... acknowledge the central unit error.
Miscellaneous................... display different information according to the
central unit type.

Refer to the technical description of each central unit for more details.

ABB Control Page A-71 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

6.5 Configuration

The configuration tool provides the way to display, enter, upload, download and
verify main central unit parameters.

The list of parameters depends on the central unit type and this list is automatically
selected at the beginning of the project

Parameters are stored in system constants in the central unit. Such constants are
not visible from the program.

The configuration tool may be used in both off-line and on-line modes.

A template of default values is created when a new project is created.

The parameters are displayed in a listbox :

The meaning of each parameter is described on the bottom of the window

Your choice column of the listbox contains values registered on PC. When you leave
the configuration tool (by clicking on ‘EXIT’ choice), your choice is automatically
saved.

The central unit column displays the values that are stored on the central unit. Each
time the configuration tool is launched, the system constants are read and the result
is displayed inside the «central unit» column.

ABB Control Page A-72 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Sending system constants

The “Control / Download” command sends to the central unit the system constant
according your choice.
Once the sending is ended, if you click on refresh, you can verify the central unit
contains the system constant similar to your choice.

Uploading system constants

The purpose of that choice is to register on PC the values that are stored on central
unit .
The “Control / Download” command copies the content of the column “Central unit”
into the column “Your choice”.

Setting PLC clock

The “Control / Set PLC clock” command changes the central unit time (available for
serie 30, serie 50 and serie 90).

Setting the password protection

The “Control / Password protection” command changes the password stored on

central unit (available for serie 40, serie 50 and serie 30)

Exit

The “Control / Exit” command saves the content of the column “Your choice” and
exit the configuration tool

ABB Control Page A-73 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Showing ToolBar

The “View / Show ToolBar” command displays or removes the toolbar inside the
configuration tool.

Showing title bar

The “View / Show title bar” command displays or removes the listbox title bar

Showing status bar

The “View / Show status bar” command displays or removes the status bar, at the
bottom of the window.

Refreshing the constants

The “View / Reads” command reads again the system constants on the central unit,
and display the result by refreshing the column “Central unit”.

Refer to the technical description of each central unit for more details.

ABB Control Page A-74 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

7 User’s library

7.1 User’s function

A user’s function is developed by the user for a specific and repetitive application.
The user’s library allows to create and store user’s functions.
The “File / Library” command from the “project management” window runs the
library tool.

• The code of a user function is written in FBD/LD (Function Bloc Diagram / Ladder
Diagram) and duplicated on each call.
• A user function is created for one CPU ( series 30, series 40 , series 50, series 90
or controller).

Creating a function

The “File / New” command allows to create a new function (name, language and
CPU used)

Editing the source

The “File / Open” command allows to edit the source file of the function.

Renaming a function

The “File / Rename” command allows to change the name of a function.

Deleting a function

The “File / Delete” command allows to delete a function from the list.

Showing properties

The “File / Properties” command shows the availability for the other CPUs (maybe
using another name).

Creating an alias

ABB Control Page A-75 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

With the “File / Properties/Alias” command, while entering the properties of a

function, you can define an alias for the function when used in a project. Thus a
function created under a name can appear under another name in the function list
when editing a project. Different aliases may be defined for each type of PLC.

A particular use of aliases is the capability to define several functions with different
source code, and thus different names, and to provide all of them under the same
name, so that the end user can use a generic service, without any regard on the
coding differences due to various PLC specific features.

Editing a technical note

The “Tools / Technical note” command allows to edit the AC31GRAF text editor line
technical note.

Importing or exporting a function

The “Tools / Import and Export” command allows to retrieve or set a user library on
a floppy disk (everything is copied to one file).

7.2 Variables for a user’s function

A user’s function is programmed with specific variables. The type P, PW, PD are
used as input parameters and Q, QW, QD as output parameters. There is no
address affected to them but these types are numbering from 0 to N, furthermore,
they must contain a symbol.
The internal variables such as M and K have only a name (symbol) and no address.
The direct global variables have only an address, but are not recommended.
Warning: Labels similar to an operator are not allowed (for example: LD, AND, OR
etc...)

7.3 Compiling a user’s function

A function must be compiled before to be used in a project.

ABB Control Page A-76 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

User's guide

Never forget to archive a user library on the disk, and the fact that the debug is not
available.
A user’s function is automatically inserted into the standard AC31GRAF library.

Below is an example of a user’s function :

TRIGGER

Source :

IN LAST OUT

TRIGGER
IN LAST
IN OUT

Declaration :

P0 IN
Q0 OUT
M LAST

ABB Control Page A-77 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

B Language reference

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

B LANGUAGE REFERENCE
1 Project architecture ...................................................................................................B-3
1.1 Programs ................................................................................................................B-3
1.2 Modular architecture ..............................................................................................B-3
1.3 No-modular architecture ........................................................................................B-5
2 Variables.....................................................................................................................B-6
2.1 Variables are sorted according to their type...........................................................B-6
2.2 Variables are sorted according to their range.........................................................B-6
3 FBD language.............................................................................................................B-7
3.1 FBD diagram main format .....................................................................................B-7
3.2 Jumps and labels ....................................................................................................B-8
3.3 Boolean negation....................................................................................................B-9
3.4 Calling function or function blocks from the FBD ................................................B-9
4 LD and Quick LD languages ..................................................................................B-10
4.1 Power rails and connection lines..........................................................................B-10
4.2 Multiple connection .............................................................................................B-11
4.3 Basic LD contacts and coils .................................................................................B-12
4.3.1 Direct contact ................................................................................................B-12
4.3.2 Inverted contact .............................................................................................B-13
4.3.3 Contact with rising edge detection ................................................................B-13
4.3.4 Contact with falling edge detection...............................................................B-13
4.3.5 Direct coil ......................................................................................................B-14
4.3.6 Inverted coil...................................................................................................B-15
4.3.7 SET coil.........................................................................................................B-15
4.3.8 RESET coil....................................................................................................B-16
4.3.9 Coil with rising edge detection......................................................................B-16
4.4 Jumps and labels ..................................................................................................B-17
4.5 Blocks in LD ........................................................................................................B-18
4.5.1 The "EN" input ..............................................................................................B-18
4.5.2 The "ENO" output .........................................................................................B-19
4.5.3 Using both "EN" and "ENO".........................................................................B-19
5 SFC language ...........................................................................................................B-20
5.1 SFC chart main format.........................................................................................B-20
5.2 SFC basic components.........................................................................................B-20
5.2.1 Steps and initial steps ....................................................................................B-20
5.2.2 Transitions.....................................................................................................B-21
5.2.3 Oriented links ................................................................................................B-21
5.2.4 Jump to a step................................................................................................B-22
5.3 Divergences and convergences ............................................................................B-22
5.3.1 Single divergences.........................................................................................B-22
5.3.2 Double divergences .......................................................................................B-23
5.4 Macro steps ..........................................................................................................B-24
5.5 Actions within the steps .......................................................................................B-25
5.5.1 Boolean actions .............................................................................................B-26
5.5.2 Pulse actions..................................................................................................B-26
5.5.3 Non-stored actions.........................................................................................B-27
5.5.4 Calling function and function blocks from an action ....................................B-27

ABB Control Page B-1 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

5.5.5 IL convention.................................................................................................B-28
5.5.6 Activation duration of a step .........................................................................B-28
5.6 Conditions attached to transitions........................................................................B-29
5.6.1 LD convention...............................................................................................B-29
5.6.2 IL convention.................................................................................................B-29
5.7 SFC dynamic rules ...............................................................................................B-30
6 IL language...............................................................................................................B-31
6.1 IL main syntax......................................................................................................B-31
6.1.1 Labels ............................................................................................................B-31
6.1.2 Operator modifiers ........................................................................................B-31
6.2 IL operators ..........................................................................................................B-32
6.2.1 LD operator ...................................................................................................B-33
6.2.2 ST operator....................................................................................................B-33
6.2.3 S operator ......................................................................................................B-33
6.2.4 R operator......................................................................................................B-34
6.2.5 JMP operator .................................................................................................B-34
6.2.6 Calling sub-programs and interruptions ........................................................B-35
6.2.7 Calling function blocks: CAL, !BA 0 operator .............................................B-35
6.3 Main differences between IEC IL and ABB IL....................................................B-36

ABB Control Page B-2 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

1 Project architecture
An AC31GRAF project is divided into several programming units called programs.
The programs of a project are linked together in a tree-like architecture. Programs
can be described using any of FBD, LD, SFC, Quick LD or IL graphic or litteral
languages.

1.1 Programs

A program is a logical programming unit, that describes operations between

variables of the process.

There is three kinds of programs :

main programs
subroutines
interruptions

The main programs are executed according to the order defined by the project
architecture.
The subroutines can be called from each other programs of the project.
The call of subroutines and interruption programs can be done by all editors

Programs are linked together in a hierarchy tree. Programs placed on the top of the
hierarchy are activated by the system. Sub-routines (lower level of the hierarchy) are
activated by their father. A program can be described with any of the available
graphic or literal following languages:

Sequential Function Chart (SFC) for high level programming

Function Block Diagram (FBD) for cyclic complex operations
Ladder Diagram (LD) for boolean operations only
Quick Ladder Diagram (QLD) for boolean operations with function block insertion
Instruction List (IL) for low level operations

The same program can be written with several languages. LD and FBD are
combined in one diagram.

1.2 Modular architecture

A project with a modular architecture contains more than one program.

It could be also composed of several programs , subroutines and interruptions
program. A language is affected to each of them.

The open command of the project manager allows to edit the program manager of
the selected project.

The edition of the programs of a modular project is realized from the program
manager.

If a modular project contains only one program, it becomes a no-modular project.

ABB Control Page B-3 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

Here is the diagram for the call of the main tools in a modular project :

Project management
debug mode
Edition mode
Program management Communication

Editor

Variable list+tools Syntax analysis Code generator

Inside the program management, you can create subroutines, interruptions or other
programs.

Each of them are represented by an icon:

- a blue icon for the programs
- a green icon for the subroutines
- a red icon for the interruptions

The icons representing a program are on the left of the client area of the program
management, the subroutines in the middle and the interruptions on the right.

A project can contained only three interruption programs : two hard interruptions, (#1
and #2) and a soft one.
The icons representing the interruption programs allow, thanks to their name, to
make the difference between the hard interruption, ( icon name + #1 or #2) and the
soft interruption (icon name + value of the cycle).

ABB Control Page B-4 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

1.3 No-modular architecture

A project with a no-modular architecture contains only one program.

It does not allow to be composed of several programs and subroutines. A language
is affected to the project.

The open command of the project manager allows to run the edition of the program
which composes the project.

A no-modular project can be set modular by using the modularize command. This
function of the files menu runs the program manager and allows the creation of other
programs or subroutines.

In this case, the program manager contains only one icon which is representing the
program of the project.
By default, its name is «main».

Here is the diagram for the call of the main tools in a no-modular project :

P r o je c t m a n a g e r
debug m ode
E d ito r m o d e
E d ito r C o m m u n ic a tio n

V a ria b le list + to o ls A n a ly sis-c o d e g e n e ra tio n

ABB Control Page B-5 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

2 Variables

2.1 Variables are sorted according to their type.

These are basic types of variables :

BOOLEAN ......................... true/false binary values

WORD................................ analog values
DOUBLEWORD................. double word values
CONSTANT ....................... binary, analog, double word values
TEXT .................................. string characters

Binary variable type I Binary input

O Binary output
S Binary step
K Binary constant
M Binary flag

Word variable type IW Analog input

OW Analog output
KW Analog constant
MW Analog flag

Double word variable type KD Double word constant

MD Double word flag

Text variable TXT Input string

Direct constant # Value in decimal

#H Value in hexadecimal

2.2 Variables are sorted according to their range

GLOBAL ............................ the variable can be used by all programs of a

project
LOCAL ............................... the variable can be used by only one program

Two variables can have the same symbol, but they have to be local in two different
files.
A global variable can not have the same symbol as a local variable file.
A variable defined without a symbol is global.

ABB Control Page B-6 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

3 FBD language
The Functional Block Diagram (FBD) is a graphic language. It allows the
programmer to build complex procedures by taking existing functions from the
AC31GRAF library and wiring them together in the graphic diagram area.

3.1 FBD diagram main format

FBD diagram describes a function between input variables and output variables. A
function is described as a set of elementary function blocks. Input and output
variables are connected to blocks by connection lines. An output of a function block
may also be connected to an input of another block.

Function

{
Inputs
} Outputs

An entire function operated by an FBD program is built with standard elementary

function blocks from the AC31GRAF library. Each function block has a fixed number
of input connection points and a fixed number of output connection points. A
function block is represented by a single rectangle. The inputs are connected on its
left border. The outputs are connected on its right border. An elementary function
block performs a single function between its inputs and its outputs. The name of the
function to be performed by the block is written in its rectangle symbol. Each input or
output of a block has a well defined type.

Name of the function

{
Inputs &
} Outputs

Input variables of an FBD program must be connected to input connection points of

function blocks. The type of each variable must be the same as the type expected for
the associated input. An Input for FBD diagram can be a constant expression, any
internal or input variable, or an output variable.

Output variables of an FBD program must be connected to output connection points

of function blocks. The type of each variable must be the same as the type expected
for the associated block output. An Output for FBD diagram can be any internal or
output variable, or the name of the program (for sub-programs only). When an

ABB Control Page B-7 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

output is the name of the currently edited sub-program, it represents the assignment
of the return value for the sub-program (returned to the calling program).
Input and output variables, inputs and outputs of the function blocks are wired
together with connection lines. Single lines may be used to connect two logical
points of the diagram:

- An input variable and an input of a function block

- An output of a function block and an input of another block
- An output of a function block and an output variable

The connection is oriented, meaning that the line carries associated data from the
left extremity to the right extremity. The left and right extremities of the connection
line must be of the same type.

Multiple right connection can be used to broadcast an information from its left
extremity to each of its right extremities. All the extremities of the connection must be
of the same type.

3.2 Jumps and labels

Labels and jumps are used to control the execution of the diagram. No other object
may be connected on the right of a jump or label symbol. The following notations are
used:

>>LAB................................ jump to a label (label name is "LAB")

LAB:................................... definition of a label (label name is "LAB")

If the connection line on the left of the jump symbol has the boolean state TRUE, the
execution of the program directly jumps after the corresponding label symbol.

(* Example of a FBD program using labels and jumps *)

&
manual
b1 NOMODIF

/
input1
input2 result

NOMODIF:
&
result
valid cmd10

(* IL Equivalence: *)
ld manual
and b1
jmpc NOMODIF
ld input1
or input2
st result
NOMODIF: ld result

ABB Control Page B-8 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

and valid
st cmd10

3.3 Boolean negation

A single connection line with its right extremity connected to an input of a function
block can be terminated by a boolean negation. The negation is represented by a
small circle. When a boolean negation is used, the left and right extremities of the
connection line must have the BOOLEAN type.

(* Example of a FBD program using boolean negation *)

&
input1
input2 output1

3.4 Calling function or function blocks from the FBD

The FBD language enables the calling of sub-programs, functions or function blocks.
A sub-program, or function or function block is represented by a function box. The
name written in the box is the name of the sub-program or function or function
blocks.
A function block can have more than one outputs.

(* Example of a FBD program using an user function block (Weighing) *)

Weighing net_weight
mode mode

delta delta net_w =?

IN1

0 IN2 Q output1

tare_weight weight

ABB Control Page B-9 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

4 LD and Quick LD languages

Ladder Diagram (LD) is a graphic representation of boolean equations, combining
contacts (input arguments) with coils (output results). The LD language enables the
description of tests and modifications of boolean data by placing graphic symbols
into the program chart. LD graphic symbols are organized within the chart exactly as
an electric contact diagram. LD diagrams are connected on the left side and on the
right side to vertical power rails.

These are basic graphic components of an LD diagram:

---------------------- Left vertical power rail

---------------------- Right vertical power rail

---------------------- Horizontal connection line

--------------------- Vertical connection line

------------------Multiple connection lines (all connected together)

------------------Contact associated with a variable

------------------Coil associated to an output or to an internal variable

4.1 Power rails and connection lines

An LD diagram is limited on the left and right side by vertical lines, named left power
rail and right power rail respectively.

Left power rail

Right power rail

LD diagram graphic symbols are connected to power rails or to other symbols by

connection lines. Connection lines are horizontal or vertical.

Horizontal connection
lines

Vertical
Vertical connection
connection line
with OR meaning

Each line segment has a boolean state FALSE or TRUE. The boolean state is the
same for all the segments directly linked together. Any horizontal line connected to
the left vertical power rail has the TRUE state.

ABB Control Page B-10 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

4.2 Multiple connection

The boolean state given to a single horizontal connection line is the same on the left
and on the right extremities of the line. Combining horizontal and vertical connection
lines enables the building of multiple connections. The boolean state of the
extremities of a multiple connection follows logic rules.

A multiple connection on the left combines more than one horizontal lines
connected on the left side of a vertical line, and one line connected on its right side.
The boolean state of the right extremity is the LOGICAL OR between all the left
extremities.

(* Example of multiple LEFT connection *)

(* right extremity state is (v1 OR v2 OR v3) *)

A multiple connection on the right combines one horizontal line connected on the
left side of a vertical line, and more than one line connected on its right side. The
boolean state of the left extremity is propagated into each of the right extremities.

(* Example of multiple RIGHT connection *)

input1 output1

output2

(* means: *)
output1 = input1
output2 = input1

A multiple connection on the left and on the right combines more than one
horizontal line connected on the left side of a vertical line, and more than one line
connected on its right side. The boolean state of each of the right extremities is the
LOGICAL OR between all the left extremities

(* Example of multiple LEFT and RIGHT connection *)

input1 output1

input2 output2

output3

(* means: *)
output1 = input1 OR input2
output2 = input1 OR input2

ABB Control Page B-11 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

output3 = input1 OR input2

4.3 Basic LD contacts and coils

There are several symbols available for input contacts

There are several symbols available for output coils:

Direct coil
Inverted coil
SET coil
RESET coil
Coils with rising edge detection
Coils with falling edge detection

The name of the variable is written above any of these graphic symbols:

Name of the associated

boolean variable

boo_variable

Left connection Right connection

4.3.1 Direct contact

A direct contact enables a boolean operation between a connection line state and
a boolean variable.

boo_variable

Left connection Right connection

The state of the connection line on the right of the contact is the LOGICAL AND
between the state of the left connection line and the value of the variable associated
with the contact.

(* Example using DIRECT contacts *)

input1 input2 output1

(* means: *)
output1 = input1 AND input2

ABB Control Page B-12 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

4.3.2 Inverted contact

An inverted contact enables a boolean operation between a connection line state
and the boolean negation of a boolean variable.

boo_variable

Left connection Right connection

The state of the connection line on the right of the contact is the LOGICAL AND
between the state of the left connection line and the boolean negation of the value
of the variable associated with the contact.

(* Example using INVERTED contacts *)

input1 input2 output1

(* means: *)
output1 = NOT (input1) AND NOT (input2)

4.3.3 Contact with rising edge detection

This contact (positive) enables a boolean operation between a connection line
state and the rising edge of a boolean variable.

boo_variable

P
Left connection Right connection

The state of the connection line on the right of the contact is set to TRUE when the
state of the connection line on the left is TRUE, and the state of the associated
variable rises from FALSE to TRUE. It is reset to FALSE in all other cases.

(* Example using RISING EDGE contacts *)

input1 input2 output1

P
(* means: *)
output1 = input1 AND (input2 AND NOT (input2prev))
(* input2prev is the value of input2 at the previous cycle *)

4.3.4 Contact with falling edge detection

This contact (negative) enables a boolean operation between a connection line
state and the falling edge of a boolean variable.

ABB Control Page B-13 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

boo_variable

N
Left connection Right connection

The state of the connection line on the right of the contact is set to TRUE when the
state of the connection line on the left is TRUE, and the state of the associated
variable falls from TRUE to FALSE. It is reset to FALSE in all other cases.

(* Example using FALLING EDGE contacts *)

input1 input2 output1

(* means: *)
output1 = input1 AND (NOT (input2) AND input2prev)
(* input2prev is the value of input2 at the previous cycle *)

4.3.5 Direct coil

Direct coils enable a boolean output of a connection line boolean state.

boo_variable

Left connection Right connection

The associated variable is assigned with the boolean state of the left connection.
The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection. The right
connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail.

The associated boolean variable must be OUTPUT or INTERNAL.

The associated name can be the name of the program (for sub-programs only).
This corresponds to the assignment of the return value of the sub-program.

(* Example using DIRECT coils *)

input1 output1

output2

(* means: *)
output1 = input1
output2 = input1

ABB Control Page B-14 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

4.3.6 Inverted coil

Inverted coils enable a boolean output according to the boolean negation of a
connection line state.

boo_variable

Left connection Right connection

The associated variable is assigned with the boolean negation of the state of the
left connection. The state of the left connection is propagated into the right
connection. Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail.

The associated boolean variable must be OUTPUT or INTERNAL.

The associated name can be the name of the program (for sub-programs only).
This corresponds to the assignment of the return value of the sub-program.

(* Example using INVERTED coils *)

input1 output1

output2

(* means: *)
output1 = NOT (input1)
output2 = input1

4.3.7 SET coil

"Set" coils enable a boolean output of a connection line boolean state.

boo_variable

S
Left connection Right connection

The associated variable is SET TO TRUE when the boolean state of the left
connection becomes TRUE. The output variable keeps this value until an inverse
order is made by a "RESET" coil. The state of the left connection is propagated into
the right connection. Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power
rail.

The associated boolean variable must be OUTPUT or INTERNAL.

(* Example using "SET" and "RESET" coils *)

ABB Control Page B-15 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

input1 output1
S
input2 output1
R

(* means: *)
IF input1 THEN output1 = TRUE
IF input2 THEN output1 = FALSE

4.3.8 RESET coil

"Reset" coils enable boolean output of a connection line boolean state.

boo_variable

R
Left connection Right connection

The associated variable is RESET TO FALSE when the boolean state of the left
connection becomes TRUE. The output variable keeps this value until an inverse
order is made by a "SET" coil. The state of the left connection is propagated into the
right connection. Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail.

The associated boolean variable must be OUTPUT or INTERNAL.

(* Example using "SET" and "RESET" coils *)

input1 output1
S
input2 output1
R

(* means: *)
IF input1 THEN output1 = TRUE
IF input2 THEN output1 = FALSE

4.3.9 Coil with rising edge detection

"Positive" coils enable boolean output of a connection line boolean state. This
type of coils are only available using the Quick ladder editor.

boo_variable

P
Left connection Right connection

The associated variable is set to TRUE when the boolean state of the left
connection rises from FALSE to TRUE. The output variable resets to FALSE in all

ABB Control Page B-16 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

other cases. The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection.
Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail.

The associated boolean variable must be OUTPUT or INTERNAL.

(* Example using a "Positive" coil *)

input1 output1
P

(* means: *)
IF (input1 and NOT(input1prev)) THEN output1 = TRUE
ELSE output1 = FALSE
(* input1prev is the value of input1 at the previous cycle *)
Coil with falling edge detection
"Negative" coils enable boolean output of a connection line boolean state. This
type of coils are only available using the Quick ladder editor.

boo_variable

N
Left connection Right connection

The associated variable is set to TRUE when the boolean state of the left
connection falls from TRUE to FALSE. The output variable resets to FALSE in all
other cases. The state of the left connection is propagated into the right connection.
Right connection may be connected to the right vertical power rail.

The associated boolean variable must be OUTPUT or INTERNAL.

(* Example using a "Positive" coil *)

input1 output1
N

(* means: *)
IF (NOT(input1) and input1prev) THEN output1 = TRUE
ELSE output1 = FALSE
(* input1prev is the value of input1 at the previous cycle *)

4.4 Jumps and labels

Labels, conditional and unconditional JUMPS symbols, can be used to control the
execution of the diagram. No connection can be put on the right of the label and
jump symbol. The following notations are used:

>>LAB................................ jump to label named "LAB"

LAB:................................... definition of the label named "LAB"

ABB Control Page B-17 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

If the connection on the left of the jump symbol has the TRUE boolean state, the
program execution is driven after the label symbol.

(* Example using JUMP and LABEL symbols *)

manual_mode
OTHER
input1 result

OTHER:
END

input2 result

END:

(* IL Equivalence: *)
ldn manual_mode
jmpc other
ld input1
st result
jmp END
OTHER: ld input2
st result
END: (* end of program *)

4.5 Blocks in LD

Using the Quick LD editor, you connect function boxes to boolean lines. A function
can actually be an operator, a function block or a function. As all blocks do not have
always a boolean input and/or a boolean output, inserting blocks in an LD diagram
leads to the addition of new parameters EN, ENO to the block interface. The EN,
ENO parameters are not added if you use the FBD/LD editor as you can connect the
variable with the required type.
A function block with duplicated inputs can not be used in QUICK LADDER.It has to
be used in the other language as FBD

4.5.1 The "EN" input

ABB Control Page B-18 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

IF en is true then the function is valided

else Q = false

4.5.2 The "ENO" output

On some operators, functions or function blocks, the first output does not have
boolean data type. As the first output must always be connected to the rung, another
output is automatically inserted at the first position, called "ENO". The ENO output
always takes the same state as the first input of the block. On some cases, both EN
and ENO are required. Below is an example with an arithmetic operator, and the
equivalent code expressed in pseudo language:

IF en is true , the addition is valided and

scanned else not
en = eno
continue rung with eno state...

4.5.3 Using both "EN" and "ENO"

On some cases, both EN and ENO are required. Below is an example with an
arithmetic operator, and the equivalent code expressed in pseudo language

IF en is true , the addition is valided and

scanned else not
en = eno
continue rung with eno state...

ABB Control Page B-19 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

5 SFC language
Sequential Function Chart (SFC) is a graphic language used to describe sequential
operations. The process is represented as a set of well defined steps, linked by
transitions. A boolean condition is attached to each transition. Actions within the
steps are detailed by using IL language.

5.1 SFC chart main format

An SFC program is a graphic set of steps and transitions, linked together by

oriented links. Multiple connection links are used to represent divergences and
convergences. Some parts of the complete program may be separated and
represented in the main chart by a single symbol, called macro steps. The basic
graphic rules of the SFC are:

- A step cannot be followed by another step

- A transition cannot be followed by another transition

5.2 SFC basic components

The basic components (graphic symbols) of the SFC language are: steps and initial
steps, transitions, oriented links, and jumps to a step.

5.2.1 Steps and initial steps

A step is represented by a single square. Each step is referenced by a number,
written in the step square symbol. A main description of the step is written in a
rectangle linked to the step symbol. This description is a free comment (not part of
the programming language). The above information is called the Level 1 of the step:

Reference number

Comment

102 Start motor 1

At run time, a token indicates that the step is active:

Active step: Inactive step:

102 Start motor 1 214 Weighing

ABB Control Page B-20 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

The initial situation of an SFC program is expressed with initial steps. An initial
step has a double bordered graphic symbol. A token is automatically placed in each
initial step when the program is started.

Initial step:

1 Start motor 1

An SFC program must contain at least one initial step.

5.2.2 Transitions
Transitions are represented by a small horizontal bar that crosses the connection
link. Each transition is referenced by a number, written next to the transition symbol.
A main description of the transition is written on the right side of the transition
symbol. This description is a free comment (not part of the programming language).
The above information is called the Level 1 of the transition:

Reference number

Comment

Weighing command
102

5.2.3 Oriented links

Single lines are used to link steps and transitions. These are oriented links. When
the orientation is not explicitly given, the link is oriented from the top to the bottom.

Explicit orientation
from transition 11
100
to setp 100
Implicit orientation
10 from step 100 to
transition 10
101

ABB Control Page B-21 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

5.2.4 Jump to a step

Jump symbols may be used to indicate a connection link from a transition to a step,
without having to draw the connection line. The jump symbol must be referenced
with the number of the destination step:

Jump to step 102

102

A jump symbol cannot be used to represent a link from a step to a transition.

Example of jumps - the following charts are equivalent:

1 1

2 2

30 31 30 31

1 1

5.3 Divergences and convergences

Divergences are multiple connection links from one SFC symbol (step or
transition) to many other SFC symbols. Convergences are multiple connection links
from more than one SFC symbols to one other symbol. Divergences and
convergences can be single or double.

5.3.1 Single divergences

A single divergence is a multiple link from one step to many transitions. It allows the
active token to pass into one of a number of branches. A single convergence is a
multiple link from many transitions to the same step. A single convergence is
generally used to group the SFC branches which were started on a single
divergence. Single divergences and convergences are represented by single
horizontal lines.

ABB Control Page B-22 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

Single divergence

Single convergence

Warning: The conditions attached to the different transitions at the beginning of a

single divergence are not implicitly exclusive. The exclusivity has to be explicitly
detailed in the conditions of the transitions to ensure that only one token progresses
in one branch of the divergence at run time. Below is an example of single
divergence and convergence:

(* SFC program with single divergence and convergence *)

1 Initialize

Run & not Error Error

1 101
2 Start Motor M1 101 Alarm
M1 started Acknowledge
2 102
3 Start timer
timer > t#3s
3
4 Stop motor M1
M1 stopped
4

5.3.2 Double divergences

A double divergence is a multiple link from one transition to many steps. It
corresponds to parallel operations of the process. A double convergence is a
multiple link from many steps to the same transition. A double convergence is
generally used to group the SFC branches started on a double divergence. Double
divergences and convergences are represented by double horizontal lines.

ABB Control Page B-23 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

Double divergence

Double convergence

Example of double divergence and convergence:

(* SFC program with double divergence and convergence *)

1 Initialize

Run
1

2 Process1 101 Process2

End of Process 1 End of Process 2

2 101
3 Wait for process 2 102 Wait for process 2

true
3

5.4 Macro steps

A macro step is a unique representation of a unique group of steps and transitions.

The body of the macro step is described separately, elsewhere in the same SFC
program. It appears as a single symbol in the main SFC chart. This is the symbol
used for a macro step :

ABB Control Page B-24 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

Reference number

Comment

102 Process A

The reference number written in the macro step symbol is the reference number of
the first step in the body of the macro step. The macro step body must begin with a
beginning step and terminate with an ending step. The chart must be self-
contained. A beginning step has no upper link (no backward transition). An ending
step has no lower link (no forward transition). A macro step symbol may be put in the
body of another macro step.

Warning: Because macro step is a unique set of steps and transitions, the same
macro step cannot be used more than once in an SFC program.

Example of macro step:

(* Main chart *) (* Body of the macro step *)

1 Initialize 201 Fill WUnit

unit full
201
Error Run & not Error 202 Weigh
1 101
2 Alarm 201 Weighing weighing done
202
Ack true 203 Empty WUnit
2 102
unit empty
203
204 Store weight
1

5.5 Actions within the steps

The level 2 of an SFC step is the detailed description of the actions executed
during the step activity. This description is made by using SFC literal features,
and other languages. The basic types of actions are:
Boolean actions
Pulse actions programmed in IL
None-stored actions programmed in IL

Several actions (with same or different types) can be described in the same step.
The special features that enable the use of any of the other languages are:

Calling function and function blocks from an action

IL convention

ABB Control Page B-25 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

5.5.1 Boolean actions

Boolean actions assign a boolean variable with the activity of the step. The boolean
variable can be an output or an internal. It is assigned each time the step activity
starts or stops. This is the syntax of the basic boolean actions:

var (N); ....... assigns the step activity signal to the variable
var; ............. same effect (N attribute is optional)
/ var; ........... assigns the negation of the step activity signal to the variable

example :
%O62.00 (N); assigns the step activity signal to the output %O62.00
%O62.00;.... same effect (N attribute is optional)
/ %M00.00;.. assigns the negation of the step activity signal to the variable %M00.00

Other features are available to set or reset a boolean variable, when the step
becomes active. This is the syntax of set and reset boolean actions:

var (S); ....... sets the variable to TRUE when the step activity signal becomes TRUE
var (R); ....... resets the variable to FALSE when the step activity signal becomes
TRUE
example
%O62.00 (S); sets %O62.00 to TRUE when the step activity signal
becomes TRUE
%M00.00 (R); resets %M00.00 to FALSE when the step activity signal
becomes TRUE

The boolean variable must be an OUTPUT or an INTERNAL. The following SFC

programming leads to the following behavior:

step activity
10
Boolean actions
Bdirect
Bdirect(N) ;
/Binvert ; Binvert
Bset(S) ;
Breset(R) ; Bset

Breset

5.5.2 Pulse actions

A pulse action is a list of IL instructions, which are executed only once at the
activation of the step. Instructions are written according to the following SFC syntax:

ACTION (P) :

ABB Control Page B-26 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

(* IL statements *)
END_ACTION ;
The following shows the results of a pulse action:

Step activity

Execution

5.5.3 Non-stored actions

A non-stored (normal) action is a list of IL instructions which are executed at each
cycle during the whole active period of the step. Instructions are written according to
the following SFC syntax:

ACTION (N) :
(* IL statements *)
END_ACTION ;

The following is the results of a non-stored action:

Step activity

Execution

5.5.4 Calling function and function blocks from an action

Subroutines, or function blocks (written in IL, LD or FBD language) can be directly
called from an SFC action block, based on the following syntax :

For subroutines
ACTION (P) :
CAL_FB(subroutineX, bit)
END_ACTION;

ACTION (N) :
CAL_FB(subroutineX, bit)
END_ACTION;

For function blocks in IL

ACTION (P) :
!BA 0
BlocX
Param1
Param2

ABB Control Page B-27 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

...
END_ACTION;
or
ACTION (N) :
!BA 0
BlocX
Param1
Param2
...
END_ACTION;

Warning: The instructions written between ACTION(P) or (N) and

END_ACTION are scanned and executed only if the step is activated.

5.5.5 IL convention
Instruction List (IL) programming may be directly entered in an SFC action block,
based on the following syntax:

ACTION (P) : (* or N *)
<instruction>
<instruction>
....
END_ACTION;

Below is an example of an IL program in an action block:

(* SFC program with an IL sequence in an action block *)

1 Action (P):
LD False
ST Led1
ST Led2
End_action;

5.5.6 Activation duration of a step

An action can be actived only for a time.
The timer function has to be used in an transition.
It cannot be used in a action (N) because the timer function cannot be reset when
the step is deactivated.
The start timer bit has to be written in the action .
Check the following example:

ABB Control Page B-28 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

102 Bit_timer;

Bit_timer
TON
ET
TIME_VAl

The bit-timer is set to 1 by the step 102 and in the same time the timer TON is
started.
After the time value the next step is activated , the bit-timer is reset and the timer
TON is stopped.

5.6 Conditions attached to transitions

At each transition, a boolean expression is attached that conditions the clearing of

the transition. The condition is usually expressed with LD language. This is the Level
2 of the transition. Other structures may, however, be used:

Warning: When no expression is attached to the transition, the default condition is

TRUE.

5.6.1 LD convention
The Ladder Diagram (LD) language can be used to describe the condition
attached to a transition. The diagram is composed of only one rung with one coil.
The coil value represents the transitions value.
Below is an example of LD programming for transitions:

1 Run Error

5.6.2 IL convention
Instruction List (IL) programming may be directly used to describe an SFC transition.

<instruction>
<instruction>
....
The value contained by the current result (IL register) at the end of the IL sequence
causes the resulting of the condition to be attached to the transition:

current result = 0 condition is FALSE

current result <> 0 condition is TRUE

Below is an example of IL programming for transitions:

ABB Control Page B-29 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

(* SFC program with an IL program for transitions *)

1
LD Run
&N Error

5.7 SFC dynamic rules

The five dynamic rules of the SFC language are:

Initial situation
The initial situation is characterized by the initial steps which are, by definition, in
the active state at the beginning of the operation. At least one initial step must be
present in each SFC program.

Clearing of a transition
A transition is either enabled or disabled. It is said to be enabled when all
immediately preceding steps linked to its corresponding transition symbol are active,
otherwise it is disabled. A transition cannot be cleared unless:
- it is enabled, and
- the associated transition condition is true.

Changing of state of active steps

The clearing of a transition simultaneously leads to the active state of the
immediately following steps and to the inactive state of the immediately preceding
steps.

Simultaneous clearing of transitions

Double lines may be used to indicate transitions which have to be cleared
simultaneously. If such transitions are shown separately, the activity state of
preceding steps (GSnnn.x) can be used to express their conditions.

Simultaneous activation and deactivation of a step

If, during operation, a step is simultaneously activated and deactivated, priority is
given to the activation.

ABB Control Page B-30 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

6 IL language
Instruction List, or IL is a low level language. It is highly effective for smaller
applications or for optimizing parts of an application. Instructions always relate to the
current result (or IL register). The operator indicates the operation that must be
made between the current value and the operand. The result of the operation is
stored again in the current result.

6.1 IL main syntax

An IL program is a list of instructions. Each instruction must begin on a new line,

and must contain an operator, completed with optional modifiers and, if necessary,
for the specific operation, one or more operands, separated with commas (','). A
label followed by a colon (':') may precede the instruction. If a comment is attached
to the instruction, it must be the last component of the line. Comments always begin
with '(*' and ends with '*)'. Empty lines may be entered between instructions.
Comments may be put on empty lines.

Below are examples of instruction lines:

Label Operator Operand Comments

Start: LD BUTTON1 (* push button *)

ANDN %I62.02 (* command is not forbidden *)
ST START-MOTOR (* start motor *)

6.1.1 Labels
A label followed by a colon (':') may precede the instruction. A label can be put on
an empty line. Labels are used as operands for some operations such as jumps.
Naming labels must conform to the following rules:

- name cannot exceed 16 characters

- first character must be a letter
- following characters must be letters, digits or '-' character

The same name cannot be used for more than one label in the same IL program. A
label can have the same name as a variable.

6.1.2 Operator modifiers

The available operator modifiers are shown below. The modifier character must
complete the name of the operator, with no blank characters between them:

N boolean negation of the operand

C conditional operation

The 'N' modifier indicates a boolean negation of the operand. For example, the
instruction ORN %I62.00 is interpreted as: OR NOT %I62.00

ABB Control Page B-31 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

The 'C' modifier indicates that the attached instruction must be executed only if the
current result has the boolean value TRUE (different than 0 for non-boolean values).
The 'C' modifier can be combined with the 'N' modifier to indicate that the instruction
must be executed only if the current result has the boolean value FALSE (or 0 for
non-boolean values).

6.2 IL operators

The following table summarizes the standard operators of the IL language:

Operator Modifiers Operand Description

LD N Variable, constant Loads operand

! N Variable, constant Loads operand
ST N Variable Stores current result
S Variable Sets to TRUE
R Variable Resets to FALSE

!BA 0 + function block name -> Calls a function block

CAL FB instance name Calls a function block
CAL_FB Calls a subroutine
VTASK Calls an interruption
JMP C N Label Jumps to label

AND N BOO boolean AND

& N BOO boolean AND
OR N BOO boolean OR
/ N BOO boolean OR

ADD variable, constant Addition

+ variable, constant Addition
SUB variable, constant Subtraction
- variable, constant Substraction
MUL variable, constant Multiplication
* variable, constant Multiplication
DIV variable, constant Division
: variable, constant Division

GT variable, constant Test: >

> variable, constant Test: >
GE variable, constant Test: >=
>= variable, constant Test: >=
EQ variable, constant Test: =
=? variable, constant Test: =
LE variable, constant Test: <=
<= variable, constant Test: <=
LT variable, constant Test: <
< variable, constant Test: <
NE variable, constant Test: <>

ABB Control Page B-32 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

<> variable, constant Test: <>

In the next section, only operators which are specific to the IL language are
described, other standard operators can be found in the section "standard operators,
function blocks and functions".

6.2.1 LD operator
Operation loads a value in the current result

Allowed modifiers N

Operand constant expression

internal, input or output variable

Example:

(* EXAMPLES OF LD OPERATIONS *)
LDex:: LD false (* result = FALSE boolean constant *)
LD true (* result = TRUE boolean constant *)
LD boo_var1 (* result = boolean variable *)
LD ana_var1 (* result = analog variable *)
LDN boo_var2 (* result = NOT ( boolean variable ) *)

6.2.2 ST operator
Operation stores the current result in a variable
the current result is not modified by this operation

Allowed modifiers N

Operand internal or output variable

Example:

(* EXAMPLES OF ST OPERATIONS *)
STboo: LD false
ST boo_var1 (* boo_var1 = FALSE *)
STN boo_var2 (* boo_var2 = TRUE *)
STana: LD %IW3.3
ST ana_var1 (* ana_var1 = value of %IW3.3 *)

6.2.3 S operator
Operation: stores the boolean value TRUE in a boolean variable, if the current
result has the boolean value TRUE. No operation is processed if
current result is FALSE. The current result is not modified by this
operation.

Allowed modifiers: (none)

ABB Control Page B-33 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

Operand: output or internal boolean variable

Example:

(* EXAMPLES OF S OPERATIONS *)
SETex: LD true (* current result = TRUE *)
S var1 (* var1 = TRUE *)
(* current result is not modified *)
LD false (* current result = FALSE *)
S var1 (* nothing done var1 unchanged *)

6.2.4 R operator
Operation stores the boolean value FALSE in a boolean variable, if the current
result has the boolean value TRUE. No operation is processed if
current result is FALSE. The current result is not modified by this
operation.

Allowed modifiers (none)

Operand output or internal boolean variable

Example:

(* EXAMPLES OF R OPERATIONS *)
RESETex: LD true (* current result = TRUE *)
R var1 (* var1 = FALSE *)
(* current result is not modified *)
ST var2 (* var2 = TRUE *)
LD false (* current result = FALSE *)
R var1 (* nothing done var1 unchanged *)

6.2.5 JMP operator

Operation jumps to the specified label

Allowed modifiers C N

Operand label defined in the same IL program

Example:

(* the following example tests the value of an analog selector (0 or 1 or 2) *)

(* to set one from 3 output booleans. Test "is equal to 0" is made with *)
(* the JMPC operator *)

JMPex:
LD selector (* selector is 0 or 1 or 2 *)
EQ value=0 (* %KW1.0=0*)
JMPC test1 (* if selector = 0 then *)
LD true

ABB Control Page B-34 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

ST bo0 (* bo0 = true *)

JMP JMPend (* end of the program *)
test1:
LD selector
EQ value=1 (* %KW1.1=1 *)
JMPC test2 (* if selector = 1 then *)
LD true
ST bo1 (* bo1 = true *)
JMP JMPend (* end of the program *)
test2:
LD true (* last possibility *)
ST bo2 (* bo2 = true *)
JMPend: (* end of the IL program *)

6.2.6 Calling sub-programs and interruptions

A sub-program is called from the IL language, using its name as an operator.

Operation executes a sub-program

Allowed modifiers (none)

Operand The first calling parameter must be the name of the subroutine
The following one, separated by a coma, is the call bit of the
subroutine.

Example:

CAL_FB(sub1,%I2.2) (* call the subroutine named sub1 *)

An interruption is called from the IL language, using its name as an operator.

Operation executes an interruption

Allowed modifiers (none)

Operand The first calling parameter must be the name of the interruption
The following one, separated by a coma, is the call bit of the
interruption.

Example:

VTASK(int, %I2.2) (* call the hard interruption named int *)

6.2.7 Calling function blocks: CAL, !BA 0 operator

Operation calls a function block
CAL has to be used for blocks not extended.

Allowed modifiers None

ABB Control Page B-35 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

Operand Name of the function block instance.

Output parameters are known if used.

Example1:

(* Calling function block TON*)

CAL TON ( IN, PT, ET, Q)

is equivalent to :

!BA0
TON
IN
PT
ET
Q

example 2:

(* Calling function block CTUH *)

CAL
CTUH(#1,%I62.00,%I62.01,%MW2.0,%I62.02,%I62.03,%I62.04,%O62.00,%OW62.
01,%OW62.02)

is equivalent to :

!BA 0
CTUH
#1
%I62.00
%I62.01
%MW2.0
%I62.02
%I62.03
%I62.04
%O62.00
%OW62.01
%OW62.02

6.3 Main differences between IEC IL and ABB IL

With IL ABB, an instruction list must be followed by an operator ST:

LD %I62.01
AND %I62.02
ST %M2.0

ABB Control Page B-36 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Language reference

In order to use the accumulator %M2.0, we have to load it:

LD %I62.01
AND %I62.02
ST %M2.0
LD %M2.0
OR %M3.0
…

With IL IEC, there no need to load the accumulator (the current result), so we can
write:

LD %I62.01
AND %I62.02
ST %M2.2
OR %I62.03
…

Call of subroutines, interruptions and function blocs:

Function blocs:
The following syntax is just used for IL ABB in order to call function blocs
!BA 0
CTUH
…

but it is possible to use the IL IEC as follow:

CAL CTUH(…)

Subroutines and interruption:

To call a subroutine:
CAL_FB
and an interruption:
VTASK

This syntax is specific to the IL ABB

ABB Control Page B-37 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

C Function block description

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

ABB Control 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

C FUNCTION BLOCK DESCRIPTION

1 Libraries .....................................................................................................................C-2
2 Basic operators/functions..........................................................................................C-8
2.1 Binary functions .....................................................................................................C-8
2.2 Timer functions....................................................................................................C-17
2.3 Counter functions.................................................................................................C-34
2.4 Comparison functions, word................................................................................C-40
2.5 Arithmetic functions, word ..................................................................................C-49
2.6 Logical functions, word .......................................................................................C-61
3 Program control functions ......................................................................................C-68
4 CS31 functions .........................................................................................................C-83
5 Communication functions.....................................................................................C-114
6 Regulation functions..............................................................................................C-150
7 Format conversion functions ................................................................................C-169
8 Standard double word functions..........................................................................C-196
8.1 Comparison functions, double word ..................................................................C-196
8.2 Arithmetic functions, double word ....................................................................C-199
8.3 Logical functions, double word .........................................................................C-208
9 High order functions .............................................................................................C-211
10 Memory access functions......................................................................................C-287
11 Special Functions...................................................................................................C-314
12 Historical values ....................................................................................................C-322
12.1 Definition ...........................................................................................................C-322
12.2 Historical value table .........................................................................................C-322
13 Runtimes ................................................................................................................C-323
13.1 Definition ...........................................................................................................C-323
13.2 Runtime table (time in µs) .................................................................................C-324

ABB Control Page C-1 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

1 Libraries
Each central unit serie has its own library of functions. The libraries are specified in
the following table : the "x" symbol indicates the functions available in the different
central unit series.

Binary functions serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

from pages C-8 to C-17
&, AND And x x x x x
/, OR Or x x x x x
= Allocation x x x x x
=1 Exclusive OR x x x x x
=R Allocation reset memory x x x x x
=S Allocation set memory x x x x x
I+ Pulse (positive edge) x x x x x
I- Pulse (negative edge) x x x x x
MAJ Majority x
RS Set memory dominating x x x x x
SR Reset memory dominating x x x x x

Timer functions serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

from pages C-17 to C-34
ASV OFF delay x x x x
ESV ON delay x x x x
MOA Monostable element "abort" x x x x
MOAT Monostable element "abort" with time x x
MOK Monostable element "constant" x x x x
PDM Pulse duration modulator x x x x
TIME_W Time_word conversion x x
TOF OFF delay timing x x x
TON ON delay timing x x x
TP Pulse timing x x x
VVZ Variable delay element x
W_TIME Word_time conversion x x
tler
Counter serie C 40 50 90 30
functions from pages C-34 to C-40
CTU Up counter x x x
CTUH Hardware counter for encoder x x
VRZ Up/down counter x x x x x
VRZD Up/down counter, double word x
tler
Comparison serie C 40 50 90 30
functions, word from pages C-40 to C-49
< Less than x x x x x
<= Less than or equal x x x x x
<> Unequal x x x x x
=? Equal x x x x x
> Greater than x x x x x

ABB Control Page C-2 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

>= Greater than or equal to x x x x x

VGL3P Comparator with 3-point response x
VGLEH Comparator with unilateral hysteresis x
VGLUH Comparator with asymmetrical hysteresis x
tler
Arithmetic serie C 40 50 90 30
functions, word from pages C-49 to C-61
+ Addition x x x x x
- Subtraction x x x x x
* Multiplication x x x x x
DIV Division x x x x x
*: / MULDI Multiplication with division x x x x x
=W Allocation x x x x x
BETR Absolute value generator x x x x
COS1 Cosinus x
MUL2N Multiplication by 2 to the power of N x x x x
NEG Negation x x x x
SIN1 Sinus x
SQRT Square root x
ZUDKW Allocation direct constant to word x x x x
variable

Logical serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions, word from pages C-61 to C-68
MASKE Mask x
SHIFT Shift block x
WAND AND combination, word x x x x
WOR OR combination, word x x x x
WXOR Exclusive OR combination, word x x x x

Program control serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions from pages C-68 to C-83
=PE Conditional program end x x x x
ABORT Program abort x
CAL_FB Subroutine call x
CALLUP Subroutine call for an assembler x
program
DI Read direct input x x
DIN Read direct inputs x
DO Write direct output x x
DOUT Write direct outputs x
IOCON Input/output configuration x
LZB Run number block x
VTASK Interrupt task validation x x

tler
CS31 functions serie C 40 50 90 30
from pages C-83 to C-114
CONFIO1 1 analog channel configuration x x

ABB Control Page C-3 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONFIO4 4 analog channels configuration x x

CONFIO8 8 analog channels configuration x x
CS31CO Configure CS31 module x x x
CS31QU Acknowledge CS31 error x x x
MT_CS31 data sent by CS31 master x x x
MR_CS31 data received by CS31 master x x x
ST_CS31 data sent by CS31 slave x x x
SR_CS31 data received by CS31 slave x x x

Communication serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions from pages C-114 to C-150
AINIT Initialisation of the ARCnet controller x
APOLL Transfer of the data package to the x
ARCnet controller
AREC / ARCnet data package receiving x
ARECitem
ASEND / ARCnet data package sending x
ASEND+
MODBUS MODBUS master x x x
REC / EMAS Receiving of ASCII characters and HEX x x x x
and RECvars values through a serail interface
SEND / DRUCK Sending of ASCII characters and HEX x x x x
values through a serail interface
SINIT Initialization and configuration of the x x x x
serial interfaces

Regulation serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions from pages C-150 to C-169
DT1 Differentiator with delay of the 1st order x
INTK Integrator (extended) x
PI Proportional-integral controller x x x x
PIDT1 PIDT1 controller x x x
PT1 PT1 element x
tler
Format serie C 40 50 90 30
conversion
functions from pages C-169 to C-196
BCDDUAL / BCD to binary conversion x x x x
BCDBIN
BCDDUALD / BCD to binary conversion, double word x
BCDDW
DUALBCD / Binary to BCD conversion x x x x
BINBCD
DUABCDD / Binary to BCD conversion, double word x
DWBCD
DWW Double word to word conversion x x x x
PACK4 Pack 4 binary variables in a word x x x x
PACK8 Pack 8 binary variables in a word x x x x
PACK16 Pack 16 binary variables in a word x x x x
PACKD4 Pack 4 binary variables in a double word x

ABB Control Page C-4 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PACKD8 Pack 8 binary variables in a double word x

PACKD16 Pack 16 binary variables in a double x
word
PACKD24 Pack 24 binary variables in a double x
word
PACKD32 Pack 32 binary variables in a double x
word
UNPACK4 Unpacking a word into 4 binary variables x x x x
UNPACK8 Unpacking a word into 8 binary variables x x x x
UNPACK16 Unpacking a word into 16 binary x x x x
variables
UNPACKD4 Unpacking a double word into 4 binary x
variables
UNPACKD8 Unpacking a double word into 8 binary x
variables
UNPACKD16 Unpacking a double word into 16 binary x
variables
UNPACKD24 Unpacking a double word into 24 binary x
variables
UNPACKD32 Unpacking a double word into 32 binary x
variables
WDW Word to double word conversion x x x x

Comparison serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions,
double word from pages C-196 to C-199
<D / VKLD Less than, double word x
=?D / VGLD Equal, double word x
>D / VGRD Greater than, double word x

Arithmetic serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions,
double word from pages C-199 to C-208
+D / ADDD Addition, double word x
-D / SUBD Subtraction, double word x
*D / MULD Multiplication, double word x
:D / DIVD Division, double word x
=D / ZUWD Allocation, double word x
BETRD Absolute value generator, double word x
MUL2ND Double word multiplication by 2 to the x
power of N
NEGD Negation, double word x
SQRT Square root x

Logical serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions,
double word from pages C-208 to C-211
DWAND AND combination, double word x
DWOR OR combination, double word x
DWXOR Exclusive OR combination, double word x

ABB Control Page C-5 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MASKED Mask, double word x

SHIFT Shift block x

High order serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions from pages C-211 to C-287
ADRWA Address selection x
AMELD Analog value change annonciator x
AMELDD Analog value change annonciator, x
double word
ANAI4_20 Read analog value 4...20 mA (07KT92) x
AWM Selection multiplexer x
AWT Selection gate, word x x x x
AWTB Binary selection gate x x x x
AWTD Selection gate, double word x
BEG Limiter x x x x
BEGD Limiter, double word x
BITSU Bit searcher x
BMELD Binary value change annunciator x x x
DMUX Demultiplexer x
DMUXD Demultiplexer, double word x
DWUMC Double word decoder x
FEHSU Error searcher with automatic deletion x
FIFO Stack, first-in / first-out x
FKG Function generator x
HLG Ramp function generator x
IDLB Read binary variable, indexed x
IDLm / IDL Read word variable, indexed x x x x
IDSB Write binary variable, indexed x
IDSm / IDS Write word variable, indexed x x x x
INITS Initialize memory area in the operand x
memory with zero
INITV Initialize variables x
LDT Illumination pushbutton control x
LIFO Stack, last-in / first-out x
LIZU List allocator x x x x
MAX Maximum value generator x x x x
MAXD Maximum value generator, double word x
MAZ Maximum value generator as a function x
of time
MAZD Maximum value generator as a function x
of time, double word
MIN Minimum value generator x x x x
MIND Minimum value generator, double word x
MUXR Multiplexer with reset x
MUXRD Multiplexer with reset, double word x
NPULSE x x
SFEHSU Error searcher with storage x
UHR Clock x x x
USM Switchover multiplexer x
UST Switchover gate x

ABB Control Page C-6 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

USTD Switchover, double word x

USTR Switchover gate with reset x
USTRD Switchover with reset, double word x
WDEC Word decoder x
WUMC Word recoder x

Memory serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

Access from pages C-287 to C-314
COPY Copying memory areas x x x x
DWAES Write double word in the event of value x
change
DWOL Read double word with enable x
DWOS Write double word with enabling x
FDEL Delete data segment in Flash EPROM x
FRD Read data segment from the Flash x
EPROM
FWR Write data segment to the Flash EPROM x
IOR Read byte value from I/O address x
IOW Write byte value to I/O address x
RDB Read binary values from historical values x
memory
RDDW Read double word values from historical x
values memory
RDW Read word values from historical values x
memory
WAES Write word in the event of value change x
WOL Read word with enabling x x x x
WOS Write word with enabling x
WRB Write binary values into historical values x
memory
WRDW Write double word values to historical x
values memory
WRW Write word values to historical values x
memory

Special serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions from pages C-314 to C-322
5F_ARC94 Arcnet for 07KT94 94
COUNTB Test of number of bits in a word/double 94
word
COUNTW Fast counter on 07KT94 94
DWWW One double word in 2 words conversion 94
IDENT Identification 94
MODMASTK MODBUS master 94
SETB Set a bit in a word/double word 94
TESTB Test a bit in a word/double word 94
WWDW 2 words in one double word conversion 94

ABB Control Page C-7 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

2 Basic operators/functions

2.1 Binary functions

Binary functions serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

from pages C-8 to C-17
&, AND And x x x x x
/, OR Or x x x x x
=1 Exclusive OR x x x x x
= Allocation x x x x x
=R Allocation reset memory x x x x x
=S Allocation set memory x x x x x
I+ Pulse (positive edge) x x x x x
I- Pulse (negative edge) x x x x x
MAJ Majority x
RS Set memory dominating x x x x x
SR Reset memory dominating x x x x x

& AND

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
& AND E2
E1 ST A1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 1
E2 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 2
capable of duplication
A1 BINARY %M, %O, %S Result of AND combination

DESCRIPTION
This connection element realizes a logical AND combination of the operands at the
inputs. The result is allocated to the operand at the output.

Truth table :
E1 E2 A1
0 0 0
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 1

ABB Control Page C-8 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

/ OR

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
/ OR E2
E1 ST A1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 1
E2 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 2 capable of
duplication
A1 BINARY %M, %O, %S Result of the OR combination

DESCRIPTION
This connection element realizes a logical OR combination of the operands at the
inputs. The result is allocated to the operand at the output.

Truth table:
E1 E2 A1
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 1

= ALLOCATION

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
= ST A1
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K,%S Source
A1 BINARY %M, %O, %K,%S Target

ABB Control Page C-9 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This connection element allocates the value of the operand at the input E1 to the
operand at the output A1.

=1 EXCLUSIVE OR

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
=1 ANDN E2
E1 ORN E1
E2 A1 AND E2
ST A1

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M,%O,%S,%K Operand 1
E2 BINARY %I,%M,%O,%S,%K, Operand 2
A1 BINARY %M,%O,%S Result of the XOR
combination

DESCRIPTION
This connection element realizes a logical EXCLUSIVE OR combination of the
operands at the inputs. The result is allocated to the operand at the output.

Truth table:
E1 E2 A1
0 0 0
1 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0

=R ALLOCATION RESET MEMORY

FBD IL

LD E1
=R =R A1
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Reset condition

ABB Control Page C-10 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

A1 BINARY %M, %O Store variable

DESCRIPTION
A state 1 at the input sets the operand at the output to a state 0. A state 0 at the
input has no influence on the operand at the output.

IMPORTANT :
This function block must only be used as an output function block : i. e., in the FBD,
it must not be connected further by a line on the output side.
An operand (%M or %O) must be specified at the output.

Example:

=R
E1 A1 A1 not allowed
A2

=R
E1 A1
& not allowed

=S ALLOCATION SET MEMORY

FBD IL

LD E1
=S =S A1
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Set condition
A1 BINARY %M, %O Storage variable

DESCRIPTION
A state 1 at the input sets the operand at the output to a state 1. A state 0 at the
input has no influence on the operand at the output.

IMPORTANT :

ABB Control Page C-11 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

This function block must only be used as an output function block : i. e., in the FBD,
it must not be connected further by a line on the output side.
An operand (%M or %O) must be specified at the output.

Example:

=S
E1 A1 A1 not allowed
A2

=S
E1 A1
& not allowed

I+ PULSE (POSITIVE EDGE)

FBD IL

LDN 0-1
I+ =R Q
0-1 Q LD 0-1
PULS ANDN Q
=S Q
ST PULS

PARAMETERS
0-1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input for 0 - 1 edge
Q BINARY %O, %M Output for edge detection
PULS BINARY %O, %M Pulse output

DESCRIPTION
A positive edge (0->1) at the input 0-1 generates a pulse with the duration of one
PLC program cycle at the PULS output.

The output Q is needed for edge detection. This flag must not be used again in the
PLC program.

Duration of the pulse : From recognition of the 0-1 edge by the connection element
until renewed processing of this connection element in the next program cycle.

ABB Control Page C-12 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

0-1

PULS
T T
T: Program cycle time.

I- PULSE (NEGATIVE EDGE)

FBD IL

LD 1-0
I- =S Q
1-0 Q LDN 1-0
PULS AND Q
=R Q
ST PULS

PARAMETERS
1-0 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input for 1 - 0 edge
Q BINARY %O, %M Output for interrogation of the
direct flag
PULS BINARY %O, %M Pulse output

DESCRIPTION
A negative edge (1->0) at the input 1-0 generates a pulse at the output PULS which
has the duration of 1 PLC program cycle.

The output Q is needed for edge detection. This flag must not be used again in the
PLC program.

Duration of the pulse : From recognition of the 1-0 edge by the connection element
up to renewed processing of this connection element in the next program cycle.

1-0

PULS
T T
T: Program cycle time of the PLC

MAJ MAJORITY

ABB Control Page C-13 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL MAJ (E1,E2,E3,MAJ)

MAJ
E1
E2
E3 MAJ

PARAMETERS
E1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 1
E2 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 2
E3 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Operand 3
MAJ BINARY %M, %O Result

DESCRIPTION
This connection element realizes a MAJORITY element.

If at least 2 of the 3 binary operands at the inputs E1, E2 and E3 have the state 1,
then the state 1 is allocated to the binary operand at the output MAJ.

If it is not the case, the state 0 is allocated to the binary operand at the output MAJ.

ABB Control Page C-14 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

RS SET MEMORY, DOMINATING

FBD IL

LD R
RS =R Q
R LD S
S Q =S Q

PARAMETERS
R BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Reset input
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Set input
Q BINARY %M, %O Flip-flop output

DESCRIPTION
A status 1 at the input R resets the operand Q to the status 0.

A status 1 at the input S sets the operand Q to the status 1.

A simultaneous 1 status at the inputs S and R sets the operand Q to a status 1

(dominating set).

A status 0 at the input S or R has no influence on the operand Q.

SR RESET MEMORY, DOMINATING

FBD IL

LD S
SR =S Q
S LD R
R Q =R Q

PARAMETERS
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Set input
R BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Reset input
Q BINARY %M, %O Flip-flop output

DESCRIPTION
A status 1 at the input S sets the operand Q to the status 1.

ABB Control Page C-15 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

A status 1 at the input R resets the operand Q to the status 0.

A simultaneous 1 status at the inputs S and R resets the operand to a status 0

(dominating reset).

A status 0 at the input S or R has no influence on the operand Q.

ABB Control Page C-16 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

2.2 Timer functions

Timer functions serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

ASV OFF DELAY

FBD IL

CAL ASV ( 0-T ,ZD,Q)

ASV
0-T
ZD Q

PARAMETERS
0 -T BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
ZD DOUBLE %MD, %KD Delay time
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Delayed signal

DESCRIPTION
The 1-0 edge of the input 0I I T is delayed by the time ZD and is output as a 1-0
edge at the output Q. If the input 0I I T returns to 1 level before expiry of the time ZD,
the output Q retains 1 level.

The time is specified in milliseconds. Only integral multiple of 5 ms are admissible

(Examples: 5 ms, 500 ms, 100 000 ms, ...). Time range which can be specified :
5 ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output: < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for ZD: > 1 cycle time.

ABB Control Page C-17 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

0 T

Q
t t t

t0 ZD t0 t<ZD t0 ZD

General response
Started timers are processed by the PLC operating system and are therefore
completely independent of processing of the PLC program.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

Important note :
Up to versions 07 KR 91 index f and 07 KT 92 index f, the behaviour of the timers is
the following : processing of a timer in the old PLC’s operating system is not
influenced by the following commands :
Abort program
Start program
Stop program
Continue program
That is to say, processing of a started timer is continued in the PLC’s operating
system even if the affiliated PLC program is aborted, restarted or stopped and
continued again.

ESV ON DELAY

FBD IL

CAL ESV ( T I I 0 ,ZD,Q)

ESV
T I I0
ZD Q

PARAMETERS
TI I 0 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
ZD DOUBLE %MD, %KD Delay time
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Delayed signal

ABB Control Page C-18 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The 0-1 edge of the input TI I 0 is delayed by the time ZD and is output as a 0-1
edge at the output Q. The output Q retains 0 level if the input TI I 0 returns to 0 level
before the time ZD has elapsed.

The time is specified in milliseconds in a double word %MD or %KD. Only integral
multiple of 5 ms are admissible (Examples: 5 ms, 500 ms, 100 000 ms, ...). Time
range which can be specified is : 5 ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output : < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for ZD : > 1 cycle time

T 0

Q
t t

t0 ZD t0 t<ZD

General response
Started timers are processed by the PLC operating system and are completely
independent of processing of the PLC program.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

ABB Control Page C-19 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MOA MONOSTABLE ELEMENT ”ABORT”

FBD IL

CAL MOA (1 ,ZD,Q)

MOA
1
ZD Q

PARAMETERS
1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
ZD DOUBLE %MD, %KD Pulse length
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Output signal

DESCRIPTION
A 0-1 edge at the input 1 produces a 0-1 edge at the output Q. If the input 1
remains at 1 level, a 1-0 edge is output on output Q after duration ZD has elapsed.
The output Q is also set back to 0 level if the input 1 should return to 0 level before
expiry of time TD.

The time is specified in milliseconds. Only integral multiple of 5 ms are admissible

(Examples: 5 ms, 500 ms, 100 000 ms, ...). Time range which can be specified:
5ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output: < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for ZD: > 1 cycle time

Q
t t

t0 ZD t0 t<ZD

General response
Started timers are processed by the PLC operating system and are therefore
completely independent of processing of the PLC program.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP

ABB Control Page C-20 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Warm or cold start

MOAT MONOSTABLE ELEMENT ”ABORT” with time

FBD IL

CAL MOAT (1 ,ZD,ET,Q)

MOAT
1 Q
ZD ET

PARAMETERS
1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
ZD WORD %KW & %KW+1 Pulse length
%MW & %MW+1
DOUBLE %MD, %KD
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Delayed signal
ET WORD %MW & %MW+1 Time visualization
DOUBLE %MD
WORD

The time elapsed can be consulted at the output ET and the pulse lenght at the input
ZD can be modified when the timer is running. The pulse lenght is specified in
milliseconds. The time range which can be specified is : 1 ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output : < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for PT : > 1 cycle time.

ABB Control Page C-21 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Q
t t

t0 ZD t0 t<ZD

Note :
If the time is less than 65s, a word can be used for the preset time PT. Then the PT
input can be used :
- with all the other word functions
- from the central unit potentiometer
- or for MODBUS communication (double word are not allowed in MODBUS)
directly without double word to word conversion.

If word variables (%MW or %KW) are used for the parameter PT, two
consecutive addresses are necessary. Never use %MW+1 or %KW+1 in your
program in this case.

General response
Started timers are processed by the PLC operating system and are therefore
completely independent of processing of the PLC program. An appropriate message
of the operating system is not issued to the affiliated timer block in the PLC program
until the timer has elapsed.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

ABB Control Page C-22 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MOK MONOSTABLE ELEMENT ”CONSTANT”

FBD IL

CAL MOK (1 ,ZD,Q)

MOK
1
ZD Q

PARAMETERS
1 V BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
ZD DOUBLE %MD, %KD Pulse length
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Output signal

DESCRIPTION
A 0-1 edge at the input 1 produces a 0-1 edge at the output Q. The output Q is
reset to 0 level after expiry of the period ZD. A second 0-1 edge of the input 1 V
before the time ZD has elapsed is ignored.

The time is specified in milliseconds. Only integral multiple of 5 ms are admissible

(Examples: 5 ms, 500 ms, 100 000 ms, ...). Time range which can be specified:
5 ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output: < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for ZD: > 1 cycle time

1 V

Q
ZD ZD

General response
Started timers are processed by the PLC operating system and are therefore
completely independent of processing of the PLC program.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

ABB Control Page C-23 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PDM PULSE DURATION MODULATOR

FBD IL

CAL PDM (t/ta,ta/T,PULS)

PDM
t/ta
ta/T
PULS

PARAMETERS
t/ta WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Duty ratio
ta/T WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Period referred to the cycle
time
PULS BINARY %O, %M Pulse duration modulated
signal

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates a pulse duration-modulated binary signal at its PULS
output.

The duty ratio is specified at the t/ta input and the period for the output signal is
specified at the ta/T input.
In case of serie 40 and 50 and cycle time equal to 0 , T is equal to 10ms

t/ta WORD
The required duty ratio for the output signal PULS is specified at the input t/ta.
- ta is the period of the signal at the output PULS
- t is the time within the period ta during which the output signal assumes a 1 level.
The specified value for the required duty ratio at the input t/ta must be specified in
scaled form. To do this, the required duty ratio must be multiplied by the value 32767
and rounded to a whole number. The resulting numerical value is then specified at
the input t/ta.

ABB Control Page C-24 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Marginal condition for t : t > T

That is to say, the required duty cycle of the output signal must be higher than the
cycle time of the PLC program.

PULS
t

ta t

T T T T T T T T

The following relationship applies to specification of the keying ratio at the input t/ta:

Scaled value at the t/ta input Results in duty ratio

at the output PULS
Negative value 0 ( 0 %)
0 (0 * 32767) 0 ( 0 %)
. .
. .
16384 (0,5 * 32767) 0,5 ( 50 %)
. .
. .
32767 (1 * 32767) 1 (100 %)

ta/T WORD
The required period ta for the signal at the output PULS is specified at the input ta/T.
At the same time, the period ta must be scaled to the cycle time T.
Marginal condition for ta:
- ta = n * T : ta must be an integral multiple of T
- ta >> T > 0; the higher ta is in relation to T, the more exactly the
required duty ratio is kept to.
E.g. ta > 10 * T -> inaccuracy of the duty ratio at the output PULS < 10%.

If a value ta/T < 0 is specified for ta/T, the function block automatically replaces this
meaningless value by 32767.

PULS BINARY
The pulse duration modulated signal is available at the PULS output.

EXAMPLE
Required :
- Duty ratio : t/ta = 0,25 (25 %)
- Period : ta = 800 ms (only an integral multiple of the PLC cycle time is
possible)
- Cycle time : T = 100 ms

Block parameters to be specified :

- Value at the input t/ta : 8192 (0,25 * 32767)

ABB Control Page C-25 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

- Value at the input ta/T : 8 (800 ms/100 ms)

PULS
t

ta t

T T T T T T T T

TIME_W TIME_WORD CONVERSION

FBD IL

CAL TIME_W (TIME,H,M,S,MS)

TIME_W
H
M
S
TIME MS

PARAMETERS
TIME DOUBLE %MD, %KD Time value
WORD
H WORD %MW ,%OW Hour value
M WORD %MW ,%OW Minute value
S WORD %MW ,%OW Second value
MS WORD %MW ,%OW Millisecond value

DESCRIPTION
This functions is used to manage time value with word variables
The Time value TIME is converted in hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.

The time value is in millisecond

The maximum value is

0<=TIME<=986399999
0<= H <= 273
0<= M <= 59
0<= S <= 59
0<= MS<= 999

IF TIME is greater than 986399999 then H, M, S, MS are set to the maximum value

ABB Control Page C-26 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

IF TIME is negative then H, M, S, MS are set to zero

TOF OFF DELAY

FBD IL

CAL TOF (IN,PT,ET,Q)

TOF
IN
PT Q
ET

PARAMETERS
IN BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
PT WORD %KW & %KW+1 Preset time
%MW & %MW+1
DOUBLE %MD, %KD
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Delayed signal
ET WORD %MW & %MW+1 Time visualization
DOUBLE %MD
WORD

DESCRIPTION
The 1-0 edge of the input IN is delayed by the time PT at the output Q. If the input IN
returns to 1 level before expiry of the time PT, the output Q retains 1 level.

The time elapsed can be consulted at the output ET and the preset time value at the
input PT can be modified when the timer is running. The preset time is specified in
milliseconds. The time range which can be specified is : 1 ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output : < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for PT : > 1 cycle time.

Q
t t t

t0 PT t0 t<PT t0 PT

Note :
If the time is less than 65s, a word can be used for the preset time PT. Then the PT
input can be used :

ABB Control Page C-27 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

- with all the other word functions

- from the central unit potentiometer
- or for MODBUS communication (double word are not allowed in MODBUS)
directly without double word to word conversion.

If word variables (%MW or %KW) are used for the parameter PT, two
consecutive addresses are necessary. Never use %MW+1 or %KW+1 in your
program in this case.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

TON ON DELAY
FBD IL

CAL TON (IN,PT,ET,Q)

TON
IN
PT Q
ET

DESCRIPTION
The 0-1 edge of the input IN is delayed by the time PT at the output Q. The output Q
retains 0 level if the input IN returns to 0 level before the time PT has elapsed.

ABB Control Page C-28 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Maximum time offset at the output : < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for PT : > 1 cycle time

Q
t t

t0 PT t0 t<PT

If word variables (%MW or %KW) are used for the parameter PT, two
consecutive addresses are necessary. Never use %MW+1 or %KW+1 in your
program in this case.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

TP MONOSTABLE ELEMENT ”CONSTANT”

ABB Control Page C-29 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL TP (IN,PT,ET,Q)
TP
IN
PT Q
ET

DESCRIPTION
A 0-1 edge at the input IN produces a 0-1 edge at the output Q. The output Q is
reset to 0 level after expiry of the period PT. A second 0-1 edge of the input IN
before the time PT has elapsed is ignored.

Maximum time offset at the output : < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for PT : > 1 cycle time

Q
PT PT

If word variables (%MW or %KW) are used for the parameter PT, two

ABB Control Page C-30 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

consecutive addresses are necessary. Never use %MW+1 or %KW+1 in your

program in this case.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

VVZ VARIABLE DELAY ELEMENT

FBD IL

CAL VVZ (t I I T,tD,TD,Q)

VVZ
t I IT
tD
TD Q

PARAMETERS
tI I T BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Input signal
tD DOUBLE %MD, %KD Delay time 0-1 edge
WORD
TD DOUBLE %MD, %KD Delay time 1-0 edge
WORD
Q BINARY %M, %O Output signal

DESCRIPTION
A 0-1 edge at the input tI I T longer or equal to tD activates the output Q during the
time TD. The output Q is delayed from the input tI I T by the time tD.

The time is specified in milliseconds. Only integral multiple of 5 ms are admissible

(Examples: 5 ms, 500 ms, 100 000 ms, ...). Time range which can be specified :
5 ms ... 24.8 days.

Maximum time offset at the output: < 1 cycle time

Meaningful range for tD and TD: > 1 cycle time

ABB Control Page C-31 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

t T

tD TD tD

General response
Started timers are processed by the PLC operating system and are therefore
completely independent of processing of the PLC program.

Processing of a timer in the PLC operating system is influenced by the following

commands. All running timers are stopped and initialized when one of the following
actions occurs:
Abort PLC program
RUN/STOP switch from RUN -> STOP
Warm or cold start

ABB Control Page C-32 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

W_TIME WORD_TIME CONVERSION

FBD IL

CAL W_TIME(H,M,S,MS,TIME)
W_TIME
H
M
S
MS TIME

PARAMETERS
H WORD %IW, %KW, %MW, %OW Hour value
M WORD %IW, %KW, %MW, %OW Minute value
S WORD %IW, %KW, %MW, %OW Second value
MS WORD %IW, %KW, %MW, %OW Millisecond value
TIME DOUBLE %MD Time value
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This functions is used to set a TIME value through words
The words values are converted in a double word for timer functions

The time value is in millisecond

The maximum value is

0<= H <= 273
0<= M <= 32767
0<= S <= 32767
0<= MS<= 32767

If one parameter is set to a negative value, the value used for the internal calculation
is 0

ABB Control Page C-33 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

2.3 Counter functions

Counter serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions from pages C-34 to C-40
CTU Up counter x x x
CTUH Hardware counter for encoder x x
VRZ Up/down counter x x x x x
VRZD Up/down counter, double word x

CTU UP COUNTER

FBD IL

CAL CTU (CU,R,PV,Q,CV)

CTU
CU Q
R
PV CV

PARAMETERS
CU BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Pulse input
R BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Counter reset input
PV WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW High counter limit
Q BINARY %M, %O, Limit indicator
CV WORD %OW, %MW Counter value

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves to count pulses. Each positive edge (0->1 edge) at the
input CU increases the current counter value specified at output CV by 1.

CU BINARY
The pulse signal is allocated to the input CU. The positive edge of the pulse is
evaluated in each case.

R BINARY
A 1 signal at the input R sets the counter content to the value 0.
The reset input R has the highest priority.

PV WORD
The high limit of the counter is specified at the input PV.

Q BINARY
The output Q indicates if the counter value is higher or not than the value at the input
PV.
CV ≥ PV -> Q = 1

ABB Control Page C-34 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CV < PV -> Q = 0

CV WORD
The current counter value is available at the output CV.
If the counter reaches the positive or negative limit of the number range, the counter
is limited to this value.

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• Low limit : 0
• High limit : 7FFFH + 32767

CTUH HIGH SPEED COUNTER

FBD IL

CTUH CAL CTUH (#num,R,S,INIT,RPI,

#num Q CATCH,R-Q,Q,CV,CATV)
R CV
S CATV
INIT
RPI
CATCH
R-Q

PARAMETERS
#num DIRECT #, #H Counter mode
CONSTANT
R BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Counter reset input
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Counter set input
INIT WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Set value
RPI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Reset point indicator
CATCH BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Catch counter value
R-Q BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Reset bit overflow
Q BINARY %M, %O Overflow
CV WORD %OW, %MW Counter value
CATV WORD %OW, %MW Catched counter value

DESCRIPTION
The CTUH function block allows the counting of high speed counters of units serie
40 and 50.

Units serie 40 and 50 have two high speed counters that can be used in the following
modes :

- C1 : counting on the %I 62.00 input

Counting start : on positive edge (0->1 edge)

ABB Control Page C-35 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Representation : 1 word (16 bits)

Overflow : when passing from -1 to 0.
Capture : on positive edge of the %I 62.02 input

- C2 : counting on the %I 62.01 input

Counting start : on positive edge (0->1 edge)
Representation : 1 word (16 bits)
Overflow : when passing from -1 to 0.
Capture : on positive edge of the %I 62.03 input

- Incremental encoder : counting on the %I 62.00 and %I 62.01 inputs

Counting start : on positive edge (0->1 edge)
Representation : 1 word (16 bits)
Overflow : when passing from -1 to 0 or from 0 to -1
Capture : on positive edge of the %I 62.02 input
In case of defective channel (ie one input not connected) the value
increases of +1 and decreases of -1.

#num DIRECT CONSTANT

The counting mode is specified at the input #num.
#1 = counter C1
#2 = counter C2
#3 = incremental encoder
>3 -> the block is not processed

R BINARY
A 1 signal at the input R resets the counter value and the capture register to the
value 0. The reset input R has the highest priority.
If R = 1 then CV = 0 and CATV = 0

S BINARY
A 1 signal at the input S loads the counter value with the preset value specified at the
input INIT.
If S = 1 then CV = INIT

INIT WORD
The preset value is specified at the input INIT.

RPI BINARY
A 1 signal at the input RPI validates the counter value capture and the counter reset
during the capture. The RPI input has a higher priority than CATCH.
RPI = 1 Capture is valid on all the counters.
If there is a positive edge on %I 62,02 or %I 62,03, there is a
hard capture of the counter. The counter is reset to 0.

CATCH BINARY
A 1 signal at the input CATCH validates the counter value capture.
CATCH = 0 Capture not valid
CATCH = 1 Capture is valid on all the counters.

ABB Control Page C-36 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

If there is a positive edge on %I 62,02 or %I 62,03, there is a

hard capture of the counter. The counter is not reset to 0.

R-Q BINARY
A 1 signal at the input R-Q resets the overflow to the value 0.
If R-Q = 1 then Q = 0

Q BINARY
The overflow is specified at the input Q.
Q = 1 when CV passes from -1 to 0 or from 0 to -1.

CV WORD
The current counter value is available at the output CV.

CATV WORD
The counter value when CATCH =1 is available at the output CATV.

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• Low limit : 8000H - 32768
• High limit : 7FFFH + 32767

VRZ UP / DOWN COUNTER

FBD IL

CAL VRZ (R,DIFF,S,ZW,FREI,ZV,ZR,Z)

VRZ
FREI
ZV
ZR
DIFF
S
ZW
R Z

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Enable block processing
ZV BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Pulse input, up counting
ZR BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Pulse input, down counting
DIFF WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Counter content change per
positive edge (increment)
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Set counter to an
intermediate value
ZW WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Intermediate value
R BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Reset counter
Z WORD %OW, %MW Output for counter content

ABB Control Page C-37 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves to count pulses. When counting enabled (FREI = 1), the
positive edge of the pulse is evaluated in each case. The counter is capable of
counting both up and down and the counting increment can be specified. It is
possible to preset the counter content to an intermediate value.

FREI BINARY
Counting is enabled or disabled by means of the FREI input. The following applies :
FREI = 0 -> Counting disabled
FREI = 1 -> Counting enabled

ZV BINARY
Each positive edge (0->1 edge) at the input ZV increases the current counter content
by the increment specified at the DIFF input.

ZR BINARY
Each positive edge (0->1 edge) at the input ZR decreases the current counter
content by the increment specified at the DIFF input.

DIFF WORD
The increment for the counting operation is specified at the DIFF input. The
increment is the value by which the counter is changed at the input ZV or ZR with
each positive edge.

S BINARY
By means of a 1 signal at the input S, the counter content is set to the value
specified at the input ZW. Counting is blocked as long as 1 signal is present at the
input S. Setting is also effective when a 1 signal is present at the FREI input.

ZW WORD
The value to which the counter content is set by a 1 signal at the input S is specified
at the input ZW.

R BINARY
A 1 signal at the input R sets the counter content to the value 0. The reset input R
has the highest priority of all inputs.

Z WORD
The current counter content is available at the output Z.
If the counter reaches the positive or negative limit of the number range, the counter
is limited to this value.

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

Note for serie 90 :

The output is limited to -32767.

ABB Control Page C-38 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The value -32768 is an inadmissible value for word inputs.

VRZD UP / DOWN COUNTER, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL VRZD (R,DIFF,S,ZW,FREI,ZV,ZR,Z)

VRZD
FREI
ZV
ZR
DIFF
S
ZW
R Z

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Enable block processing
ZV BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Pulse input, up counting
ZR BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Pulse input, down counting
DIFF DOUBLE %MD, %KD Counter content change per
WORD positive edge (increment)
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Set counter to an intermediate
value
ZW DOUBLE %MD, %KD Intermediate value
WORD
R BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Reset counter
Z DOUBLE %MD Output for counter content
WORD

FREI BINARY
Counting is enabled or disabled by means of the FREI input. The following applies :
FREI = 0 -> Counting disabled
FREI = 1 -> Counting enabled

ZV BINARY
Each positive edge (0->1 edge) at the input ZV increases the current counter content
by the increment specified at the DIFF input.

ZR BINARY
Each positive edge (0->1 edge) at the input ZR decreases the current counter

ABB Control Page C-39 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

content by the increment specified at the DIFF input.

DIFF DOUBLE WORD

The increment for the counting operation is specified at the DIFF input. The
increment is the value by which the counter is changed at the input ZV or ZR with
each po–sitive edge.

ZW DOUBLE WORD
The value to which the counter content is set by a 1 signal at the input S is specified
at the input ZW.

R BINARY
A 1 signal at the input R sets the counter content to the value 0. The reset input R
has the highest priority of all inputs.

Z DOUBLE WORD
The current counter content is available at the output Z.
If the counter reaches the positive or negative limit of the number range, the counter
is limited to this value.

Number range
Integer double word (32 bits)
• Low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647
• Inadmissible value : 8000 0000H ---

All blocks for double word arithmetic subject values to be processed for admissibility.
If the inadmissible value occurs, it is corrected to the admissible value 8000 0001H
(-2 147 483 647).

2.4 Comparison functions, word

Comparison serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions, word from pages C-40 to C-49
< Less than x x x x x
<= Less than or equal x x x x x
<> Unequal x x x x x
=? Equal x x x x x
> Greater than x x x x x
>= Greater than or equal to x x x x x
VGL3P Comparator with 3-point response x
VGLEH Comparator with unilateral hysteresis x
VGLUH Comparator with asymmetrical hysteresis x

ABB Control Page C-40 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

< LESS THAN

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD Z1<
< LT Z2
Z1< ST Q
Z2 Q

PARAMETERS
Z1< WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Value to be compared
Z2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M, %S Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1< is compared to the value of the operand at
the input Z2.
If the value at Z1< is less than the one at Z2, the state 1 is allocated to the operand
at the output Q. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1< is equal to or greater than Z2.

Number range
Integer word (16 Bit)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

ABB Control Page C-41 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

<= LESS THAN OR EQUAL

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD Z1<==
<=<= LE Z2
Z1<= ST Q
Z2 Q

PARAMETERS
Z1<= WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Value to be compared
Z2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M, %S Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1<= is compared to the value of the operand
at the input Z2.
The state 1 is allocated to the operand at the output Q if the value at Z1<= is less
than or equal to the value at Z2. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1<= is greater than
Z2.

Number range
Integer word (16 Bit)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

<> UNEQUAL

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD Z1<>
<> NE Z2
Z1<> ST Q
Z2 Q

PARAMETERS
Z1<> WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Value to be compared
Z2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M, %S Result of the comparison

ABB Control Page C-42 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1<> is compared to the value of the operand
at the input Z2.
If the vaue at Z1<> is greater than or less than the one at Z2, the state 1 is allocated
to the operand at the output Q. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1<> is equal to Z2.

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

=? EQUAL

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD Z1=?
=? EQ Z2
Z1=? ST Q
Z2 Q

PARAMETERS
Z1=? WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Value to be compared
Z2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M, %S Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1=? is compared to the value of the operand
at the input Z2. If the value at Z1=? is equal to the one at Z2, the state 1 is allocated
to the operand at the output Q. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1=? is unequal to Z2.

Number range
Integer word (16 Bit)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

ABB Control Page C-43 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

> GREATER THAN

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD Z1>
> GT Z2
Z1> ST Q
Z2 Q

PARAMETERS
Z1> WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Value to be compared
Z2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M, %S Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1> is compared to the value of the operand at
the input Z2. If the value at Z1> is greater than the one at Z2, the state 1 is allocated
to the operand at the output Q. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1> is equal to or less
than Z2.

Number range
Integer word (16 Bit)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

>= GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD Z1>=
>== GE Z2
Z1>= ST Q
Z2 Q

PARAMETERS
Z1>= WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Value to be compared
Z2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M, %S Result of the comparison

ABB Control Page C-44 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1>= is compared to the value of the operand
at the input Z2. The state 1 is allocated to the operand at the output Q if the value at
Z1>= is greater than or equal to the value at Z2. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1>=
is less than Z2.

Number range
Integer word (16 Bit)
• low limit : 8000H (-32768)
• high limit : 7FFFH (+32767)

VGL3P COMPARATOR WITH 3-POINT RESPONSE

FBD IL

CAL VGL3P (E,OG,UG,E>OG,E<UG,Q)

VGL3P
E
OG
UG E>OG
E<UG
Q

PARAMETERS
E WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value
OG WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW High limit
UG WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Low limit
E>OG BINARY %O, %M Value > high limit
E<UG BINARY %O,%M Value < low limit
Q BINARY %O,%M Low limit < input limit value <
high

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E is compared to the values of the operands at
the inputs OG and UG.
The possible results are signalled at the outputs E>OG, E<UG and Q.

The following applies:

E < UG ---> E>OG = 0, E<UG = 1, Q = 0
UG < E < OG ---> E>OG = 0, E<UG = 0, Q = 1
E > OG ---> E>OG = 1, E<UG = 0, Q = 0

ABB Control Page C-45 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

E>OG = 0 E>OG = 0 E>OG = 1

E<UG = 1 E<UG = 0 E<UG = 0
Q =0 Q =1 Q =0

UG OG E

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• Low level : 8000H -32768
• High level : 7FFFH +32767

VGLEH COMPARATOR WITH UNILATERAL HYSTERESIS

FBD IL

CAL VGLEH (E1,E2,HYS,Q)

VGLEH
E1
E2
HYS Q

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value 1
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value 2
HYS WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Hysteresis
Q BINARY %O, %M Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The values of the operands at the inputs E1 and E2 are compared to each other.
Taking the hysteresis at the input HSY into account, the result is signalled at the
output Q.

The following applies :

E1 > E2 ---> Q = 1
E1 < E2 - HYS ---> Q = 0
E2 - HYS < E1 < E2 ---> Q as in the previous cycle

ABB Control Page C-46 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

HYS

0
E2-HYS E2 E1
HYS = Hysteresis

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• Low limit : 8001H -32767
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767
• Inadmissible value : 8000H ---

The following especially applies here to the specification for the left edge of the
hysteresis : E2 - HYS > -32 767 (8001H)

VGLUH COMPARATOR WITH ASYMMETRICAL HYSTERESIS

FBD IL

CAL VGLUH (E1,E2,OHYS,UHYS,Q)

VGLUH
E1
E2
OHYS
UHYS Q

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value 1
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value 2
OHYS WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW High hysteresis
UHYS WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Low hysteresis
Q BINARY %O, %M Output

DESCRIPTION
The values of the operands at the inputs E1 and E2 are compared to each other.
Taking the hystereses at the inputs OHYS (high hysteresis) and UHYS (low

ABB Control Page C-47 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

hysteresis) into account, the result is signalled at the output Q.

The following applies :

E1 < E2 - UHYS ---> Q = 0
E1 > E2 + OHYS ---> Q = 1
E2-UHYS < E1 < E2+OHYS ---> Q as in the previous cycle
Q

UHYS OHYS

0
E2-UHYS E2 E2+OHYS E1

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• Low limit : 8001H -32767
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767
• Inadmissible value : 8000H ---

The following especially applies here :

E1 > 8000H (-32768)
E2 - UHYS > 8001H (-32767)

ABB Control Page C-48 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

2.5 Arithmetic functions, word

Arithmetic serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions, word from pages C-49 to C-61
+ Addition x x x x x
- Subtraction x x x x x
* Multiplication x x x x x
DIV Division x x x x x
*: / MULDI Multiplication with division x x x x x
=W Allocation x x x x x
BETR Absolute value generator x x x x
COS1 Cosinus x
MUL2N Multiplication by 2 to the power of N x x x x
NEG Negation x x x x
SIN1 Sinus x
SQRT Square root x
ZUDKW Allocation direct constant to word x x x x
variable

+ ADDITION

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
+ ADD E2
E1 ST A1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Summand 1
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Summand 2; duplicable
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Total

DESCRIPTION
The values of the operands at the inputs are added and the result is allocated to the
operand at the output.

Number range
Integer Word (16 Bits)
• Low limit : 8000H -32768
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767

Note for serie 90 :

ABB Control Page C-49 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The output is limited to -32767.

The value -32768 is an inadmissible value for the input E1. If the value 8000H
(-32768) is present at E1, it is automatically corrected to the permissible value 8001H
(-32767) before processing.

- SUBTRACTION

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
- SUB E2
E1 ST A1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Minuend
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Subtrahend; duplicable
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result (difference)

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E2 is subtracted from the value of the operand
at the input E1 and the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.
The input E2 is capable of duplication (E2...En). If it is duplicated, all values of the
operands at the inputs E2...En are subtracted from the operand at the input E1.

Number range
Integer Word (16 Bits)
• Low limit : 8000H -32768
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767

Note for serie 90 :

The output is limited to -32767.
The value -32768 is an inadmissible value for the input E1. If the value 8000H
(-32768) is present at E1, it is automatically corrected to the permissible value 8001H
(-32767) before processing.

ABB Control Page C-50 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

* MULTIPLICATION

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
* MUL E2
E1 ST A1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Multiplicand
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Multiplier; duplicable
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result (Product)

DESCRIPTION
The values of the operands at the inputs of this connection element are multiplied by
each other and the result is allocated to the operand at the output.

Number range
Integer Word (16 Bits)
• Low limit : 8000H -32768
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767

Note for serie 90 : The output is limited to -32767.

DIV DIVISION

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
DIV DIV E2
E1 ST A1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Dividend
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Divisor
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result (quotient)

ABB Control Page C-51 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is divided by the value of the operand at the
input E2 and the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1. The following
applies if input E2 is duplicated : E1 : E2 : E3 ... : En = A1. The result of division is
always a whole number. Rounding (inclusion of the digits after the decimal point)
does not take place.

Number Range
Integer Word (16 Bits)
• Low limit : 8000H -32768
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767

Note for serie 90 : The output is limited to -32767.

*: MULTIPLICATION WITH DIVISION

FBD IL

CAL MULDI (Z1*,Z2:,Z3,A1)

*:
Z1*
Z2:
Z3 A1

PARAMETERS
Z1* WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Multiplicand
Z2: WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Multiplier
Z3 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Divisor
A1 WORD %MW,%OW Result

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1 is multiplied by the value of the operand at
the input Z2, the intermediate result is divided by the value of the operand at the
input Z3 and then the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

Internally, this function block operates with double word accuracy (32 bits) when
multiplying and dividing. Only when allocating the result to the output A1 is the value
limited to word accuracy (16 bits). The result is rounded up if the remainder of
division is > 0.5. If a number overflow occurs during division (e.?g. division by 0), the
limit value of the number range is allocated to the output A1 with the correct sign.

Number range
Integer Word (16 Bits)
• Low limit : 8000H -32768

ABB Control Page C-52 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

• High limit : 7FFFH +32767

Note for serie 90 :

The output is limited to -32767.
The value -32768 is an inadmissible value for the word inputs. If the value 8000H
(-32768) is present at an input, it is automatically corrected to the permissible value
8001H (-32767) before processing.

=W ALLOCATION

FBD IL (compatible with IEC 1131-3)

LD E1
=W ST A1
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Source
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Target

DESCRIPTION
This connection element allocates the value of the operand at the input E1 to the
operand at the output A1.

Number range
Integer word (16 bits).
• Low limit : -32768
• High limit : 32767

Note for serie 90 : If the value 8000H (-32768) is present at the input E1, the
permissible value 8001H (-32767) is allocated to the output A1.

BETR ABSOLUTE VALUE GENERATOR

ABB Control Page C-53 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL BETR (E1,A1)

BETR
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Absolute value of the input
value

DESCRIPTION
The absolute value of the word operand at the input E1 is generated and is allocated
to the operand at the output A1.

Number range
Integer Word (16 Bits)
• Low limit : 8000H -32768
• High limit : 7FFFH +32767

Note for serie 90 : The output is limited to -32767.

The value -32768 is an inadmissible value for the word inputs. If the value 8000H
(-32768) is present at the input E1, the maximum possible value 7FFFH (+32767) is
allocated to the output A1.

COS1 COSINE

FBD IL

CAL COS1 (ANG,AD,ERR)

COS1
ANG AD
ER

PARAMETERS
ANG WORD %IW, %MW, %OW Angle 0...3600 (0.0°....360.0°)
AD DOUBLE %MD Cosine of the input value
WORD
ERR BINARY %M, %O Error if ANG is out of range

ABB Control Page C-54 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The function block calculates the cosine of the value at the input ANG and assigns it
to the output AD.

The input value has to be in the following range : 0 ≤ ANG ≤ 3600

0000 -> 0°
0001 -> 0.1°
0010 -> 1.0°
...
3600 -> 360.0°
If the value at ANG is negative or greater than 3600 (360°), the output AD is set to 0
and the error output ERR is set to 1.
0 ≤ ANG ≤ 3600 => ERR = 0 and AD = cos (ANG)
ANG < 0 or ANG > 3600 => ERR = 1 and AD = 0

The result is within the range of -100 000 to +100 000.

Examples :
cos ( 0) = 100000
cos ( 450) = 70711
cos ( 900) = 0
cos (1800) = -100000
cos (2360) = -55919
cos (2700) = 0
cos (3600) = 100000

MUL2N MULTIPLICATION BY 2 TO THE POWER OF N

FBD IL

CAL MUL2N (E1,N,A1)

MUL2N
E1
N A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input operand
N WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Quantity
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is shifted bit-by-bit N times.

ABB Control Page C-55 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

If the value at the input N is positive, the value is shifted to the left. For each shift by
1 bit position, this corresponds to multiplication of the current value by 2.

If the value at the input N is negative, it is shifted to the right. For each shift by 1 bit
position, this corresponds to division of the current value by 2.

If N = 0, the value at the input E1 is passed directly to the output A1.

The result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

Meaningful range for N: -14 < N < +14

Sign of the value at the input E1:

The sign of the value E1 is not influenced by the shift operation. That is to say, the
sign of the output value is always identical with the sign of the input value.

Shift to the left (Multiplication):

When the value at the input is shifted to the left, the released bit 0 is filled with 0. The
sign bit (bit 15) is not changed because limiting to the limit of the number range takes
place beforehand.

Limiting of the value at the output A1 when shifting to the left:

• The following applies to positive values at the input E1:

If bit 14 has a “1” and if shift operations still have to be carried out on the basis of the
value at the input N, these are no longer executed. Instead, the output is set to the
limit of the positive number range. That is to say, the limit has been reached in any
case at the latest after 14 shifts.
Limit value: Output A1 = +32767 (7FFFH).

• The following applies to negative values at the input E1:

If bit 14 has a “0” and shift operations still have to be carried out because of the
value at the input N, these will no longer be executed. Instead, the output is set to
the limit of the negative number range. That is to say, the limit has been reached in
any case at the latest after 14 shifts.
Limit: Output A1 = -32767 (8001H)

Shift to the right (Division):

When shifting to the right, every bit moves to the right by one position. At the same
time, the sign bit (bit 15) always retains its value. The released bit (bit 14) is filled in
each case with the value of the sign bit.

Limiting of the value at the output when shifting to the right:

• The following applies to positive values at the input E1:

If now only bit 0 has a “1” and shift operations still have to be carried out because of
the value at the input N, the output will be set to the value 0. That is to say, the value
0 has been reached in any case at the latest after 14 shifts.
Output A1 = 0.

ABB Control Page C-56 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

• The following applies to negative values at the input E1:

If bit 0 ... bit 15 has a “1” as the result of the shift, the limit value (-1) has been
reached. Further shifts have no effect. That is to say, the value -1 has been reached
at the latest after 15 shifts.
Output A1 = -1 (FFFFH).

Examples:
1. Input value E1 = 5498 (157AH)
Exponent N = 2 -> 2 * Left shift

Bit 15 0
Input value
0.0.0.1 0.1.0.1 0.1.1.1 1.0.1.0 157AH before the left shift

Bit 15 0

55E8H Result after

0.1.0.1 0.1.0.1 1.1.1.0 1.0.0.0
(21992) 2 left shifts

2. Input value E1 = 32612 (7F64H)

Exponent N = -3 -> 3 * Right shift

Bit 15 0
7F64H Input value
(32612) 0.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 0.1.1.0 0.1.0.0
before the right shift

Bit 15 0
0FECH Result after
0.0.0.0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.0 1.1.0.0
(4076) 3 right shifts

3. Input value E1 = -32612 (8008H)

Exponent N = -3 -> 3 * Right shift

Bit 15 0
8008 H Input value
(-32760) 1.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 1.0.0.0
before the right shift

Bit 15 0
F001 H Result after
1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.1
(-4095) 3 right shifts

NEG NEGATION

ABB Control Page C-57 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CALL NEG(IN,Q)
NEG

IN Q

PARAMETERS
IN WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Word value
Q WORD %OW, %MW Negation

DESCRIPTION
The NEG fonction block allocates the negation of the variable at the input IN to the
output Q.

Number range
Integer word (16 bits)
• Low limit : 8000H - 32768
• High limit : 7FFFH + 32767

Note : if IN = -32768 then Q = +32767.

SIN1 SINE
FBD IL

CAL SIN1 (ANG,AD,ERR)

SIN1
ANG AD
ER

PARAMETERS
ANG WORD %IW, %MW, %OW Angle 0...3600 (0.0°....360.0°)
AD DOUBLE %MD Sine of the input value
WORD
ERR BINARY %M, %O Error if ANG is out of range

ABB Control Page C-58 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The function block calculates the sine of the value at the input ANG and assigns it to
the output AD.

The input value has to be in the following range : 0 ≤ ANG ≤ 3600

The result is within the range of -100.000 to +100.000.

Examples :
sin ( 0) = 0
sin ( 450) = 70711
sin ( 900) = 100000
sin (1800) = 0
sin (2360) = -82904
sin (2700) = -100000
sin (3600) = 0

SQRT SQARE ROOT

FBD IL

SQRT CAL SQRT (E,D/W,A,ERR)

E
D/W
A
ERR

PARAMETERS
E WORD, %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW, Input
DOUBLE %MD, %KD
WORD
D/W BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Format of the input/output
A WORD, %OW, %MW Square root of the input value
DOUBLE %MD, %KD
WORD
ERR BINARY %O, %M Error if the input value is
negative

ABB Control Page C-59 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The function block SQRT generates the square root of the value at the input E. The
result is available at the output A and is always rounded down to an integral number.

The value at the input E must be a positive number. If the value at the input is
negative, the value ’zero’ is output through the output A and the value ’1’ is output
through the ERR output. The ERR output indicates whether the value of the input
operand E is positive (> 0) or negative (< 0).
Input E > 0 -> ERR = 0 and A = square root
Input E < 0 -> ERR = 1 and A = 0

The input D/W defines the format of the input/output operand.

D/W = 0 -> WORD
D/W = 1 -> DOUBLE WORD

ZUDKW ALLOCATION DIRECT CONSTANT TO WORD VARIABLE

FBD IL

CAL ZUDKW (#W,V)

ZUDKW

#W V

PARAMETERS
#W DIRECT #, #H Numerical value which is to be
CONSTANT allocated to the word variable
at output V
V WORD %MW, %OW Word variable to which the
numerical value of input # is to
be allocated

DESCRIPTION
The function block serves to allocate a numerical value to a word variable. The
numerical value is specified as a direct constant.

#W DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

This numerical value is allocated to the word variable at output V.

V WORD
Word variable to which the numerical value of input #W is allocated.

ABB Control Page C-60 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

2.6 Logical functions, word

Logical serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions, word from pages C-61 to C-68
MASKE Mask x
SHIFT Shift block x
WAND AND combination, word x x x x
WOR OR combination, word x x x x
WXOR Exclusive OR combination, word x x x x

MASKE MASK
FBD IL

CAL MASKE (E1,MASK,ALLE,KEIN)

MASKE
E1
MASK
ALLE
KEIN

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input value
MASK WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Mask
ALLE BINARY %O, %M All bits agree
KEIN BINARY %O, %M No bit agrees

DESCRIPTION
The individual bits of the operand at the input E1 are compared to the bits of the
operand at the input MASK. The result of the comparison is signalled at the outputs
ALLE and KEIN.

If at least all bits, which are set on the operand at the input MASK, are set on the
operand at the input E1, the following applies to the outputs : ALLE = 1
KEIN = 0

If none of the bits, which are set on the operand at the input MASK, are set on the
operand at the input E1, the following applies to the outputs : ALLE = 0
KEIN = 1

If only some of the bits, which are set on the operand at the input MASK, are set on
the operand at the input E1, the following applies to the outputs : ALLE = 0
KEIN = 0

ABB Control Page C-61 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example

E1 : X1111XX11XXXX11X ALLE = 1
MASK : 0111100110000110 KEIN = 0

E1 : 00XXXXX0XXX0XXXX ALLE = 0
MASK : 1100000100010000 KEIN = 1

E1 : 1X1X1XXX10XXXX10 ALLE = 0
MASK : 0010100011000011 KEIN = 0

X: These bits may have any value (don't care)

SHIFT SHIFT BLOCK

FBD IL

CAL SHIFT (E,D/W,ANZ,LKS,ROT,ROTC,

SHIFT
SLOG,SARI,CY E,CY A,A)
E
D/W
ANZ
LKS
ROT
ROTC
SLOG
SARI
CY_E CY_A
A

PARAMETERS
E WORD, %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW, Operand to be shifted Word or
DOUBLE %KD, %MD double word
WORD
D/W BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Format selection (W or DW)
ANZ WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Number of bit positions to be
shifted
LKS BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Shift direction, left or right
ROT BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Shift-Art: ROTATE
ROTC BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Shift-Art: ROTATE by the
CARRY FLAG
SLOG BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S SHIFT type: LOGICAL SHIFT
SARI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S SHIFT type: ARITHMETIC
SHIFT
CY_E BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Initial value for the CARRY
FLAG in the case of shift type
ROTC
CY_A BINARY %O, %M Status of the CARRY FLAG
after the shift
A WORD, %OW, %MW, %MD Result of the shift
DOUBLE
WORD

ABB Control Page C-62 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block shifts the operand present at the input by a specified number of
bit positions to the left or right. The result of the shift and the CARRY flag are
available at the block’s outputs. The operand at the input remains unchanged.

The required shift type is planned at the inputs :

• ROT
• ROTC
• SLOG
• SARITH
If several shift types are specified simultaneously, the shift type located furthest to
the front in the sequence of the block’s inputs applies.

The block can shift both word and double word operands.

Important: In certain circumstances, the value 8000H or 8000 0000H forbidden for
arithmetic operations may be present at this block’s output.

E WORD/DOUBLE WORD
Operand to be shifted
The planned SHIFT operation is applied to the input operand, which is not changed.

D/W BINARY
Format selection for the input operand
D/W = 0 -> WORD
D/W = 1 -> DOUBLE WORD

ANZ WORD
Number of bit positions to be shifte. Meaningful range for the quantity n :
Word operands : 0 < n < 16
Double word operands : 0 < n < 32

LKS BINARY
Direction in which shifting takes place
LKS = 0 -> shift to right
LKS = 1 -> shift to left

ROT BINARY
Shift type: ROTATE
The bit position released by the shift is replaced by the bit shifted out. The contents
of the CARRY FLAG are additionally replaced by the bit shifted out. After the shift,
the result and the contents of the CARRY FLAG are available at the block’s outputs.

ROT to right :

MSB ..... ................ LSB C

ABB Control Page C-63 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

ROT to left :

C MSB ..... ................ LSB

LSB : Least significant bit

MSB : Most significant bit

ROTC BINARY
Shift type: ROTATE by the CARRY FLAG
The bit position released by the shift is replaced by the contents of the CARRY
FLAG. The CARRY FLAG is then replaced by the bit shifted out. After the shift, the
result and the contents of the CARRY FLAG are available at the block’s outputs.

ROTC to the right :

MSB ..... ................ LSB C

ROTC to the lef :

C MSB ..... ................ LSB

LSB : Least significant bit

MSB : Most significant bit

SLOG BINARY
Shift type: LOGICAL SHIFT
The bit position released by the shift is replaced by the value 0.
The contents of the CARRY FLAG are replaced by the bit shifted out.
After the shift, the result and the contents of the CARRY FLAG are available at the
block’s outputs.

SLOG to the right :

0 MSB ..... ................ LSB C

SLOG to the left :

C MSB ..... ................ LSB 0

LSB : Least significant bit

ABB Control Page C-64 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MSB : Most significant bit

SARI BINARY
Shift type: ARITHMETIC SHIFT

ARITHMETIC SHIFT to the right:

The bit position 15 (MSB, sign bit) released by the shift operation is replaced by
itself. The contents of the CARRY FLAG are replaced by the bit shifted out. After the
shift, the result and the contents of the CARRY FLAG are available at the block’s
outputs

ARITHMETIC SHIFT to the left (identical with SLOG left):

The bit position 0 released by the shift is replaced by the value 0. The contents of the
CARRY FLAG are replaced by the bit shifted out. After the shift, the result and the
contents of the CARRY FLAG are available at the block’s outputs.

SARI to the right :

MSB ..... ................ LSB C

SARI to the left : (Identical with SLOG to the left)

C MSB ..... ................ LSB 0

LSB : Least significant bit

MSB : Most significant bit

CY_E BINARY
Initial value for the CARRY FLAG with shift type ROTC. For the shift type “ROTATE
by the CARRY FLAG”, an initial value is needed for the CARRY FLAG. This initial
value is specified at the CY_E input.

CY_A BINARY
State of the CARRY FLAG after the shift. After the shift, the current value of the
CARRY FLAG is available at this output.

A WORD/DOUBLE WORD
Result of the shift. After the shift, the result is available at this output.

WAND AND COMBINATION, WORD

ABB Control Page C-65 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL WAND (E1,E2,A1)

WAND
E1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Operand 1
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Operand 2
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result of the AND
combination

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates the bit-by-bit AND combination of the operands
present at the inputs E1 and E2. The result is allocated to the operand at the output
A1.

Example :
E1 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0

E2 1.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1

A1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0

ABB Control Page C-66 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

WOR OR COMBINATION, WORD

FBD IL

CAL WOR (E1,E2,A1)

WOR
E1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Operand 1
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Operand 2
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result of the OR
combination

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates the bit-by-bit OR combination of the operands present
at the inputs E1 and E2. The result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

Example :
E1 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0

E2 1.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1

A1 1.0.0.1 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1

WXOR EXCLUSIVE OR COMBINATION, WORD

FBD IL

CAL WXOR (E1,E2,A1)

WXOR
E1
E2 A1

ABB Control Page C-67 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Operand 1
E2 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Operand 2
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Result of the XOR combination

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates the bit-by-bit XOR combination of the operands
present at the inputs E1 and E2. The result is allocated to the operand at the output
A1.

Example :
E1 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0

E2 1.0.0.1 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1

A1 1.0.0.1 0.0.1.1 0.0.0.0 1.0.0.1

3 Program control functions

Program control serie Ctler 40 50 90 30
functions from pages C-68 to C-83
=PE Conditional program end x x x x
ABORT Program abort x
CAL_FB Subroutine call x
CALLUP Subroutine call for an assembler x
program
DI Read direct input x x
DIN Read direct inputs x
DO Write direct output x x
DOUT Write direct outputs x
IOCON Input/output configuration x
LZB Run number block x
VTASK Interrupt task validation x x

ABB Control Page C-68 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

=PE CONDITIONAL PROGRAM END

FBD IL

LD BED
=PE ST PE
BED

PARAMETERS
BED BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Condition for program end

DESCRIPTION
Depending on the status of the operand at the input BED, processing of the PLC
program is ended or is not ended here. :
BED = 0 : The PLC program is processed up to the end.
BED = 1 : The PLC program is processed only up to this point. The subsequent
part of the PLC program is not processed.

ABORT PROGRAM ABORT

FBD IL

CAL ABORT (FREI)

ABORT
FREI

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K Block enable

DESCRIPTION
The function block serves to abort a PLC program. All outputs are set to 0 if the PLC
program is aborted.

The block can be used in particular for aborting the PLC program if a specific error of
error class 3 occurs.

The function block is activated by a 1 signal at its enable input FREI.

If a 0 signal is applied to the enable input, the function block has no effect.
The following thus applies :
FREI = 0 : --> the block has no effect

ABB Control Page C-69 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FREI = 1 : --> the block aborts the program

CAL_FB SUBROUTINE CALL

FBD IL

CAL CAL_FB (NAME,EN)

NAME

PARAMETERS
NAME TXT Subroutine name
EN BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Call of the subroutine

DESCRIPTION
The CAL_FB function validates the execution of a subroutine whose name is
specified in NAME variable

In function block diagram, the block has the name of the subroutine.
In instruction list, the function is CAL_FB with NAME and EN as parameters.

CALLUP SUBROUTINE CALL FOR AN ASSEMBLER PROGRAM

FBD IL

CAL CALLUP (FREI, #OFF,

CALLUP #SEG, #VGW, #VAR,E)
FREI
#OFF
#SEG
#VGW
#VAR
E

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Block enable
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the
CONSTANT subroutine
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT subroutine
#VGW DIRECT #, #H Number of historical values of
CONSTANT the subroutine
#VAR DIRECT #, #H Number of input/output

ABB Control Page C-70 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONSTANT variables of the subroutine

E X %I, %M, %O, %K, %S, As an input variable;
%IW, %MW, %OW, %KW,
%MD, %KD
%M, %O, %MW, %OW As an output variable capable
%MD of duplication

DESCRIPTION
The function block calls a subroutine stored on the PLC in INTEL machine code. The
machine code must be compatible with the processor of the relevant PLC.

After processing of the subroutine, the program branches back to the block. Before
the subroutine is called, all registers are automatically saved and restored after the
return.

FREI BINARY
Enable function block processing
FREI = 0 : Block is not processed
FREI = 1 : Block is processed

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT
The start address of the assembler subroutine is specified at these two inputs. The
start address consists of an offset and a segment address. The offset and segment
addresses are specified as direct constants.

If the value “0” is specified as the segment address, the block expects the subroutine
to have been stored in the user program memory. The offset address then
represents the byte spacing between start of user program and start of subroutine.
The subroutine is automatically saved as well when saving the PLC program on
EPROM or flash EPROM.

#VGW DIRECT CONSTANT

The number of historical values used in the subroutine is specified at the input
#VGW. This is specified as a direct constant.

#VAR DIRECT CONSTANT

The total number of input and output variables of the subroutine is specified at the
input #VAR. Therefore, this is the total of all E1...En and A1...An. This is specified as
a direct constant.

E BINARY, WORD, DOUBLE WORD

The input E is capable of duplication (E1...Em).
The input variables for the subroutine are specified at the inputs E1...Em. The
subroutine performs “reading” access to these variables. When the subroutine
accesses these variables, the assembler programmer must pay attention to the
defined data format. Direct constants (value transfer) are not allowed at the inputs
E1...Em.

ABB Control Page C-71 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The output variables for the subroutine are specified at the outputs Em+1...En. The
subroutine performs “writing” access to these variables, i.e. values calculated in the
subroutine are provided to the main program with the aid of the output variables
Em+1...En. The assembler programmer must pay attention to the defined data
format when accessing these variables.

Application notes
Store subroutine
The best possibility to store the subroutine is to store it in the user program memory
(after PE). The subroutine can be loaded e. g. with a HEX file loader or the PLC
monitor.
If the value “0” is specified as the segment address, the block expects the subroutine
to have been stored in the user program memory. The offset address then
represents the byte spacing between start of user program and start of subroutine.
The subroutine is automatically saved as well when saving the PLC program on
EPROM or flash EPROM.

Loading the subroutine

The subroutine can be loaded into the PLC via the serial interface COM2 with
monitor command “Read INTEL-HEX-FILE”. (See Description of the monitor
functions, command “R”). This can be done only in connection with PLCs which have
two serial interfaces (e. g. 07 KT 92).

Subroutine creation
1. Register
When creating the subroutine, use can be made of the following registers to suit
requirements :

AX, BX, CX, DX, BP

The following registers are intended for access to variables :

DS, ES, DI, SI

However, these registers can also be changed because they are corrected again
after execution of the subroutine in the CALLUP block.

2. Start address
Subroutine’s start address must be specified at the #OFF and #SEG inputs in the
call of the block. The offset and segment are each specified as direct constants.

3. Access to input and output variables

Access to the variables is by way of the pointers ES:SI and DS:BX.
When the subroutine is entered, the pointer to the address of the first variable in the
call of the block is located in (ES:SI) and the pointer to the address of the second
variable is located in (ES:SI+2) etc. Access to the contents of these variables is then
by means of DS:BX

Example 1 :

ABB Control Page C-72 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The values of the first two word variables in the block call are to be fetched to the
registers AX and CX.
MOV BX,ES:[SI] ;Fetch address for 1st variable and store in BX
MOV AX,DS:[BX] ;fetch value to AX
MOV BX,ES:[SI+2] ;fetch address for second variable and store in BX
MOV CX,DS:[BX] ;fetch value to CX

Example 2 :
The value of the first two binary variables in the call of the block are to be fetched to
the registers AL and CL.
MOV BX,ES:[SI] ;Fetch address for 1st variable and store in BX
MOV AL,DS:[BX] ;Fetch value to AL
MOV BX,ES:[SI+2] ;Fetch address for second variable and store in BX
MOV CL,DS:[BX] ;Fetch value to CL
Binary variables occupy a whole byte. This byte may only have 0 or 1 as its contents.

4. Access to historical values/RAM

If RAM space is needed in the subroutine for intermediate values, use can be made
of the historical values memory.

The intermediate values are retained and are again available in the next program
cycle for further processing. For each call of the subroutine, its own memory
locations are available in the historical values memory. If a subroutine is called three
times, for instance, in total 3 times as many historical values are occupied in the
historical values memory as are specified in the call. The number of memory words
used (1 word = 16 bits) in the historical values memory must be specified as a direct
constant in the call of the block. If too many historical values are occupied, the PLC
issues an error message when the command PA (program editing) is used or when
the program is started.

The historical values are addressed by way of the pointers DS:DI

In doing so, DS:DI points to the first available historical value when entering the
subroutine.

Example :
The value fetched to register AX in point 3. is to be compared to the first word in the
historical values memory.
CMP AX,DS :[DI] ;Compare value to historical value

5. The stack has a depth of 40 words. In this way, up to 40 PUSH commands can be
executed successively.

6. Return from the subroutine

The return is achieved by means of RET FAR (8086 machine code : CB). RET FAR
is generated by the 8086 assembler by virtue of the fact that the subroutine is
declared as PROC FAR.

ABB Control Page C-73 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CALLUP CAL CALLUP (%K00,01,#H7400,

%K 00,01 FREI #H0000, #0, #2, %MW00,00,
#H 7400 #OFF %OW02,00)
#H 0000 #SEG
#0 #VGW
#2 #VAR
%MW 00,00
%OW02.00

In a subroutine, the contents of the flag word %MW 01,00 are to be incremented and
the contents of the flag word %MW 02,00 are to be decremented.

Subroutine

TEST PROC FAR

MOV BX,ES:[SI] ;address of %MW 01,00 to BX

MOV AX,DS:[BX] ;load value from %MW 01,00 to register AX
INC AX ;increment value
MOV DS:[BX],AX ;again write value back to %MW 01,00
MOV BX,ES:[SI+2] ;address of %MW 02,00 to BX
MOV AX,DS:[BX] ;load value from %MW 02,00 to register AX
DEC AX ;decrement value
MOV DS:[BX],AX ;again write value back to %MW 02,00
RET
TEST ENDP

The subroutine is stored in the program memory 2. In case of this example the
distance between the start of the subroutine and the start of the user program memory
amounts to 7400H byte. It must be enable for execution (%K00,01=1). No historical
values are needed and 2 variables are used.

DI READ DIRECT INPUT

FBD IL

CAL DI (ENA,IN)
DI
ENA
IN

PARAMETERS
ENA BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S enable input
IN BINARY %I Input to be updated

DESCRIPTION
This function can only be used with serie 40 & 50 central units.
The function block DI reads ONE direct input of the central unit and its extensions.
The direct input to be read is specified at the input IN.

ABB Control Page C-74 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The function block is useful : if the cycle time is long

if the capacity utilization of the central unit is high

The PLC processor automatically builds an updated process image of the inputs at
the start of each program cycle. The DI function block is able to get the physical input
value specified at the input IN within a program cycle. This may be required in
conjunction with specific applications, in order to detect and process the input signal
changes more than once per program cycle.

- If the input to be read is on the central unit :

the new input value can be read instantaneously.

- If the input to be read is on an extension unit :

the DI function reads the present input value and generates at the same time a
refreshment of the extension bus. The DI function block is usefull if it is used in a
time interruption knowing that the present input value read in one interruption is the
input value refreshed by the DI function of the previous interruption.

- Remote inputs are refreshed every cycle time. The DI function block can not be
used for remote units.

DIN READ DIRECT INPUTS

FBD IL

DIN CAL DIN

DESCRIPTION
This function can only be used with serie 90 central units.
With the help of the CS31 bus processor, the function block DIN reads all of the
direct inputs of the PLC processor. The direct inputs are the inputs which are directly
available at the terminals of the PLC processor.

The function block is useful : with stand-alone PLC processors

if the cycle time is long
if the capacity utilization of the PLC is high

The PLC processor automatically builds an updated process image of the direct
inputs at the start of each program cycle. The DIN function block is able to create
additional updates of the process image of the direct inputs within program cycles.
This may be required in conjunction with specific applications, in order to detect and
process signal changes of the direct inputs more than once per program cycle.

If the DIN and DOUT function blocks are used, the terminal–to–terminal reaction
time between direct inputs and direct outputs can be reduced.

ABB Control Page C-75 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example :
- Cycle time : 80 ms
- Capacity utilization : 95%
- 3 DIN + 3 DOUT blocks distributed regularly over the PLC program (i.e. after 20
ms, 40 ms and 60 ms)
In this example, the direct inputs of the PLC processor are read every 20 ms. The
updated values of the direct outputs are provided with the same frequency. See the
figure below for illustration.

Cycle time: 80 ms, capacity utilization: 95%

Read inputs Write outputs

D D D D D D
O I O I O I
U N U N U N P
T T T E

0 ms 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms

DO WRITE DIRECT OUTPUT

FBD IL

CAL DO (ENA,OUT)
DO

ENA OUT

PARAMETERS
ENA BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S enable input
OUT BINARY %O Output to be updated

DESCRIPTION
This function can only be used with serie 40 & 50 central units.
The function block DO writes ONE direct output of the central unit or its extension.
The direct output to be written is specified at the output OUT.

The function block is useful if the cycle time is long

if the capacity utilization of the central unit is high

The PLC processor automatically outputs a process image of the direct outputs,
which was updated during the program cycle, at the end of each program cycle. The

ABB Control Page C-76 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DO function block is able to set the physical output specified at the OUT parameter
within program cycles. This may be required in conjunction with specific applications,
in order to have available the output signal changes more than once per program
cycle.

- If the output to be written is on the central unit :

the new output value can be write instantaneously.

- If the output to be written is on an extension unit :

the new output value can be write with a delay of max 2 ms.

- Remote outputs are refreshed every cycle time. The DO function block can not be
used for remote outputs.

DOUT WRITE DIRECT OUTPUTS

FBD IL

DOUT CAL DOUT

DESCRIPTION
This function can only be used with serie 90 central units.
With the help of the CS31 bus processor, the function block DOUT writes all of the
direct outputs of the PLC processor. The direct outputs are the outputs which are
directly available at the terminals of the PLC processor.

The function block is useful : with stand-alone PLC processors

if the cycle time is long
if the capacity utilization of the PLC is high

The PLC processor automatically outputs a process image of the direct outputs,
which was updated during the program cycle, at the end of each program cycle. The
DOUT function block is able to output additional updates of the process image of the
direct outputs within program cycles. This may be required in conjunction with
specific applications, in order to have available signal changes of the direct outputs
more than once per program cycle.

If the DIN and DOUT function blocks are used, the terminal–to–terminal reaction
time between direct inputs and direct outputs can be reduced.

Example :
- Cycle time : 80 ms
- Capacity utilization : 95%
- 3 DIN + 3 DOUT blocks distributed regularly over the PLC program (i.e. after 20
ms, 40 ms and 60 ms)

ABB Control Page C-77 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

In this example, the direct inputs of the PLC processor are read every 20 ms. The
updated values of the direct outputs are provided with the same frequency. See the
figure below for illustration.

Cycle time: 80 ms, capacity utilization: 95%

Read inputs Write outputs

D D D D D D
O I O I O I
U N U N U N P
T T T E

0 ms 20 ms 40 ms 60 ms 80 ms

IOCON INPUT/OUTPUT CONFIGURATION

FBD IL

IOCON CAL IOCON (BASE,#OFF,#ANZ)

BASE
#OFF
#ANZ

PARAMETERS
BASE BINARY %I, %O Base of input or output
identifier
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset of the desired group
CONSTANT number (related to BASE)
#ANZ DIRECT #, #H Number of channels to be
CONSTANT configured

DESCRIPTION
The PLC processor only operates those binary inputs and outputs whose identifier
are explicitly configured in the PLC program.

The IOCON function block can enable a defined range of binary inputs or outputs for
operation, whose identifier do not exist in the PLC program. Normally, those inputs
and outputs are not processed automatically. This enable function is, for instance,
required, when binary inputs are to be read with the IDLB function block or binary
outputs are to be written with the IDSB function block, respectively.

The input or output range is specified at the function block. The range is configured
at the program start in conjunction with the program preparation. The IOCON block

ABB Control Page C-78 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

has no function within the program cycle itself.

BASE BINARY
The identifier of a binary input or output is given at the input BASE. This identifier is
the base which #OFF and #ANZ relate to.

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT

Range of values : #OFF > 0
At the input #OFF, it is specified where the input or output range, which is to be
operated additionally, starts.
The beginning of the additionally configured range is as follows :
The value specified at the input #OFF is added to the group number of the
configured input or output identifier, which is given at the input BASE. The new input
or output identifier, calculated in this way, marks the beginning of the input or output
range which is to be configured additionally.

The beginning of the range is calculated as follows :

GroupNo._beginning_of_range = GroupNo._BASE + #OFF
Channel_number_beginning_of_range = Channel_number_BASE
where : GroupNo._beginning_of_range : first group number of the range
Channel_number_beginning_of_range : first channel number of the
range
#OFF : value at the input #OFF
GroupNo._BASE : group number of the identifier at BASE
Channel_number_BASE : channel number of the identifier at BASE

Example :
- Input BASE : %O 01,04, i.e. group number = 01 and channel number = 04
- Input #OFF : 3, i.e. the range to be configured starts with : %O (01+3),04 = %O
04,04

#ANZ DIRECTE CONSTANT

Range of values : #ANZ > 1
The input #ANZ specifies the number of input or output channels to be configured in
the additional range.

The end of the range is calculated as follows :

Equation : (#ANZ-1 + channel_number_BASE) :16 = DG,
Remainder = channel_number_of_end_of_range

GroupNo_end_of_range = GroupNo._beginning_of_range + DG
where : GroupNo_end_of_range : last group number of the range
Channel_number_of_end_of_range : last channel number of the range
GroupNo_beginning_of_range : first group number of the range
Channel_number_BASE : channel number of the identifier at BASE

Example :
Configured : BASE : %O 01,04
#OFF : 3
#ANZ : 32

ABB Control Page C-79 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

It follows : Beginning of range : %O (01+3),04 = %O 04,04

End of range : Equation : (32 -1 + 4) :16 = 2, Remainder 3
--> %O (04+2),03 = %O 06,03
Range : %O 04,04 ... %O 06,03

FBD IL

IOCON CAL IOCON (% O01,04,#3,#32)

% O 01,04 BASE
#3 #OFF
#32 #ANZ

The out put s % O 04,04 ... % O 06,03 are out put , even if t heir
names are not configured in the PLC

ABB Control Page C-80 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

%O 00,00 %O 00,00

%O 01,00 %O 01,00
%O 01,01 %O 01,01
%O 01,02 %O 01,02
%O 01,03 BASE = %O 01,04 %O 01,03
%O 01,04 %O 01,04
%O 01,05 %O 01,05

%O 02,00 %O 02,00

#OFF = 3
%O 03,00 %O 03,00

%O 04,00 %O 04,00
%O 04,01
%O 04,02
Beginning of range = %O 04,04 %O 04,03
%O 04,04

%O 05,00 %O 05,00
#ANZ = 32

%O 06,00 %O 06,00
%O 06,01 %O 06,01
%O 06,02 %O 06,02
%O 06,03 %O 06,03
%O 06,04 End of range = %O 06,03 %O 06,04

LZB RUN NUMBER BLOCK

FBD IL

!BA 0
LZB LZB
E1 E1
MA NR
JMP
#0
#0
#0

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Run number

ABB Control Page C-81 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

JMP SPECIAL Target label

DESCRIPTION
This function block controls processing of a program part. This program part is called
run number block and begins with the function block LZB and ends with the affiliated
target label This program part is processed as follows depending on the value of the
operand at the input E1 :
E1 = 0 : Program part is not processed
E1 = 1 : Program part is processed during every cycle
E1 = 2 : Program part is processed during every second cycle
E1 = n : Program part is processed during every nth cycle

FBD
Designation of the target label : JUMP label
The output JMP has to be connected to a jump label

IL
Designation of the target label : MA No.
Where : MA Key word
0 < Nr < 999 Number of the label

The PLC automatically calculates :

• The number of historical values to be skipped
• The address of the target label
• The pointer to the own historical value
The PLC enters the 3 computed values in the intended positions of the LZB block.
When planned in IL, the user can basically fill these 3 program words with any
contents. However, it is suggested to enter here the numerical value 0.

Caution : The 3 program words should not be written with NOPs because these are
removed when optimizing the user program.

FBD/LD IL

!BA 0
LZB LZB
%MW 01,00 %MW 01,00
JMP Label MA 10
#0
. #0
.
. #0
. .
.
.
.
Label : MA 10

ABB Control Page C-82 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

VTASK INTERRUPTION TASK VALIDATION

FBD IL

CAL VTASK (NAME,EN)

NAME

PARAMETERS
NAME TXT Interruption name
EN BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Interruption validation

DESCRIPTION
The VTASK function validates the execution of an interruption whose name is
specified in NAME variable

In function block diagram, the block has the name of the interruption.
In instruction list, the function is VTASK with NAME and EN as parameters.

4 CS31 functions
CS31 functions serie Ctler 40 50 90 30
from pages C-83 to C-114
CONFIO1 1 analog channel configuration x x
CONFIO4 4 analog channels configuration x x
CONFIO8 8 analog channels configuration x x
CS31CO Configure CS31 module x x x
CS31QU Acknowledge CS31 error x x x
MT_CS31 data sent by CS31 master x x x
MR_CS31 data received by CS31 master x x x
ST_CS31 data sent by CS31 slave x x x
SR_CS31 data received by CS31 slave x x x

ABB Control Page C-83 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONFIO1 1 ANALOG CHANNEL CONFIGURATION

FBD IL

CAL CONFIO1(ENA, CHAN0, TYPE0, DOT0,

CONFIO1
OFFS0, MULT0, FILT0, RDY, ERR)
ENA
CHAN0
TYPE0
DOT0
OFFS0
MULT0 RDY
FILT0 ERR

DESCRIPTION
The function block CONFIO1 is used to
-configure the type (voltage, current or PT100/Pt1000) of one analog channel
on the AC31 extensions.
-change the filtering time of the analog input
-change the scale of the display value.
-lock or unlock the configuration for all analog channels of one analog
extension.

The analog channel configuration is set through the function block instead of
the pushbutton on the front plate of the analog extension.
The configuration is stored in an internal EEPROM in the analog extension.

The scale of the display value is set according to the formula

Display value = word value * MULT0/ 32767 + OFFS0

ABB Control Page C-84 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The latest configured channel number of one analog extension is displayed

ENA Binary
The function block is processed when ENA is on the rising edge 0->1

CHAN0 Word
The analog channel to be configured is directly set
For example, %IW00.00 for the analog input 0 on the analog extension at the
address 0, %OW65.01 for the analog output 1 on the analog extension at the
address 65

TYPE0 Word
Type of analog signal:
0 : the channel is set to +/- 10 V
1 : the channel is set to 0-20mA
2 : the channel is set to 4-20mA
3 : the channel is set to Pt100
4 : the channel is set to Pt1000
5 : the channel is set to Pt100 3 wires
6 : the channel is set to Pt1000 3 wires
14 : unlock the configuration through the pushbutton on the analog extension
front plate at the address xx when CHAN0 is %Iwxx.yy or %Owxx.yy
15 : lock the configuration through the pushbutton on the analog extension
front plate at the address xx when CHAN0 is %Iwxx.yy or %Owxx.yy

The configuration is automatically unlocked after a power supply ON

DOT0 Word

Position of the dot on the display

DOT0=0 4 digits are displayed without dot

Example :value =1234 display value is 1234
DOT0=1 4 digits are displayed with dot on position 1
Example :value =1234 display value is 123.4
DOT0= 2 4 digits are displayed with dot on position 2
Example: value =1234 display value is 12.34
DOT0= 3 4 digits are displayed with dot on position 3
Example: value =1234 display value is 1.234

If DOT0 <0 or DOT0>3, the bit ERR is 1 and the function is not processed

OFFS0 Word
Value of the offset
-32767 <= OFFS0 <= 32767

MULT0 Word
Value of the multiplication

ABB Control Page C-85 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

-32767 <= OFFS0 <= 32767

If MULT0 =0, the parameters OFFS0 and DOT0 are not used.
In this case, the scale is set to the factory setting scale.
The parameter MULT0=0 can be used to set a channel value to the display

FILT0 Word

Filtering time: not used in the analog extension

RDY Binary
This bit is set to 0 during the function processing

ERR Binary
This bit is set to 1 during one cycle (the bit RDY is set to 1 in the same time)
An error is detected if:
-one parameter value is wrong
-the analog channel doesn’t exist
-communication problem between central unit and analog extension

Note: One historical value is used by the function CONFIO1

ABB Control Page C-86 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONFIO4 4 ANALOG CHANNELS CONFIGURATION

FBD IL

CAL CONFIO4(ENA, CHAN0, TYPE0, DOT0,

CONFIO4
OFFS0, MULT0, FILT0,…,FILT3, RDY, ERR)
ENA
CHAN0
TYPE0
DOT0
OFFS0
MULT0
FILT0

MULT3 RDY
FILT3 ERR

PARAMETERS
ENA BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S,%K Enable block processing
CHAN0 WORD %IW, %OW Channel identification
TYPE0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Type of analog channel
DOT0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Position of the dot of the display value
OFFS0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Value of the offset for the display value
MULT0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Value of the multiplication for the display
value
FILT0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Filtering time
CHAN1 WORD %IW, %OW Channel identification
TYPE1 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Type of analog channel
….. …. …. …..
MULT3 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Value of the multiplication for the display
value
FILT3 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Filtering time
RDY BINARY %O, %M Processing of the configuration is
completed
ERR BINARY %O, %M An error is detected

DESCRIPTION
The function block CONFIO4 is used to
-configure the type (voltage, current or PT100/Pt1000) of four analog channels
on the AC31 extensions. The 4 channels can be located on different extensions.
-change the filtering time of the analog input
-change the scale of the display value.

ABB Control Page C-87 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

-lock or unlock the configuration for all analog channels of one analog
extension.

The scale of the display value is set according to the formula

Display value = word value * MULT0/ 32767 + OFFS0

The latest configured channel number of one analog extension is displayed

ENA Binary
The function block is processed when ENA is on the rising edge 0->1

The configuration is automatically unlocked after a power supply ON

DOT0 Word

Position of the dot on the display

DOT0=0 4 digits are displayed without dot

ABB Control Page C-88 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example: value =1234 display value is 1.234

If DOT0 <0 or DOT0>3, the bit ERR is 1 and the function is not processed

OFFS0 Word
Value of the offset
-32767 <= OFFS0 <= 32767

MULT0 Word
Value of the multiplication
-32767 <= OFFS0 <= 32767
If MULT0 =0, the parameters OFFS0 and DOT0 are not used.
In this case, the scale is set to the factory setting scale.
The parameter MULT0=0 can be used to set a channel value to the display

FILT0 Word

Filtering time: not used in the analog extension

CHAN1 Word

The analog channel to be configured is directly set

For example, %IW00.00 for the analog input 0 on the analog extension at the
address 0, %OW65.01 for the analog output 1 on the analog extension at the
address 65. The channel can be located on a other extension.
For example %IW00.00 on CHAN0 and %OW02.01 on CHAN1

….

RDY Binary
This bit is set to 0 during the function processing

Note: One historical value is used by the function CONFIO4

ABB Control Page C-89 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONFIO8 8 ANALOG CHANNELS CONFIGURATION

FBD IL

CAL CONFIO4(ENA, CHAN0, TYPE0, DOT0,

CONFIO8
OFFS0, MULT0, FILT0,…,FILT7, RDY, ERR)
ENA
CHAN0
TYPE0
DOT0
OFFS0
MULT0
FILT0

MULT7 RDY
FILT7 ERR

PARAMETERS
ENA BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S,%K Enable block processing
CHAN0 WORD %IW, %OW Channel identification
TYPE0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Type of analog channel
DOT0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Position of the dot of the display value
OFFS0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Value of the offset for the display value
MULT0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Value of the multiplication for the display
value
FILT0 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Filtering time
CHAN1 WORD %IW, %OW Channel identification
TYPE1 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Type of analog channel
….. …. …. …..
MULT7 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Value of the multiplication for the display
value
FILT7 WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Filtering time
RDY BINARY %O, %M Processing of the configuration is
completed
ERR BINARY %O, %M An error is detected

DESCRIPTION
The function block CONFIO8 is used to
-configure the type (voltage, current or PT100/Pt1000) of eight analog
channels on the AC31 extensions. The 8 channels can be located on different
extensions.
-change the filtering time of the analog input
-change the scale of the display value.

ABB Control Page C-90 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

-lock or unlock the configuration for all analog channels of one analog
extension.

The scale of the display value is set according to the formula

Display value = word value * MULT0/ 32767 + OFFS0

The latest configured channel number of one analog extension is displayed

ENA Binary
The function block is processed when ENA is on the rising edge 0->1

The configuration is automatically unlocked after a power supply ON

DOT0 Word

Position of the dot on the display

DOT0=0 4 digits are displayed without dot

ABB Control Page C-91 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example: value =1234 display value is 1.234

If DOT0 <0 or DOT0>3, the bit ERR is 1 and the function is not processed

OFFS0 Word
Value of the offset
-32767 <= OFFS0 <= 32767

FILT0 Word

Filtering time: not used in the analog extension

CHAN1 Word

The analog channel to be configured is directly set

….

RDY Binary
This bit is set to 0 during the function processing

Note: One historical value is used by the function CONFIO8

ABB Control Page C-92 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CS31CO CONFIGURE CS31 MODULES

FBD IL

CAL CS31CO (FREI,GRN,CODE,D1,D2,D3,D4,D5,D6,D7,

CS31CO
RDY,OK,ERR,A1,A2,A3,A4,A5,A6,A7)
FREI RDY
GRN OK
CODE ERR
D1 A1
D2 A2
D3 A3
D4 A4
D5 A5
D6 A6
D7 A7
D8

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S Enable (0->1 edge) for processing the
block
GRN WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Group number of the remote module to
which the job refers
CODE WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Identification of the job to be performed
D1 WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW 1st parameter of the job
D8 WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW 8th parameter of the job
RDY BINARY %O, %M Processing of the job is completed
OK BINARY %O, %M It has been possible to process the job
correctly
ERR WORD %OW, %MW Error message/status message
A1 WORD %OW, %MW 1st parameter of the response
A7 WORD %OW, %MW 7th Parameter of the response

DESCRIPTION
The function block serves to configure the CS31 remote modules. The block can
both send configuration parameters to the remote modules and also scan their
currently set configuration.
Apart from configuration of the CS31 remote modules, the function block can also
process further jobs (see List of jobs).

Enable for processing a job once is triggered by a 0->1 edge at input FREI. The
required job identification is specified at input CODE. The parameters required for
the job are planned at inputs D1...D8. Status messages are signalled at outputs
RDY, OK and ERR. The response data of the job are available at outputs A1...A7.
It may take several PLC cycles to process the job.

ABB Control Page C-93 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FREI BINARY
Processing of the block is controlled via input FREI.
FREI = 0 : All block outputs are set to value “0”. However, this is not
valid, if a job is currently being processed, i. e. processing of
a job which is currently being processed, is not influenced by
FREI = 0.
FREI = 01 edge : Processing of the job is enabled. Input FREI is no longer
evaluated during processing of the job.
FREI = 1 : Block is not processed, i. e. it no longer changes its outputs.
However, this is not valid, if a job is currently being
processed.

GRN WORD
Group number with which the remote module is addressed by the PLC program.
Range : 0...63
Example : On binary input %I 12,08, “12” is the group number and “08” is the
channel number.

CODE WORD
The identification of the job to be executed is specified at input CODE. (See List of
jobs on next page).

D1...D8 WORD
The parameters required for the job are preset at inputs D1...D8. The number of
parameters is dependent upon the job to be executed. There are also jobs requiring
no parameters (see List of jobs on next page).

RDY BINARY
Output RDY signals that processing of the job currently being processed is
completed. Output RDY does not indicate whether processing of the job has been
successful or not. Output RDY has therefore always to be considered together with
output OK.
RDY = 1 and OK = 1 : Processing of the job is completed without errors. A new job
can be started with a 0->1 edge at the input FREI.
RDY = 1 and OK = 0 : During processing of the job an error has been detected. The
corresponding error identification is present at the ERR
output. A new job can be started with a 0->1 edge at
the input FREI.
RDY = 0 : Processing of an enabled job has not yet been completed
(job is still being processed) or the output RDY has been
reset with FREI = 0.

OK BINARY
Output OK signals whether the job has been handled successfully or whether an
error has been detected during processing. In the event of an error, an error number
is indicated at output ERR. Output OK is not valid until the job has been completed,
i.e. when RDY = 1.
The following applies :
If RDY = 1 and OK = 1 : Job has been processed successfully
OK = 0 : An error has been detected during processing of the

ABB Control Page C-94 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

job.

ERR WORD
Status and error identifications are output at output ERR. The status identifications
are output during processing of a job in order to signal in what stage of processing
the job currently is. After enabling a job, status identifications are signalled only for
as long as RDY = 0.
The error identifications are output after completion of the job processing if an error
has occurred. Error identifications are thus not signalled until RDY = 1 and OK = 0.

Error identifications
ERR = 1 : An illegal job identification has been specified at input CODE.
ERR = 2 : Incorrect parameters have been specified at inputs D1...D8 (e.g. a group
number for which there is no remote module on the CS31 bus).
ERR = 3 The addressed CS31 remote module does not accept the job.

Status identifications
ERR = 8 : The function block is waiting since a job of another user is currently being
processed.
ERR = 10 : The job has been sent to the addressee and the block is waiting for its
response.

A1...A7 WORD
After completion of job processing, the response is available at outputs A1...A7. The
number of response parameters depends upon the job performed (see List of jobs).

ABB Control Page C-95 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD

CS31CO
%M 00,00 FREI RDY %O 00,00
%MW 10,00 GRN OK %M 00,01
%MW 10,01 CODE ERR %MW 10,10
%MW 10,02 D1 A1 %MW 10,11
%MW 10,03 D2 A2 %MW 10,12
%MW 10,04 D3 A3 %MW 10,13
%MW 10,05 D4 A4 %MW 10,14
%MW 10,06 D5 A5 %MW 10,15
%MW 10,07 D6 A6 %MW 11,00
%MW 10,08 D7 A7 %MW 11,01
%MW 10,09 D8

IL
CAL CS31CO (%M00,00, %MW10,00, %MW10,01, %MW10,02,
%MW10,03, %MW10,04, %MW10,05, %MW10,06,
%MW10,07, %MW10,08, %MW10,09, %O 00,00
%M00,01, %MW10,10, %MW10,11, %MW10,12,
%MW10,13, %MW10,14, %MW10,15, %MW11,00,
%MW11,01)

Example of configuration of the analog input %IW 00,03 for current

range 4 - 20 :
%MW 10,00 =0 Group
%MW 10,01 =170 Job identifier for "configure analog unit
channel"
%MW 10,02 =3 Channel
%MW 10,03 =49 Identification for current range 4 - 20 mA

These flags may be set to these values, e.g. with function "overwrite" in
the PLC.

List of jobs
Processing a job consists of :
- transferring the job and
- supplying the OK response or not-OK response

The OK response is described in connection with the corresponding job.

The not-OK response of the individual jobs always looks as follows :

Not-OK response
The following basically applies for the not-OK response :
RDY : 1
OK : 0
ERR : 1 inadmissible job identification
2 wrong parameter; e.g. group number to which there exists
no remote module

ABB Control Page C-96 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

3 remote module does not accept job

A1 ... A7 : 0

Updating of the maximum number of remote modules detected

Input word %IW 07,15 contains, amongst other things, the maximum number of
remote modules detected in the past. The actual number of remote modules which
exist at the moment may be less. This command is used to update this value. The
modules which exist are counted and the value is stored. The user can scan this
value in the PLC program. It is located in input word %IW 07,15, bits 8...15.

job
GRN : 255 (Master PLC with bus)
CODE : 132
D1 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Scanning the open-circuit monitoring of an input to establish whether it is

activated or deactivated
job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 32
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : 47 open-circuit monitoring ON
32 open-circuit monitoring OFF
A2 ... A7 : 0

Scanning the open-circuit monitoring of an output to establish whether it is

activated or deactivated
job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 33
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : 47 open-circuit monitoring ON
32 open-circuit monitoring OFF
A2 ... A7 : 0

Deactivating or activating open-circuit monitoring of an input

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63

ABB Control Page C-97 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CODE : 224 open-circuit monitoring ON

160 open-circuit monitoring OFF
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Deactivating or activating open-circuit monitoring of an output

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 225 open-circuit monitoring ON
161 open-circuit monitoring OFF
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Scanning a channel to establish whether it is configured as input or

input/output
job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 34
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : 34 input
35 input/output
A2 ... A7 : 0

Scanning the input delay of a channel

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63

ABB Control Page C-98 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CODE : 38
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : input delay :
2 2 ms
4 4 ms
.
.
.
30 30 ms
32 32 ms
A2 ... A7 : 0

Acknowledging errors on remote module

This command can be used to reset the error messages registered on the selected
remote module. Reset is possible only if the cause of the error is no longer operative.
job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 232
D1 : lowest channel number on the module :
0 lowest channel number on the module is 0 (<7)
8 lowest channel number on the module is 8 (>7)
D2 : module type :
0 binary input
1 analog input
2 binary output
3 analog output
4 binary input/output
5 analog input/output

ABB Control Page C-99 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Note : Bit : even number (0, 2, 4)

Word : odd number (1, 3, 5)
D3 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Acknowledging errors on remote module and resetting configuration values

to default setting
In addition to the job ’Acknowledging errors on remote module’, all configurable
settings are reset to the default setting.
job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 233
D1 : first channel number on the module :
0 first channel number on the module is 0 (<7)
8 first channel number on the module is 8 (>7)
D2 : module type :
0 binary input
1 analog input
2 binary output
3 analog output
4 binary input/output
5 analog input/output
Note : Bit : even number (0, 2, 4)
Word : odd number (1, 3, 5)
D3 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Scanning configuration of an analog input

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 42
D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : 50 input 0 ... 20 mA
49 input 4 ... 20 mA
A2 ... A7 : 0

Scanning configuration of an analog output

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 43

ABB Control Page C-100 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

D1 : channel number
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : 50 output 0 ... 20 mA
49 output 4 ... 20 mA
51 output + 10V
A2 ... A7 : 0

Configuration of an analog input

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 170
D1 : channel number
D2 : 50 input 0 ... 20 mA
49 input 4 ... 20 mA
D3 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Configuration of an analog output

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 171
D1 : channel number
D2 : 50 output 0 ... 20 mA
49 output 4 ... 20 mA
51 output + 10V
D3 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Scanning bus configuration

The bus interface of the Master PLC has a list which stores specific data of the
remote modules. The remote modules are numbered in this list in the order in which
they can be found on the CS31 bus. The internal number of the modules must be
specified with this command. The response to this command is the group number
stored under this number and status information on the corresponding module.
job
GRN : not evaluated
CODE : 80
D1 : number from module list (1 ... 31)
D2 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1

ABB Control Page C-101 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

OK : 1
A1 : status of the remote module :
Bit 0 ... 3 : number of process data bytes (binary module) or words
(word module), which the module sends to the master
Bit 4 ... 7 : number of process data bytes (binary module) or words
(word module), which the master sends to the module
A2 : group number (0 ... 63)
A3 : Bit 0 : 0 lowest channel number <7
1 lowest channel number > 7
Bit 1 : 0 binary module
1 word module
A4 ... A7 : 0

Read 1 ... 6 bytes

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 49 read 1 byte
50 read 2 bytes
51 read 3 bytes
52 read 4 bytes
53 read 5 bytes
54 read 6 bytes
D1 : first channel number on the module :
0 first channel number on the module is 0 (<7)
8 first channel number on the module is 8 (>7)
D2 : module type :
0 binary input
1 analog input
2 binary output
3 analog output
4 binary input/output
5 analog input/output
Note : bit : even number (0, 2, 4)
word : odd number (1, 3, 5)
D3 : Byte start address (Low Byte)
D4 : Byte start address (High Byte)
D5 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : value of 1st byte
A2 : value of 2nd byte or 0
A3 : value of 3rd byte or 0
A4 : value of 4th byte or 0
A5 : value of 5th byte or 0
A6 : value of 6th byte or 0
A7 : 0

Read 1 bit of 1 byte

job

ABB Control Page C-102 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

GRN : group number 0 ... 63

CODE : 63
D1 : first channel number on the module :
0 first channel number on the module is 0 (<7)
8 first channel number on the module is 8 (>7)
D2 : module type :
0 binary input
1 analog input
2 binary output
3 analog output
4 binary input/output
5 analog input/output
Note : bit : even number (0, 2, 4)
word : odd number (1, 3, 5)
D3 : byte start address (Low Byte)
D4 : byte start address (High Byte)
D5 : bit position within bytes 0 ... 7
D6 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 : bit value (0 or 1)
A2 ... A7 : 0

Write 1 ... 4 bytes

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 65 write 1 byte
66 write 2 bytes
67 write 3 bytes
68 write 4 bytes
D1 : first channel number on the module :
0 first channel number on the module is 0 (<7)
8 first channel number on the module is 8 (>7)
D2 : module type :
0 binary input
1 analog input
2 binary output
3 analog output
4 binary input/output
5 analog input/output
Note : bit : even number (0, 2, 4)
word : odd number (1, 3, 5)
D3 : byte start address (Low Byte)
D4 : byte start address (High Byte)
D5 : value of 1st byte
D6 : value of 2nd byte or not used
D7 : value of 3rd byte or not used
D8 : value of 4th byte or not used
OK response

ABB Control Page C-103 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

Write 1 bit of 1 byte

job
GRN : group number 0 ... 63
CODE : 79
D1 : first channel number on the module :
0 first channel number on the module is 0 (<7)
8 first channel number on the module is 8 (>7)
D2 : module type :
0 binary input
1 analog input
2 binary output
3 analog output
4 binary input/output
5 analog input/output
Note : bit : even number (0, 2, 4)
word : odd number (1, 3, 5)
D3 : byte start address (Low Byte)
D4 : byte start address (High Byte)
D5 : bit position within bytes 0 ... 7
D6 : bit value (0 or 1)
D7 ... D8 : not used
OK response
RDY : 1
OK : 1
A1 ... A7 : 0

CS31QU ACKNOWLEDGE CS31 ERRORS

FBD IL

CS31QU CAL CS31QU (FREI)

FREI

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S Enable block processing

ABB Control Page C-104 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block permits error messages of CS31 remote modules to be
acknowledged automatically.
Error messages are stored on the CS31 remote modules until they are
acknowledged. Even if the error has been remedied, the error message is still
pending on the module until acknowledgment and is also signalled to the PLC until
such time as it is acknowledged.
Processing of the block is enabled with a 1 signal at input FREI, and the block then
acknowledges CS31 errors continuously. It may take several PLC cycles to
acknowledge an error on a CS31 module.
If the function block is enabled, it constantly checks whether a CS31 error of class 3
or 4 has occurred and acknowledges this error.

1. A CS31 error of class 3 has occurred :

The block acknowledges the error on the CS31 remote module signalling the error
and also clears the error message on the PLC, i.e. the error flag %M 255,13 is reset
and LED FK3 is deactivated.

Example of an FK3 error :

- a remote module is disconnected from the CS31 bus.

Note : In PLC configuration menu of the Control Panel in the CS31Graf, the "central
unit reaction in case of FK3 error" must be "warning" in order to permit errors of class
3 to be processed. If "abort" is selected, the PLC automatically aborts execution of
the PLC program when an FK3 error is detected.

2. A CS31 error of class 4 has occurred :

The block acknowledges the error on the CS31 remote module signalling the error
and also clears the error message on the PLC, i.e. error flag %M 255,14 is reset.

Examples of an FK4 error :

- a remote module signals open circuit

MT_CS31 DATA SENT BY A MASTER TO A SLAVE

FBD IL

user function block(IL not available)

MT CS31
START
SLAV
W_NB
T_NB S_OK
AD END

PARAMETERS
START BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S Enable block processing

ABB Control Page C-105 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

SLAV WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Slave number of the slave CPU
W_NB WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Word number to exchange per sending
T_NB WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Total word number to transmit
AD WORD %MW, %OW, %KW First variable address of the data area
S_OK BINARY %O, %M Slave CPU is ready to receive data
END BINARY %O, %M Data area has been transmitted

DESCRIPTION
The function block MT_CS31 in the master has to be used with the function block
SR_CS31 in the slave; and MR_CS31 in the master with ST_CS31 in the slave.

These function blocks allow to exchange a data area between a master central unit
and a slave central unit on the CS31 bus, with the possibility to keep a quick data
transfer between the master and the slave.
The transmission or receiving has to be configured in the slave central unit as follows
Size of the transmitting and sending area on CS31 bus for slave central unit.: 8
words

A maximum of 7 words are allowed to exchange in one direction per sending. The
8th word is reserved for the handshake.
Only the address of the 1st variable of the data area has to be given.
Words are then automatically transfered 7 by 7 (or 6 by 6,...) from the data area to
OW xx,01 to OW xx,07 (or OW xx,01 to OW xx,06;...)
OW xx,00 is always reserved for the handshake to send; and IW xx,07 for the
handshake to be received.
When words are sent 6 by 6 (or 5 by 5,...), OW xx,07 (and OW xx,06;...) stays
available for a quick data transfer between the master and the slave.
(xx = the slave number of the slave central unit : 0 ≤ xx ≤ 61 for a 50 serie and 0 ≤ xx
≤ 5 for a 90 serie).

START Binary
The transfert is started. The data area is trasmitted only one time .
A new transmit is possible when END=1

SLAV Word
(For the function blocks in the master only)
Slave number of the slave central unit
The value is : 0 ≤ SLAV ≤ 61 for 50 serie and 0 ≤ SLAV ≤ 5 for 90 & 30
serie

W_NB Word
Number of words to transmit or receive per sending
The value is : 1 ≤ W_NB ≤ 7
The value has to be the same than the W_NB of the corresponding function block
used
in the other central unit.

ABB Control Page C-106 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

ex : if W_NB=6 in the master then W_NB=6 in the slave.

In the master, OW xx,01 to OW xx,06 are used for the transmission of words.
OW xx,00 and IW xx,07 are reserved for the handshake.
OW xx,07 is free and available for direct control of the slave I/O for example.

T_NB Word
(For a transmission only)
Total word number to transmit
The value has to be a multiple of W_NB : T_NB = n * W_NB

Note : n has to be chosen not to exceed addresses allowed in the central unit
selected.

AD Word
Address of the first variable of the data area. Only the offset address is requested.

The Segment is 0 for 30 & 50 serie and 30C2H for a 90 serie

A 90 serie with 8 kinstructions memory can not use this function block.
The segment (30C2H) has to be modified in the code with the user library.

Please refer to the CPU respective documentation to find the hexadecimal addresse
of variable,.

S_OK Binary
This bit is set by the slave.
It can be used to start a new transmit of data area

END Binary
This bit is set when the data area is completly transmitted to the slave CPU.
This bit is reset when START=0. Information that the slave has received this bit is
necessary to start again the transfer. The bit S_OK can be use (it can be managed
by the slave).

______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION

The data are sent every three cycle times between the master and the slave.

The value of W_NB in the slave has to be the same than W_NB in the master.

T_NB = n * W_NB
Pay attention not to exceed addresses allowed in the central unit selected.
The data area has to be chosen without any reserved area.

OW xx,00 to OW xx,07 and IW xx,00 to IW xx,07 are used following the function
block used and the value of W_NB.

The data exchange is an exchange of words or double words. In the case of the 30
serie & 50 serie , the data area can be a bit area.

ABB Control Page C-107 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Several slaves can be used for the data exchange.

This function block used 431 words in the user program memory.

MR_CS31 DATA RECEIVED BY A MASTER FROM A SLAVE

FBD IL

user function block(IL not available)

MR CS31
SLAV
W_NB
AD
M_OK END

PARAMETERS
SLAV WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Slave number of the slave CPU
W_NB WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Word number to exchange per
receiving
AD WORD %MW, %OW, %KW First variable address of the data area
M_OK BINARY %I, %O, %M CPU is ready to receive data
END BINARY %O, %M Data area has been transmitted

DESCRIPTION
The function block MR_CS31 in the master has to be used with the function block
ST_CS31 in the slave; and MT_CS31 in the master with SR_CS31 in the slave.

A maximum of 7 words are allowed to exchange in one direction per sending. The
8th word is reserved for the handshake.
Only the address of the 1st variable of the data area has to be given.
Words are then automatically transfered 7 by 7 (or 6 by 6,...) from IW xx,00 to IW
xx,06 (or from IW xx,00 to IW xx,05;...) to the data area.
IW xx,07 is always reserved for the handshake to be received; and OW xx,00 for the
handshake to send.
When words are sent 6 by 6 (or 5 by 5,...), IW xx,06 (and IW xx,05;...) stays available
for a quick data transfer between the master and the slave.
(xx = the slave number of the slave central unit : 0 ≤ xx ≤ 61 for a 50 serie and 0 ≤ xx
≤ 5 for a 90 serie).

ABB Control Page C-108 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

SLAV Word
(For the function blocks in the master only)
Slave number of the slave central unit
The value is : 0 ≤ SLAV ≤ 61 for 50 serie and 0 ≤ SLAV ≤ 5 for 30 1 90
series

ex : if W_NB=6 in the master then W_NB=6 in the slave.

AD Word
Address of the first variable of the data area. Only the offset address is requested.

The Segment is 0 for 30 & 50 series and 30C2H for a 90 serie

A 90 serie with 8 kinstructions memory can not use this function block.
The segment (30C2H) has to be modified in the code with the user library.

Please refer to the CPU respective documentation to find the hexadecimal addresse
of variable,.

M_OK Binary
This bit is set when the master central unit is ready to receive data area from the
CPU slave.
It can be used by the slave CPU to start a new transmit of data area

END Binary
This bit is set when the data area is completly transmitted from the slave CPU.
This bit is reset by the slave CPU
______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION

The data are sent every three cycle times between the master and the slave.

The value of W_NB in the master has to be the same than W_NB in the slave.

OW xx,00 to OW xx,07 and IW xx,00 to IW xx,07 are used following the function
block used and the value of W_NB.

ABB Control Page C-109 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The data exchange is an exchange of words or double words. In the case of the 30
serie & 50 serie, the data area can be a bit area.

Several slaves can be used for the data exchange.

This function block used 230 words in the user program memory.

ST_CS31 DATA SENT BY A SLAVE TO A MASTER

FBD IL

user function block(IL not available)

ST CS31
START
W_NB
T_NB
M_OK
AD END

PARAMETERS
START BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S Enable block processing
W_NB WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Word number to exchange per sending
T_NB WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Total word number to transmit
AD WORD %MW, %OW, %KW First variable address of the data area
M_OK BINARY %O, %M Master CPU is ready to receive data
END BINARY %O, %M Data area has been transmitted

DESCRIPTION
The function block ST_CS31 in the slaver has to be used with the function block
MR_CS31 in the master.

ABB Control Page C-110 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

When words are sent 6 by 6 (or 5 by 5,...), OW 00,06 (and OW 00,05;...) stays
available for a quick data transfer between the master and the slave.

START Binary
The transfert is started. The data area is trasmitted only one time .
A new transmit is possible when END=1

ex : if W_NB=6 in the master then W_NB=6 in the slave.

T_NB Word
(For a transmission only)
Total word number to transmit
The value has to be a multiple of W_NB : T_NB = n * W_NB

Note : n has to be chosen not to exceed addresses allowed in the central unit
selected.

AD Word
Address of the first variable of the data area. Only the offset address is requested.

The Segment is 0 for 30 & 50 serie and 30C2H for a 90 serie

A 90 serie with 8 kinstructions memory can not use this function block.
The segment (30C2H) has to be modified in the code with the user library.

Please refer to the CPU respective documentation to find the hexadecimal addresse
of variable,.

M_OK Binary
This bit is set by the master.
It can be used to start a new transmit of data area

END Binary
This bit is set when the data area is completly transmitted to the master CPU.
This bit is reset when START=0. Information that the master has received this bit is
necessary to start again the transfer. The bit M_OK can be use (it can be managed
by the master).

______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION

ABB Control Page C-111 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The data are sent every three cycle times between the master and the slave.

The value of W_NB in the slave has to be the same than W_NB in the master.

T_NB = n * W_NB
Pay attention not to exceed addresses allowed in the central unit selected.
The data area has to be chosen without any reserved area.

OW xx,00 to OW xx,07 and IW xx,00 to IW xx,07 are used following the function
block used and the value of W_NB.

The data exchange is an exchange of words or double words. In the case of the 30
serie & 50 serie , the data area can be a bit area.

Several slaves can be used for the data exchange.

This function block used 431 words in the user program memory

ABB Control Page C-112 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

SR_CS31 DATA RECEIVED BY A SLAVE FROM A MASTER

FBD IL

user function block(IL not available)

SR CS31

W_NB
AD
S_OK END

PARAMETERS
W_NB WORD %MW, %OW, %KW Word number to exchange per
receiving
AD WORD %MW, %OW, %KW First variable address of the data
area
S_OK BINARY I%, %O, %M CPU is ready to receive data
END BINARY %O, %M Data area has been transmitted

DESCRIPTION
The function block SR_CS31 in the slave has to be used with the function block
MT_CS31 in the master

A maximum of 7 words are allowed to exchange in one direction per sending. The
8th word is reserved for the handshake.
Only the address of the 1st variable of the data area has to be given.
Words are then automatically transfered 7 by 7 (or 6 by 6,...) from IW 00,01 to IW
00,07 (or from IW 00,01 to IW 00,06;...) to the data area.
IW 00,00 is always reserved for the handshake to be received and OW 00,07 for the
handshake to send.
When words are sent 6 by 6 (or 5 by 5,...), IW 00,07 (and IW 00,06;...) stays
available for a quick data transfer between the master and the slave.

W_NB Word
Number of words to transmit or receive per sending
The value is : 1 ≤ W_NB ≤ 7
The value has to be the same than the W_NB of the corresponding function block
used

ABB Control Page C-113 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

in the other central unit.

ex : if W_NB=6 in the master then W_NB=6 in the slave.

AD Word
Address of the first variable of the data area. Only the offset address is requested.

The Segment is 0 for 30 & 50 series and 30C2H for a 90 serie

A 90 serie with 8 kinstructions memory can not use this function block.
The segment (30C2H) has to be modified in the code with the user library.

Please refer to the CPU respective documentation to find the hexadecimal addresse
of variable,.

S_OK Binary
This bit is set when the slave central unit is ready to receive data area from the CPU
master.
It can be used by the master CPU to start a new transmit of data area

END Binary
This bit is set when the data area is completly transmitted from the master CPU.
This bit is reset by the master CPU
______________________________________________________________________

CAUTION

The data are sent every three cycle times between the master and the slave.

The value of W_NB in the master has to be the same than W_NB in the slave.

OW xx,00 to OW xx,07 and IW xx,00 to IW xx,07 are used following the function
block used and the value of W_NB.

The data exchange is an exchange of words or double words. In the case of the 30
serie & 50 serie, the data area can be a bit area.

Several slaves can be used for the data exchange.

This function block used 431 words in the user program memory.

5 Communication functions
Communication serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

ABB Control Page C-114 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

functions from pages C-114 to C-150

AINIT Initialisation of the ARCnet controller x
APOLL Transfer of the data package to the x
ARCnet controller
AREC / ARCnet data package receiving x
ARECitem
ASEND / ARCnet data package sending x
ASEND+
MODBUS MODBUS master x x x
REC / EMAS Receiving of ASCII characters and HEX x x x x
and RECvars values through a serail interface
SEND / DRUCK Sending of ASCII characters and HEX x x x x
values through a serail interface
SINIT Initialization and configuration of the x x x x
serial interfaces

AINIT INITIALIZATION OF THE ARCNET CONTROLLER

FBD IL

!BA 0
AINIT AINIT
0/1 DONE 0/1
TO ERR TO
NODE DONE
STAT ERR
DIAG NODE
TOS STAT
TOND DIAG
TOJN TOS
LEV TOND
RECO
TOJN
LEV
RECO

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Initialization of the ARCnet
controller with 0!1 edge
TO WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Timeout in ms when sending
data packages
DONE BINARY %O, %M Initialization terminated
ERR BINARY %O, %M Error has occurred
NODE WORD %OW, %MW Own node number (station
address)
STAT WORD %OW, %MW Status register of the ARCnet
controller
DIAG WORD %OW, %MW Diagnosis register of the
ARCnet controller
TOS BINARY %O, %M Timeout has occurred during
send operation

ABB Control Page C-115 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

TOND WORD %OW, %MW Node number of lost data

package after timeout
TOJN WORD %OW, %MW Job number of lost data
package after timeout
LEV WORD %OW, %MW Level of the send buffer
RECO BINARY %O, %M Network reconfiguration is
running (after loss of token)

The outputs STAT, DIAG, TOS, TOND, TOJN, LEV and RECO are updated after a
successful initialization with each block call.

DESCRIPTION
ARCnet communication function block.

The function block AINIT initializes the ARCnet controller in the following way :
- Interrupt after reception of a data package
- Only short packages (a short package = 256 bytes)
- Data packages to all stations (broadcasts)

There are no problems if

- the capacity utilization is less than 80 % before making changes to a running
program or if
- the program length is less than 2 k instructions.

0/1 BINARY
A 0-1 edge at the input 0/1 causes a single initialization of the ARCnet controller. As
long as the initialization has not been terminated (DONE = 0), a new 0-1 edge at the
input 0/1 is ignored.

TO WORD
The timeout waiting time for sending data packages is specified in ms at the input
TO. If a data package cannot be sent within this period, the sending operation of this
data package is aborted and the package is lost. The output TOS indicates the loss
of the package.

DONE BINARY
The output DONE indicates that the initialization has been terminated. This output
has always to be considered together with the output ERR.
The following applies :
DONE = 1 and ERR = 0 : The initialization has been terminated.
No error has occurred.
DONE = 1 and ERR = 1 : An error has occurred during initialization.

ABB Control Page C-116 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The ARCnet controller has not responded within a

period of 100 ms.

ERR BINARY
The output ERR indicates that the ARCnet controller has not responded after an
initialization command within a period of 100 ms. This output has always to be
considered together with the output DONE.
If an error has occurred, the following applies :
DONE = 1 and ERR = 1.

NODE WORD
The output NODE indicates the node number (station address) of its own after a
successful initialization.

STAT WORD
The output STAT indicates the content of the status register of the ARCnet controller
after a successful initialization.

DIAG WORD
The output DIAG indicates the content of the diagnosis register of the ARCnet
controller after a successful initialization.

TOS BINARY
The output TOS indicates that the sending of a data package was not feasible within
the timeout period (input TO) and that the data package is lost. Both the node
number and the job number of the lost data package are available at the outputs
TOND and TOJN, respectively.

TOND WORD
The output TOND indicates the node number of the lost data package after the
timeout period has elapsed.

TOJN WORD
The output TOJN indicates the job number of the lost data package after the timeout
period has elapsed.

LEV WORD
The output LEV indicates the level of the sending buffer after a successful
initialization.

RECO BINARY
The output RECO indicates that the network is reconfiguring itself (RECO = 1) after a
loss of token. The transition from RECO = 1 to 0 means that the reconfiguring
procedure has been terminated.
The outputs STAT, DIAG, TOS, TOND, TOJN, LEV and RECO are updated after a
successful initialization with each block call.

APOLL TRANSFER DATA PACKAGES TO THE ARCNET

CONTROLLER

ABB Control Page C-117 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

APOLL CAL APOLL

DESCRIPTION
ARCnet communication function block.

The function block APOLL is intended for the following two tasks :
- It hands over a data package from the buffer storage to the ARCnet controller in
order to send it off. The data packages are stored in the buffer storage by the
function block ASEND.
- It monitors whether or not this data package is sent off within the timeout period
configured in the function block AINIT.

If the data package cannot be sent off by the ARCnet controller within the configured
timeout period, the function block aborts the sending procedure. The data package is
lost then. The loss of the data package is indicated by the output TOS of the AINIT
block with the next block call.

If several APOLL blocks are configured in the user program, also several data
packages can be sent off within one program cycle.

The ARCnet controller must have been initialized by the function block AINIT before
a data package can be handed over from the storage buffer to it by the function
block APOLL.

Important note :
If a PLC is used with an ARCnet interface, a certain section of the PLC TURBO
program memory No. 2 is reserved for ARCnet.
If programs with more than 2 k instructions are executed, the system–dependent
capacity utilization can possibly be increased by reason of the reduced TURBO
memory No. 2 when changes are made to a running program.
There are no problems, if
- the capacity utilization is less than 80 % before making changes to a running
program or if
- the program length is less than 2 k instructions.

AREC RECEIVE ARCNET DATA PACKAGES

ABB Control Page C-118 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

ARECitem !BA 0
N AREC
#D #JOB
#J UJOB
#L AREC N
MW #JOB #D
UJOB #J
JR item item #L
MW
JR

PARAMETERS
#JOB DIRECT #, #H Total number of jobs configured
CONSTANT in the block
UJOB BINARY %O, %M Unknown job received

N WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Node number (station address)

of the sender
#D DIRECT #, #H DIN identification
CONSTANT
#J DIRECT #, #H Job number
CONSTANT
#L DIRECT #, #H Number of words of the user
CONSTANT data to be received
MW WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW First word variable, as of the
received user data are stored
JR BINARY %O, %M Job received

In FBD : The item input can be duplicable. Each item input is directly linked to a
ARECitem function block that corresponds to 1 data package.
In IL : N, #D, #J, #L, MW, JR can be duplicated all together by pack of 6 parameters.

DESCRIPTION
ARCnet communication function block.

The AREC function block has always to be used with the ARECitem function block.
The ARCnet controller must have been initialized by the function block AINIT before
using the function block AREC.

The operating system reads the received data packages from the ARCnet controller
interrupt-controlled and stores them into a storage buffer. The size of the storage
buffer is 31 data packages.
The block reads the whole storage buffer contents and assigns the data packages to
the configured jobs in the block.
With the same job the receiver gets user data which belong together logically. For

ABB Control Page C-119 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

unmistakable identification of a job the following parameters are necessary :

Node number of the sender,
DIN identification and
Job number.

The parameter values of the received data packages are compared to the parameter
values of the configured jobs. If both values are equal, the user data of the data
package beginning from the word variable MW are stored continuously and the
output JR is set to 1. If several data packages are equal, the function block only
evaluates that data package which has been received last (the latest data package).
If no data package from the storage buffer can be assigned to a configured job, the
output belonging to this configured job is set to 0 (JR = 0).
The output UJOB indicates that a data package existing in the storage buffer could
not be assigned to a job.
A user program must not contain more than one block call of AREC.

Important note :
If a PLC is used with an ARCnet interface, a certain section of the PLC TURBO
program memory No. 2 is reserved for ARCnet.
If programs with more than 2 k instructions are executed, the system–dependent
capacity utilization can possibly be increased by reason of the reduced TURBO
memory No. 2 when changes are made to a running program.
There are no problems, if - the capacity utilization is less than 80 % before
making changes to a running program or if
- the program length is less than 2 k instructions.

#JOB DIRECT CONSTANT

The total number of jobs configured in this function block is assigned to the input
#JOB.
The following is valid : 1 < #JOB

UJOB BINARY
Output UJOB indicates that a data package was stored in the storage buffer which
could not be assigned to any job.
The following applies :
UJOB = 1 : unknown job received
UJOB = 0 : no unknown job received

N WORD
The node number (station address) of the sender is specified for the configured job
at input N.
The following is valid : 0 < N0...Nn-1 < 255

#D DIRECT CONSTANT
The DIN identification is specified for the configured job at input #D.
The following is valid : 0 < #D < 127
not allowed : 111 (6FH)

#J DIRECT CONSTANT
The job number is specified for the configured job at input #J.

ABB Control Page C-120 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The following is valid : -32767 < #J < +32767

#L DIRECT CONSTANT
The number of user data words is specified for the configured job at input #L.
The following is valid : 0 < #L < 125

MW WORD
The starting word flag of the user data is specified for the configured job at input
MW.

JR BINARY
Output JR (job received) indicates that a data package from the storage buffer has
been assigned to this job. The user data of the data package are stored continuously
beginning from the word variable MW.
The following applies :
JR = 1 : job received
JR = 0 : no job received

Structure of the ARCnet data package (short package = 256 bytes)

The ARCnet data package consists in :
- 3 bytes of control data : sender, receiver, CP (continuous pointer)
- max. 253 bytes of user data consisting in :
1 byte for DIN identification + 2 bytes for job number + 125 words for user data

LB HB LB HB LB HB
Sender Receiver CP DN
JN JN NW1 NW1 NW2 NW2
0 1 2 F9H FAH FBH FCH FDH FEH FFH
Position

Example of a configured job : Sender : Station address of the sender (05H)

N: %KW 01,00 = 5 Receiver : Station address of the receiver
#D : #127 (7FH) CP : Continuous pointer, contains the
#J : #10 (0AH) position (F9H) of the first user data byte
#L : #2 DN : DIN identification (7FH)
MW : %MW 10,00 = 258 (102H) LB JN : Low byte job number (0AH)
%MW 10,01 = 772 (304H) HB JN : High byte job number (00H)
LB NW1 : Low byte user data word 1 (02H)
HB NW1 : High byte user data word 1 (01H)
LB NW2 : Low byte user data word 2 (04H)
HB NW2 : High byte user data word 2 (03H)

ASEND SEND ARCNET DATA PACKAGES

ABB Control Page C-121 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
ASEND ASEND
#JOB #JOB
EN EN
#n
#n
N
N
#D
#D
#J
#L ST #J
MW #L
MW
ST

ASEND+ EN
#n
EN N
#n N
N N
#D #D
#J #J
#L ST #L
MW MW
ST

: :
: :
: :

EN
ASEND+ #n
N
EN N
#n #D
N #J
#D
#L
#J
MW
#L ST
ST
MW

PARAMETERS
#JOB DIRECT #, #H Total number of jobs configured
CONSTANT in the block
EN BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Enable : Send job
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of receivers of the data
CONSTANT package
N WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Node number (station address)
of the receiver. The input can
be duplicated.
#D DIRECT #, #H DIN identification

ABB Control Page C-122 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONSTANT
#J DIRECT #, #H Job number
CONSTANT
#L DIRECT #, #H Number of user data words to
CONSTANT be sent
MW WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW First word variable of the user
data words
ST BINARY %O, %M Job has been stored in the
storage buffer

The inputs EN, #n, N, #D, #J, #L and MW and the output ST are the parameters,
that define a job. These parameters therefore appear both in the ASEND block and
in the ASEND+ extension block.

DESCRIPTION
ARCnet communication function block.

The ASEND function block is intended for sending off jobs (data packages) via the
ARCnet network. The configured jobs are stored in a buffer storage. From here, they
are transferred to the ARCnet controller for sending off. The transport from the buffer
storage to the ARCnet controller is managed by the APOLL function block. The
transport is also carried out by the operating system in the idle period between two
PLC cycles.
The maximum size of the storage buffer is 31 data packages.
The output ST indicates that the configured job has been stored in the storage
buffer.

Important note
A user program must not contain more than one block call of ASEND. If more than
one job have to be sent off, the ASEND block must be extended by the ASEND+
block. For each further job, one ASEND+ must be configured in the FBD directly
following ASEND.
ASEND+ is only an extension block for ASEND, but not autonomous. For that
reason, all used ASEND+ blocks must be configured directly following an ASEND
block or then following each other. Under no circumstances may other CEs be
inserted between ASEND and ASEND+ or ASEND+ and a following ASEND+
respectively.
For the same reason, the output ST may not be connected by a line with another CE.
A variable must always be defined at the output ST.
ASEND+ blocks only exist in FBD. During the translation, the ASEND block and all
the following ASEND+ are combined into one ASEND-IL function block.
The ARCnet controller must have been initialized by the function block AINIT before
data packages can be stored in the storage buffer by the function block ASEND.

ABB Control Page C-123 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

capacity utilization can possibly be increased by reason of the reduced TURBO

memory No. 2 when changes are made to a running program.
There are no problems, if - the capacity utilization is less than 80 % before
making changes to a running program or if
- the program length is less than 2 k instructions.

#JOB DIRECT CONSTANT

The total number of jobs configured in the ASEND and ASEND+ function blocks is
specified at the input #JOB.
The following is valid : 1 < #JOB

EN BINARY
Dependent on the enable input EN, the configured job is stored as a data package in
the storage buffer and sent off then.
The following applies :
EN = 0 : The configured job is not stored in the storage buffer and
thus not sent off.
EN = 0-1 edge : The configured job is stored as a data package in the
storage buffer and sent off then.
EN = 1 : The configured job is stored in the storage buffer and sent
off, only if the user data of the job have changed.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
The number of receivers for the configured job is specified at the input #n. The node
numbers of the receivers are configured at the inputs N, where : 1 < #n < 15

N WORD
If the same job has to be sent to several receivers, the node numbers (station
addresses) of the receivers are defined at the inputs N.
N0 : Node number = 0 :
If the node number is ”0” at the input N0, the job is sent to all stations (Broadcast).
N1...Nn-1 : Node number = 0 :
If the node number is ”0” at the inputs N1...Nn-1, no broadcast is sent.
If one of the receivers is not able to receive data, the data package is lost for this
receiver.
The following applies : 0 < N < 255

#D DIRECT CONSTANT
The DIN identification is specified for the configured job at input #D. The value 111
(6FH) is not allowed here, because it is reserved for programming and test
telegrams.
The following applies : 0 < #D < 127 not allowed : 111 (6FH)

#J DIRECT CONSTANT
The job number is specified for the configured job at input #J.
The following applies : -32767 < #J < +32767

#L DIRECT CONSTANT
The number of user data words is specified for the configured job at input #L.
The following applies : 0 < #L < 125

ABB Control Page C-124 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MW WORD
The starting word flag of the word flag area to be sent off is specified at the input
MW. The data of this flag area are sent off as user data in this job.

ST BINARY
The output ST (status) indicates that the configured job has been stored in the
storage buffer.
The following applies :
ST = 0 : The configured job has not been stored in the storage buffer.
ST = 1 : The configured job has been stored in the storage buffer.

Note
A variable must be specified at the output ST, i.e. the output may not be connected
by a line with another CE.

Structure of the ARCnet data package (short package = 256 bytes)

LB HB LB HB LB HB
Sender Receiver CP DN
JN JN NW1 NW1 NW2 NW2
0 1 2 F9H FAH FBH FCH FDH FEH FFH
Position

Example of a configured job : Sender : Station address of the sender (05H)

MODBUS MODBUS MASTER

ABB Control Page C-125 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

MODBUS CAL MODBUS (FREI,SLAV,FCT,TIME,ADDR,

FREI NB,DATA,RDY,ERR,ERN)
SLAV RDY
FCT ERR
TIME ERN
ADDR
NB
DATA

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I,%O,%M,%K,%S Enable signal for one
communication (rising edge)
SLAV WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Slave number
FCT WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Function code
TIME WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Time–out for MODBUS
communication
ADDR WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Address in the slave
NB WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Number of data to send or to
read
DATA WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Data to send to the slave or to
BINARY %I,%O,%M write with the data received
from a slave MODBUS
RDY BINARY %O,%M Ready, communication in
progress
ERR BINARY %O,%M Communication error
ERN WORD %OW,%MW Communication error, detail of
error

DESCRIPTION
MODBUS master communication function block

The central unit is a master on a MODBUS network and can communicate with other
products with MODBUS protocol.
The function MODBUS MASTER in the central unit is valided by :
- system constant KW 00,06 = 100
- connection between pins 7 and 6 on the connector of the serial interface

Several function blocks MODBUS can be used in one user program.

The MODBUS protocol is a master/slave protocol. The master sends a frame to a

slave and waits for the answer (a time–out is defined). Binary or numeric data can be
read or written in a slave.

The area of data in the master is chosen by the address of the first variable. The size

ABB Control Page C-126 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

of area is necessary for sending or receiving. Reading or writing data are done
automatically from these areas.

FREI BINARY
A rising edge at the FREI input leads to an output of a request to a slave MODBUS,
provided that the block is ready to do this (RDY = 1).
If a rising edge appears at the FREI input although the RDY output is equal to 0, i.e.
the block is not ready for a new MODBUS communication, the rising edge will be
ignored. Therefore, no new MODBUS communication can be started as long as the
RDY output is 0.

SLAV WORD
Address of the slave which receives the request.
Value : 0 < ADDR < 255
In case of address 0 (ADDR = 0), all slaves on the MODBUS network will read the
frame.

FCT WORD
The function depends on the type of parameters and if it is reading or writing.
Value : 1 (01H): reading n bits
2 (02H): reading n bits
3 (03H): reading n words
4 (04H): reading n words
5 (05H): writing one bit
6 (06H): writing one word
7 (07H): fast reading of 8 bits
8 (08H): Diagnosis/initialization
15 (0FH): writing n bits
16 (10H): writing n words
The other function codes are not supported by by the central units 30serie, 40 serie
and 50 serie. In case of a wrong function code, an error 1 is generated in the word
ERN.

TIME WORD
Time–out for the communication (maximum time for an answer of the slave
MODBUS).
The value is given in milliseconds.
Cycle time (KD 00,00) < TIME < 32767
In case of a time–out, the output ERN provides the value of 9.

ADDR WORD
Address of data in the slave memory to read or write.

NB WORD
Number of data to read or write in the slave.
This number defines also the size of the data area in the master to send to the slave
or to receive from the slave.

DATA WORD, BINARY

DATA defines the first variable of the data area in the master. The size of this area

ABB Control Page C-127 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

depends on the NB parameter.

Different cases are possible according to the function code and the operand :
Reading : ADDR DATA result
word word idem
bit bit idem
bit word same as the function block PACK
word bit The first bit of the word is ranged in the first bit of the
group number.
Example : data = M 00,07 : The first bit of the read
word will be written in M 00,00.
Writing : ADDR DATA result
word word idem
bit bit idem
bit word same as the function block PACK
word bit same as the function block UNPACK

RDY BINARY
The output RDY (ready) indicates whether a MODBUS communication is in progress
or not. As long as a communication is in progress, the output RDY is equal to 0. The
function block can only be used if RDY = 1.

ERR BINARY
The output ERR indicates an error occurred during communication. The word output
ERN indicates the details of the error.
If ERR = 1 -> error,
ERR = 0 -> no error or communication in progress.
The error is clear after one cycle time.

ERN WORD
Details of error :
0: no error
1: unknown function code
2: address error
3: data error
9: time–out
10 : checksum error
The error is clear after one cycle time.

ABB Control Page C-128 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

SEND SENDING OF ASCII CHARACTERS AND HEX VALUES

THROUGH A SERIAL INTERFACE

FBD IL

!BA 0
SEND DRUCK
FREI FREI
SSK TXNR
TXNR SSK
#"Name TX RDY RDY
TX

#"Name
#1
#"Text1
....

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M Enable signal for output of one
text (0->1-edge)
SSK WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Serial interface identification
TXNR WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Number of the text to be output
TX TXT texts Texts/operands
capable of duplication
RDY BINARY %O, %I, %M Ready
#"Name TXT texts Comment name (in FBD)

DESCRIPTION
ASCII communication fonction block.

A CS31 central unit can send ASCII messages through its RS232 serial interface
with the SEND function block.
Each message has an identification number and can be composed of ASCII texts
and operands values. The texts and operand identifiers to be output are stored in the
user program in the PLC directly by the SEND block. The numerical values to be
output are conditioned for a diversity of representations by specifying a format
identifier.

IMPORTANT NOTE : Initialization of the serial interface

Before using the SEND block, the serial interface used has to be initalized with the
SINIT block.

Communication between several SEND blocks and the same serial interface
Several SEND blocks can use the same serial interface. If the serial interface is

ABB Control Page C-129 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

engaged by one of the SEND blocks, the other SEND blocks automatically wait until
it is free again. The priority access to the serial interface when several SEND blocks
simultaneously have access to the same interface, corresponds to the sequence in
which the SEND blocks are called in the user program : the first SEND block located
at the beginning of the user program is given access first. The processing sequence
must be planned by an appropriate mutual interlocking of the SEND blocks.

Communication by a SEND and REC block with the same serial interface
A SEND block and a REC block (receiving of ASCII messages) can use the same
serial interface without any special precaution.

FREI BINARY
If the block is ready (RDY = 1) and a 0 -> 1 edge appears at the FREI input, the text
identified at the input TXNR is sent through the serial interface specified at the SSK
input.

If a 0 -> 1 edge appears at the FREI input although the RDY output is equal to 0 (i.e.
the block is not ready yet for a new transfer), the 0 -> 1 edge is ignored. Therefore,
no new text transfer is started as long as the RDY signal is 0.

SSK WORD
Central units can have one or two RS232 serial interface. The number of the
interface through which the text is to be output is specified at the SSK input :
SSK = 1 for COM1
SSK = 2 for COM2

TXNR WORD
The number of the text to be output is specified at the TXNR input : 1≤ TXNR ≤ 99

The number of the text to be output must be present at the TXNR input until the
block indicates the end of text transfer with a 1 signal at its RDY output.

RDY BINARY
In the program cycle in which the block is called for the first time, and during the time
when a text is output, RDY is equal to 0. As long as RDY is equal to 0, no new text
output can be activated and all 0 -> 1 edge present at the FREI input are ignored and
lost.

After the first call of the block or after termination of a text output, RDY is equal to 1
and the block is ready again for output of a new text.

FREI RDY TXNR SSK MEANING

0/1 edge 1 2 1 The text with the number 2 is
output through interface 1
0/1 edge 0 2 1 0/1 edge is ignored because
the block is not ready
no 0/1 edge x x x No output of a new text

=> The RDY signal can be used for example at the FREI input to activate a new text
transfer.

ABB Control Page C-130 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

TX ALL
In IL :
Texts and operands to be output are directly written at the TX inputs. The way to
write the messages is described here below.

In FBD :
Text and operands to be sent are written in a comment window. Several comment
windows can be created and each comment window has a "Name" that corresponds
to the "Name" written at the TX inputs.

A comment window is called by the button in the tool bar. You have to drag the
mouse to select the rectangle area where the text must be written.
Comment may be inserted anywhere in the program.

One comment window can be composed of several messages.

The name of the comment window is NOT sent with the text and operands.
The way to write the messages is described here below and an example is given at
the end.

- Storage of texts in the central unit :

Quantity : 1...99 messages (in one or several comment windows in FBD)
Length : Up to 256 characters (owing to the send buffer length = 256)

Serie 90 Serie 40 & 50

- Each text character counts as 1 character 1 character
- Each format identifier counts as 3 characters
- Each bit operand counts as 1 character 1 character
- Each word operand counts as 2 characters 1 to 6 characters *
- Each double word operand counts as 4 characters 10 to 11 characters *
* depends on the format

When the program is started, the PLC checks the texts to determine whether or not
the maximum length is exceeded.

- Syntax of texts
A text for the SEND block consists of :
- The text number
- One or several subtexts (optional)
- Operands with format identifier (optional)

ABB Control Page C-131 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

#n #" Subt ext

# Format ident ifier Operand

#n : Number of the text to be entered as a direct constant (1...99).

#” : Start identifier for text input.

Subtext : All ASCII characters (from hexadecimal code 00 up to 7F).

The character ASCII <NUL> is an exception for central units serei 90.
This character is used as a prefix for the format identifier in the send
buffer.

Operand : Binary, word or double word operands whose values are output
depending on the display format.

Format identifier : The PLC is capable of presenting the numerical values to be

output on a screen or a printer in diverse ways. The format identifier
specifies the type of the operand and the display format of its value. This
is planned directly before the operand to be output and consists of three
digits. The 1st digit from the left specifies the operand type. There are 3
operand types :
Binary : 1
Word : 2
Double word : 3
Numbers 2 and 3 define the display format.

Examples :
- Format identifier 103
Digit 1 : 1 : Binary operand
Digits 2 and 3 : 03 : Display format 03 (see table)

-Format identifier 204

Digit 1 : 2 : Word operand
Digits 2 and 3 : 04 : Display format 04 (see table)

-Format identifier 341

Digit 1 : 3 : Double word operand
Digits 2 and 3 : 41 : Display format 41 (see table)

- Possible display formats

All possible display formats are listed in the following table.
For series 40 & 50 :

ABB Control Page C-132 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

- identifiers applicable to word data types : 01 to 16, 21 to 26, 33 to 36,

42 to 51, and 99
- identifiers applicable to double word data types : 05 to 16 and 41 to 62
For serie 90 : With the exception of the special indentifiers 98 and 99, all identifiers
are applicable to the word and double word data types.

There are formats

- with leading zeros and
- with leading zeros substituted by blanks which are indicated in the table here below
by -.

Format in series in serie 90 Numerical ASCII output

identifier 40 & 50 example
01 x x 0012345678 8
02 xx xx 78
03 xxx xxx 678
04 xxxx xxxx 5678
05 xxxxx xxxxx 45678

06 xxxx,x xxxx,x 1102215 0221,5

07 xxx,xx xxx,xx 022,15
08 xx,xxx xx,xxx 02,215
09 x,xxxx x,xxxx 0,2215
10 ,xxxxx ,xxxxx ,02215

11 +/- xxxxx +/- xxxxx 00331 +00331

12 +/- xxxx,x +/- xxxx,x +0033,1
13 +/- xxx,xx +/- xxx,xx +003,31
14 +/- xx,xxx +/- xx,xxx +00,331
15 +/- x,xxxx +/- x,xxxx +0,0331
16 +/- ,xxxxx +/- ,xxxxx +,00331

17 x 00234 ----4
18 xx ---34
19 xxx --234
20 xxxx --234
21 xxxxx xxxxx --234

22 xxxx,x xxxx,x 00347 --347

23 xxx,xx xxx,xx --3,47
24 xx,xxx xx,xxx --,347
25 x,xxxx x,xxxx -,0347
26 ,xxxxx ,xxxxx ,00347
27 +/- xxxxx +--347
28 +/- xxxx,x +--34,7

33 +/-xxx,xx 00347 +--3,47

34 +/-xx,xxx +--,347
35 +/-x,xxxx +-,0347
36 +/-,xxxxx +,00347

ABB Control Page C-133 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Format in series in serie 90 Numerical ASCII output

identifier 40 & 50 example

37 xxxxxx 0012345678 345678

38 xxxxxxx 2345678
39 xxxxxxxx 12345678
40 xxxxxxxxx 012345678
41 xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx 0012345678

42 xxxxxxxxx,x xxxxxxxxx,x 0011223344 001122334,4

43 xxxxxxxx,xx xxxxxxxx,xx 00112233,44
44 xxxxxxx,xxx xxxxxxx,xxx 0011223,344
45 xxxxxx,xxxx xxxxxx,xxxx 001122,3344
46 xxxxx,xxxxx xxxxx,xxxxx 00112,23344
47 xxxx,xxxxxx xxxx,xxxxxx 0011,223344
48 xxx,xxxxxxx xxx,xxxxxxx 001,1223344
49 xx,xxxxxxxx xx,xxxxxxxx 00,11223344
50 x,xxxxxxxxx x,xxxxxxxxx 0,011223344
51 ,xxxxxxxxxx ,xxxxxxxxxx ,0011223344

52 +/- xxxxxxxxxx +/- xxxxxxxxxx 0055667788 +0055667788

53 +/- xxxxxxxxx,x +/- xxxxxxxxx,x +005566778,8
54 +/- xxxxxxxx,xx +/- xxxxxxxx,xx +00556677,88
55 +/- xxxxxxx,xxx +/- xxxxxxx,xxx +0055667,788
56 +/- xxxxxx,xxxx +/- xxxxxx,xxxx +005566,7788
57 +/- xxxxx,xxxxx +/- xxxxx,xxxxx +00556,67788
58 +/- xxxx,xxxxxx +/- xxxx,xxxxxx +0055,667788
59 +/- xxx,xxxxxxx +/- xxx,xxxxxxx +005,5667788
60 +/- xx,xxxxxxxx +/- xx,xxxxxxxx +00,55667788
61 +/- x,xxxxxxxxx +/- x,xxxxxxxxx +0,055667788
62 +/- ,xxxxxxxxxx +/- ,xxxxxxxxxx +,0055667788

63 x 0087654321 ---------1
64 xx --------21
65 xxx -------332
66 xxxx ------4321
67 xxxxx -----54321
68 xxxxxx ----654321
69 xxxxxxx ---7654321
70 xxxxxxxx --87654321
71 xxxxxxxxx --87654321
72 xxxxxxxxxx --87654321

73 xxxxxxxxx,x 0012345678 --1234567,8

74 xxxxxxxx,xx --123456,78
75 xxxxxxx,xxx --12345,678
76 xxxxxx,xxxx --1234,5678
77 xxxxx,xxxxx --123,45678
78 xxxx,xxxxxx --12,345678
79 xxx,xxxxxxx --1,2345678

ABB Control Page C-134 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Format in series in serie 90 Numerical ASCII output

identifier 40 & 50 example
80 xx,xxxxxxxx --,12345678
81 x,xxxxxxxxx -,012345678
82 ,xxxxxxxxxx ,0012345678
83 +/- xxxxxxxxxx +--12345678
84 +/- xxxxxxxxx,x +--1234567,8

Special format : Output of a word operand HEX value :

The value of a word operand is output directly as a hexadecimal value. Therefore,

the value is not converted to ASCII before output.
98 Only the LOW BYTE (8 bits) of the word operand is output
99 The LOW BYTE of the word operand is output first, followed by its HIGH
BYTE
Important : This special format is only permissible for the “WORD” data type.
Permissible format : 298 and 299
Inadmissible format : 198, 199, 398 and 399

- Input of texts
The following parts of the overall message are treated as independent operands :
- the text number e.g. #1
- a subtext e.g. #” Text1
- a format identifier e.g. # 203
- an operand e.g. %MW 002,03
- a further subtext e.g. #” Text2

Input of special characters for screen or printer control :

Control characters such as “line feed” <LF> or “carriage return” <CR> are needed to
arrange the message when output to a screen or printer. These special characters
can be placed anywhere within a subtext. In the programming system, these special
characters are entered by means of :
\Numerical value of the character
The numerical value of the character is specified as a three-digit decimal number.

Example :
The following output is to be made on a printer :
First line
Blank line
Second line
To do this, the following text must be planned :
First line <CR> <LF> <LF> second line
The following applies :
<CR> = 013
<LF> = 010
The text input in the programming system is as follows :
#”First line\013\010\010second line

ABB Control Page C-135 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Notes :
- The characters with the ASCII code >20H (=32D) must be entered with the
keyboard. As an example, the character ”!” can be entered with the keyboard, and
not as \033.
- Characters, which are not special characters and which can not be entered with the
keyboard, can be generated in the following way :
Press and hold down the <ALT> key, now type the numerical code (decimal code) on
the numerical keypad of the keyboard, then release the <ALT> key.
- The character with the ASCII code 255 is reserved for internal use of the
programming software and must not be used otherwise.

- Example :

Text 1 : The machine is ready.

Text 2 : The machine is not ready.
Text 3 : Level is (%MW 001,01)m and temperature is (%MW 001,00)°C.

Note : Don’t forget the SINIT function block to initialize the serial port
FBD IL

&
%M 000,00
%O 00,00 LD %M 000,00
SEND
AND %O 00,00
FREI ST %M 238,00
%MW 000,00 SSK
%MW 000,01 TXNR !BA 0
#"Com. 1 TX0 RDY %O 00,00 DRUCK
#"Com. 2 TX1 %M 238,00
%MW 000,00
%MW 000,01
#"Com. 1 %O 00,00
#1 #1
#"\010\013The machine is ready. #"\010\013The machine is ready.
#2 #2
#"\010\013The machine is not ready. #"\010\013The machine is not ready.
#3
#"Com. 2
#"\010\013It is
#3
#202
#"\010\013Level is
%MW 001,01
#202
#"m and temperature is
%MW 001,01
#203
#"m and temperature is
%MW 001,00
#203
#"°C.
%MW 001,00
#"°C.

REC RECEIVING OF ASCII CHARACTERS AND HEX VALUES

THROUGH A SERIAL INTERFACE

ABB Control Page C-136 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
REC
EMAS
QUIT QUIT
RECvars SSK MEUN SSK
RDY #ANU
MW VAR VAR TELN MEUN
RDY
#"Name TELN
TEXT
MW
TEXT
#"Name
#1
#"Text 1
...

PARAMETERS
QUIT BINARY %O, %E, %M, %S, %K Reception of telegrams not
enabled.
SSK WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Serial interface identification
#ANU DIRECT #, #H Number of VAR for user
CONSTANT information
TEXT TXT texts Comparison telegram;
capable of duplication
MEUN BINARY %O, %M Data invalid
RDY BINARY %O, %M Ready : telegram received
TELN WORD %OW, %MW Number of the comparison
telegram with which the
received one agrees
MW WORD %OW, %MW User data;
capable of duplication
#"Name TXT Text Comment name (in FBD)

DESCRIPTION
ASCII communication function block.

A CS31 central unit can receive ASCII messages through its RS232 serial interface
with the REC function block. The REC function block is always linked to the RECvars
function block.

The REC function block :

- receives telegrams through a serial interface of the PLC
- compares these telegrams to comparison telegrams stored in the user program
- and, if these agree, provides the user data of the telegram received at the block’s
outputs.

ABB Control Page C-137 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The received telegrams are fetched from the serial interface by an interface driver
and are provided in a BUFFER for further processing by REC. The driver recognizes
the end of the telegram by the end of telegram character. This end of telegram
character is planned in the SINIT block.

IMPORTANT NOTE : Initialization of the serial interface

Before using the REC block, the serial interface used has to be initalized with the
SINIT block.

Communication between several REC blocks and the same serial interface
- REC blocks of a user program which access the same serial interface must be
interlocked so that only ever one REC block is active. If this is not done, telegrams
may be processed by the wrong REC and declared invalid.
- If both user program 1 and also user program 2 contain REC blocks which access
the same serial interface, they must be interlocked so that only ever one REC block
is active. If this is not done, telegrams may be processed by the wrong REC and
declared invalid.
A telegram loss can be avoided by interlocking of the REC blocks. Interlocking must
be planned so that only the REC block is enabled for which the telegram arriving
through the interface is intended.

Communication by an REC block and a SEND block with the same serial
interface
An REC and a SEND block can use the same serial interface without special
precautions having to be taken.

QUIT BINARY
The input QUIT controls reception of telegrams and also serves the purpose of
acknowledgement in the event of an error occurring.
QUIT = 0 : Reception of telegrams enabled.
QUIT = 1 : Reception of telegrams not enabled. Acknowledgment after
reception of an invalid telegram.
If agreement with none of the stored comparison telegrams is ascertained on
comparison of a received telegram, the REC automatically assumes the “error” state.
In this case, REC no longer processes any new telegrams until the error is
acknowledged with a 1 signal at the input QUIT and reception of telegrams is
enabled again (next cycle) with a 0 signal at the input QUIT.

SSK WORD
The number of the interface through which the block receives its telegrams is
specified at the SSK input (interface identifier).
The following applies :
COM1 : number = 1
COM2 : number = 2

#ANU DIRECT CONSTANT

The number of outputs MW at which the block provides the received user information
is specified at the input #ANU (number of user information items). This is specified
as a direct constant(only used in Instruction List).

ABB Control Page C-138 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MEUN BINARY
The output MEUN (flag invalid) indicates whether or not the data at the outputs MW
is valid or invalid.
If a telegram is received and processed properly, the data at the outputs MW is
declared valid. The data at the outputs MW is declared invalid if the received
telegram does not agree with any of the stored comparison telegrams or if the
received telegram cannot be processed properly.
MEUN = 0 -> Data at the outputs MW is valid
MEUN = 1 -> Data at the outputs MW is invalid

RDY BINARY
The output RDY (ready) indicates that a telegram has been received and processed.
The output RDY does not provide any information as to whether or not a valid or
invalid telegram has been received.
RDY = 0 -> Still no telegram has been received
RDY = 1 -> A telegram has been received and processed

Brief overview of the block's parameters:

QUIT
RDY
MEUN

QUIT MEUN RDY Meaning

The EMAS is disabled by QUIT = 1. In doing so, the outputs MEUN and RDY are
1 0 0 permanently set to 0.
EMAS is enabled for reception, but still no telegram has been received and eva
0 1 0 luated.

0 0 1 EMAS has received a valid telegram and is ready to receive a new telegram.

EMAS has received an invalid telegram. An acknowledgement at the QUIT input

0 1 1 is necessary in order to be able to receive a new telegram.
QUIT: 0->1

0->1 0 0 Acknowledgement after reception of an invalid telegram. After acknowledge

ment, the EMAS is enabled again by QUIT = 0

TELN WORD
If a valid telegram is received, the number of the affiliated comparison telegram is
output through the output TELN (telegram number).

MW WORD
The output MW can be duplicated. The user data communicated in the telegram
currently received is output through the MW parameters. This user data may consist
of numerical values or any characters. This depends on which kind of dummy
parameters have been planned in the comparison telegram. The user data of a
telegram is stored beginning with the first MW parameter and in the sequence in
which they are planned in the comparison telegram. As many outputs MW must be
provided as are sufficient for the telegram with the most user data.

TEXT ALL
In IL :

ABB Control Page C-139 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The comparison telegrams to be stored in the PLC program are specified at the
inputs TEXT. The block is capable of processing from 1 to 99 telegrams. One
telegram occupies 2 inputs, each telegram number being specified at one input and
the actual telegram text being specified at the next one. The exact syntax and
handling of the comparison telegrams are described here below.

In FBD :
Text and operands to be stored are written in a comment window. Several comment
windows can be created and each comment window has a "Name" that corresponds
to the "Name" written at the TX inputs.

A comment window is called by the button in the tool bar. You have to drag the
mouse to select the rectangle area where the text must be written.
Comment may be inserted anywhere in the program.

One comment window can be composed of several messages.

The name of the comment window is NOT stored with the text and operands.
The way to write the messages is described here below and an example is given at
the end.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF COMPARISON TELEGRAMS

1...99 comparison telegrams are stored directly after the REC block.

The comparison telegrams serve to identify

- the current telegrams received
- and the user data contained in the telegrams received

Each stored comparison telegram has a telegram number to identify it and may
comprise up to 255 characters.

The comparison telegrams consist of :

- ASCII characters serving only to identify the telegram received,
- Dummy parameters for the user information to be received and to be output
through the block’s outputs.
As regards the dummy parameters for the user information, REC function block
distinguishes between dummy parameters for digits and dummy parameters for
characters.
Dummy parameter for digits : # (1 # per digit)
Dummy param. for characters : * (1 * per character/byte)

Dummy parameter for digits :

For each dummy digit parameter (#) of the comparison telegram, REC expects
precisely one ASCII coded decimal digit in the telegram to be received. Up to 5
dummy digits constitute one dummy parameter group. Such a group of dummy digits
represents the numerical value of a decimal number comprising up to 5 digits.
No dummy parameter is specified for the decimal number’s sign because REC takes
it into account automatically. The REC allocates one user information output to each
numerical value belonging to a dummy parameter group.

E.g. : Decimal number Dummy parameters

ABB Control Page C-140 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

1234 ####
+1234 ####
-1234 ####

The REC block checks the received decimal number in relation to its significant
range. Only numbers within the +32767 range can be processed in the PLC. If the
received decimal number exceeds the significant range, the REC will automatically
insert the maximum respective limit. The limit for a positive number is +32767 and
the limit is -32767 for a negative number.

Dummy parameter for characters :

For each dummy character (*) of the comparison telegram, REC expects any one
character/byte in the telegram to be received. These may comprise ASCII characters
of letters, but also all other hex values from 0...FF.
The length of a dummy character group is up to 255. If this were the case, the
complete comparison telegram would consist of dummy characters only.
REC allocates the characters/bytes received without change and successively to its
user information outputs MW.

Syntax diagram : Structure of comparison telegrams

#n #" *

TEXT

#n : Successive telegram number (direct constant 1...99)

#” : Start identifier for text input

*: Dummy parameter for character/byte

#: Dummy parameter for digits

TEXT : All ASCII characters 01 to FF except * and #

Input of comparison telegrams

- Each comparison telegram consists of :

ABB Control Page C-141 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

the telegram number

the telegram text
The telegram number and the telegram text are two separate operands. This is why
the telegram number and the telegram text occupy separate inputs in the FBD
symbol of the REC block. Therefore, two inputs are needed for one comparison
telegram.

Example :
First TEXT Input : #1 (No. of the first comparison telegram)
Second TEXT Input : #”PRINT### IDENTIFIER**** (Text of the first comparison
telegram)

- Apart from the ASCII characters for * and #, all ASCII characters are possible in the
telegram text.

- When entering special ASCII characters such as “start of line” <CR>, the following
must be observed : special characters are entered by :
\Numerical value of the character
The character’s numerical value is specified as a three-digit decimal number.

Example :
The following telegram text is to be compared : Temperature <CR> boiler 1
The following applies : <CR> = 013
The text input in the programming system is as follows :
#”temperature\013boiler 1

Note :
- The characters with the ASCII code >20H or >32D must be entered with the
keyboard. As an example, the character ”!” must be entered with the keyboard, and
not as \033.
- Characters, which are no special characters and which also could not be entered
with the keyboard, can be generated in the following way :
Press and hold down the <ALT> key, now type the numerical code (decimal code) on
the numeric keypad of the keyboard, then release the <ALT> key.
- The character with the ASCII code 255 is reserved for internal use of the
programming software and must not be used otherwise.

ABB Control Page C-142 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

RECEIVING / PROCESSING TELEGRAMS

Receiving telegrams are controlled by the QUIT input which also acknowledge
transmission errors.

The REC compares character by character a received telegram to the comparison

telegrams stored. In doing so, agreement between the dummy parameters in the
comparison telegram and the affiliated current characters in the received telegram is
checked.

Important : For REC, the telegram end identifier indicates the end of the telegram to
be received. This is why the telegram end identifier must not occur within a telegram.
This also applies to user characters received on the basis of a dummy parameter (#
or *).

Agreement
If the REC ascertains agreement between the received telegram and one of its
comparison telegrams, the following applies to the outputs :
MEUN = 0, because it has been possible to receive and process the telegram
properly
RDY = 1, because a telegram has been received and processed
TELN = Number of the relevant comparison telegram
MW = Current user data from the telegram received

The coherent digits defined by a dummy digit group in the comparison telegram are
read out of the received telegram, are combined in one numerical value and this is
output to one word operand (user information output). Text characters marked by
dummy text characters (*) in the comparison text are read out of the received
telegram and each single character/byte is output without change to a word operand
(user information output).

The user information is allocated to the outputs MW in the same sequence as the
user information occurs in the currently received telegram (see also examples).

The maximum number of user information word operands to be output is specified at

the input #ANU. The maximum number results from the telegram with the most user
information word operands to be reserved (up to 256 word operands, in which case
the telegram would consist of user information only).

Special case :
If more user information is planned in a comparison telegram than user information
outputs are available on the block, i.e. specified at the input #ANU, the received user
data is output through the user information outputs until the end of the outputs has
been reached. The remaining user data received will not be output.

The following applies in this error case :

MEUN = 1, because it has not been possible to process the telegram properly
RDY = 1, because a telegram has been received and processed
TELN = Text No. of the relevant comparison telegram
MW = The part of the current user data from the received telegram for which
the number of planned user information outputs suffices.

ABB Control Page C-143 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

No agreement
The received telegram agrees with none of the stored comparison telegrams.
The following then applies to the outputs :
MEUN = 1, because the received telegram is invalid
RDY = 1, because a telegram has been received and processing of it has been
terminated
The REC is now in the “ERROR” state. In this case, REC does not process any new
telegram until the error is acknowledged with a 1 signal at the QUIT input and the
reception of telegrams is enabled again (next cycle) with a 0 signal at the QUIT input.

Acknowledgement of the error

Set QUIT = 1 and then, in the next cycle QUIT = 0.
After reception of telegrams has been enabled, it may happen that still no telegram is
available for reception or that a telegram has not yet been received and evaluated
completely. In this case, the outputs are set as follows
• MEUN = 1 and
• RDY = 0
until a telegram has been received and processed completely.

EXAMPLE OF A COMPARISON TELEGRAMS

Text 1 : RO104
Text 2 : DO##”#”##
Special case : terminate text input and restart
If the text character (”) is used and a dummy parameter for digits
(#) follows this text character, the input must be terminated after the
text character (”). A subsequent text or dummy parameter begins
with the input identifier of a new text input (#”).
Text 3 : CO##****
Text 4 : *****###**

Note : The texts designated TEXT1, TEXT2 and TEXT3 in the example are
permanently planned texts which REC doesn’t output to user information outputs.
They serve exclusively to identify an arriving telegram.
Any sequence of texts and dummy parameters for characters and digits is possible.

ABB Control Page C-144 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Note : don’t forget the SINIT function block to initialize the serial port

FBD IL

REC
%M 000.01 QUIT
%KW 001.00 SSK MEUN %O 62.00
!BA 0
RDY %O 62.01 EMAS
%M 000.01
RECvar %KW 001.00
#1
%MW 000.00 MW VAR VAR TELN %MW 001.00 %O 62.00
%MW 000.01 MW %O 62.01
%MW 000.02 MW %MW 001.00
%MW 000.03 MW %MW 000.00
%MW 000.04 MW %MW 000.01
%MW 000.05 MW %MW 000.02
%MW 000.06 MW %MW 000.03
%MW 000.07 MW %MW 000.04
%MW 000.05
#"Text TEXT %MW 000.06
%MW 000.07
#"Text #1
#1 #"RO104
#"RO104 #2
#2 #"DO##"#"###
#"DO##"#"### #3
#3 #"CO##****
#"CO##**** #4
#4 #"*****###**
#"*****###**

Example of acknowledgment with the QUIT parameter :

%K 000.00 =
%M 000.01

&
%O 62.00
=
%O 62.01
jump1

%K 000.01 =
%M 000.01

jump1:

The following telegrams have been received and evaluated :

Example 1
RO104<CR>
The number 1 is output through the TELN output.
The MW0...MWn parameters are not written because no user information is planned.
As the received telegram has been evaluated and agrees with a comparison
telegram, the following applies :
MEUN =0
RDY =1
TELN =1

ABB Control Page C-145 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example 2
DO+12”457”<CR>
The number 2 is output through the TELN output.
The value 12 is present at the MW0 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
The value 457 is present at the MW1 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
As the received telegram has been evaluated and agrees with a comparison
telegram, the following applies :
MEUN =0
RDY =1
TELN =2
MW0 = 12
MW1 = 457

Example 3
CO-11AUTO<CR>
The number 3 is output through the TELN output.
-11 is present at the MW0 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
41H (A in ASCII) is present at the MW1 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
55H (U in ASCII) is present at the MW2 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
54H (T in ASCII) is present at the MW3 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
4FH (O in ASCII) is present at the MW4 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
As the received telegram has been evaluated and agrees with a comparison
telegram, the following applies :
MEUN =0
RDY =1
TELN =3
MW0 = -11
MW1 =A
MW2 =U
MW3 =T
MW4 =O

Example 4
TEMPO120KM<CR>
The number 4 is output through the TELN output.
54H (T in ASCII) is present at the MW0 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
45H (E in ASCII) is present at the MW1 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
4DH (M in ASCII) is present at the MW2 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
50H (P in ASCII) is present at the MW3 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
4FH (O in ASCII) is present at the MW4 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
The value 120 is present at the MW5 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
4BH (K in ASCII) is present at the MW6 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
4DH (M in ASCII) is present at the MW7 parameter as the contents of a word flag.
As the received telegram has been evaluated and agrees with a comparison
telegram, the following applies :
MEUN =0
RDY =1

ABB Control Page C-146 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

TELN =4
MW0 =T
MW1 =E
MW2 =M
MW3 =P
MW4 =O
MW5 = 120
MW6 =K
MW7 =M

Example 5
XY25OTTO<CR>
The received telegram has been evaluated, but agrees with none of the comparison
telegrams.
Therefore the following applies :
MEUN =1
RDY =1
TELN = is not allocated
Reception of further telegrams is blocked until reception of the invalid telegram is
acknowledged at the QUIT input.

SINIT INITIALIZATION AND CONFIGURATION OF THE SERIAL

INTERFACES

FBD IL

SINIT CAL SINIT (FREI,SSK,BAUD,STOP,ZL,PTY,

FREI E/O,ECHO,SBRK,FEND,ENDS,
SSK ENDE)
BAUD
STOP
ZL
PTY
E/O
ECHO
SBRK
FEND
ENDS
ENDE

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M, %K Enable processing of the block,
0 -> 1 edge
SSK WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Interface identifier (1 or 2)
BAUD WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Baud rate; 300 ... 9600 Baud
STOP WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Number of stop bits; input has
no effect
ZL WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Character length, 7 or 8 data
bits per character
PTY BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M, %K Parity, enable/disable

ABB Control Page C-147 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

E/O BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M, %K Parity even/odd

ECHO BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M, %K Echo, on/off
SBRK BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M, %K Send break character
FEND BINARY %O, %I, %S, %M, %K Enable end of text character for
transmitting direction
ENDS WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW End of text character for
transmitting direction
ENDE WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW End of text character for
receiving direction

DESCRIPTION
Serial interface initialization function block.

The serial interface COM1 is available to the user. In case of 07 KT 92 and

07 KT 93, COM2 is additionally available. These interfaces can be operated by the
PLC program (e.g. with the DRUCK and EMAS blocks).

Before using one of these interfaces, the interface must be initialized. The function
block SINIT is available for this purpose.

The function block SINIT is processed once with every 0 -> 1 edge at the FREI input.
It initializes the serial interface specified at the SSK input (COM1, COM2).

FREI BINARY
The block is run through once when a 0->1 edge is specified at the FREI input. As
the result of this, the serial interface whose number is specified at the SSK input is
initialized and the interface is then operable.

SSK WORD
The number of the interface to be initialized is specified at the input SSK.
The following applies :
COM1 : number = 1
COM2 : number = 2

BAUD WORD
The value for the baud rate is specified at the BAUD input.
Baudrate : 300 ... 9600 Baud

STOP WORD
The number of stop bits is set to 1 and can not be modified. The value for the
number of stop bits specified at the input STOP has no significance.

ZL WORD
The input ZL specifies the required character length. The character length signifies
the number of data bits per character.
7 or 8 data bits per character are possible.

PTY BINARY
The input PTY specifies whether a character is transferred with or without a parity bit.

ABB Control Page C-148 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PTY = 0 -> Transfer without parity bit

PTY = 1 -> Transfer with parity bit

E/O BINARY
The input E/O specifies whether an even or odd parity bit is required.
E/O = 0 -> Odd parity bit
E/O = 1 -> Even parity bit

ECHO BINARY
The input ECHO specifies whether the characters received through the applicable
interface are to be reflected (echoed) by the PLC. In this way, the sender of a
character, for example, can determine whether or not it has arrived correctly in the
PLC.
ECHO = 0 -> No echo, character is not reflected
ECHO = 1 -> Echo, character is reflected

SBRK BINARY
The state of the transmit line TxD can be influenced at the input SBRK (send break
character).
SBRK = 0 -> Normal state of the transmit line TxD for transfer of characters
SBRK = 1 -> Transmit line TxD set to “0”

FEND BINARY
The input FEND specifies whether or not the end of text character planned at input
ENDS is output at the same time (enable end character).
FEND = 0 -> End of text character in transmitting direction is not output
FEND = 1 -> End of text character in transmitting direction is output

ENDS WORD
A freely selectable end of text character for the transmitting direction can be
specified at the ENDS input. This end character is then appended automatically to
every text (telegram) which the DRUCK block sends to the outside world through the
serial interface. However, a precondition is that input FEND is enabled.
The end of text character is specified as a numeric value.

Example : 3 or 03H signifies <ETX>

4 or 04H signifies <EOT>
13 or 0DH signifies <CR>
10 or OAH signifies <LF>
32 or 20H signifies <SP>
...

ENDE WORD
A freely selectable end of text character for the receiving direction can be specified at
the ENDE input. When a telegram is received through the serial interface, the PLC
recognizes the end of the telegram by virtue of this end character. The end character
is specified in the same way as in the case of the ENDS input.

ABB Control Page C-149 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

6 Regulation functions
Regulation serie Ctler 40 50 90 30
functions from pages C-150 to C-169
DT1 Differentiator with delay of the 1st order x
INTK Integrator (extended) x
PI Proportional-integral controller x x x x
PIDT1 PIDT1 controller x x x
PT1 PT1 element x

DT1 DIFFERENTIATOR WITH DELAY OF THE 1ST ORDER

FBD/LD IL

CAL DT1 (x,KP,T1/T,y)

DT1
x
KP
T1/T y

PARAMETERS
x WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Controlled variable
KP WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Proportional coefficient,
specified as a percentage
T1/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Time constant scaled to cycle
time
y WORD %OW, %MW Manipulated variable

DESCRIPTION
The controlled variable x is multiplied by the proportional coefficient KP. The
proportional coefficient is specified as a percentage. If the controlled variable no
longer changes, the manipulated variable y moves towards the value 0 in an
exponentiel function. The time constant T1 specifies the time when the step
response has dropped to approximately 37% of its initial value. The value has
dropped below 1% after 5*T1.

KP * s * T1
Transfer function : F(s) =
s * T1 + 1

ABB Control Page C-150 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Transfer function:

37%

T1 t

x WORD
The operand for the controlled variable (input value for the DT1 function) is specified
at the input x.

KP WORD
The proportional coefficient is specified at the input KP. This value is specified as a
percentage and can be positive or negative.
Example : 1 = 1 Percent
55 = 55 Percent
100 = 100 Percent
1000 = 1000 Percent
-100 = -100 Percent
100 percent means that the input x is not influenced by the proportional coefficient.

T1/T WORD
The time constant of the DT1 function is specified at the input T1/T.To do this, the
time constant T1 must be scaled to the PLC cycle time T.
The following applies to T1/TZ : 10 < T1/TZ < 32767 -> T1 > 10 * TZ
If a negative value is specified for T1/T, then the PLC automatically sets T1/T to the
maximum positive value +32767.

y WORD
The manipulated variable (output value of the DT1 function) is output through the
output y.

INTK INTEGRATOR (EXTENDED)

ABB Control Page C-151 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD/LD IL

CAL INTK (x,TI/T,R,STOP,S,INIT,K,

INTK OG,UG,y,y=OG,y=UG)
x
K
TI/T
OG
UG
STOP
S y=OG
INIT y=UG
R y

PARAMETERS
x WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Controlled variable
K WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Proportional coefficient, output
as a percentage
TI/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Integration time scaled to the
cycle time
OG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW High limit for the manipulated
variable y
UG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Low limit for the manipulated
variable y
STOP BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Integrator stop
S BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Set output to INIT value
INIT WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Initial value
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset output y to the value 0
y=OG BINARY %O, %M Output y has reached top limit
y=UG BINARY %O, %M Output y has reached low limit
y WORD %OW, %MW Manipulated variable

DESCRIPTION
This block generates the integral of the controlled variable x multiplied by the
proportinal coefficient K.

The integrator’s output y can be manipulated as follows :

• It can be set to the value 0 by a 1 signal at the input R (reset)
• It can be latched to the current value by a 1 signal at the input STOP
• It can be set to the initial value at the INIT input by a 1 signal at the input S (set)
• It can be limited to a maximum value specified at the input OG (high limit)
• It can be limited to a minimum value specified at the input UG (low limit)

Transfer function :

ABB Control Page C-152 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

K
F (S) =
S*T

INIT
TI

x WORD
The operand for the controlled variable is specified at the input x.

K WORD
The proportional coefficient is specified at the input K. It serves to weight the
controlled variable at the input x. Weighting is achieved by multiplying the controlled
variable by the proportional coefficient.
The proportional coefficient is specified as a percentage.

Example : 1 = 1 Percent
55 = 55 Percent
100 = 100 Percent
1000 = 1000 Percent
-100 = -100 Percent
• 1 percent means that the block multiplies the value at input x by the factor 0.01
• 100 percent means that the block multiplies the value at input x by the factor 1

ABB Control Page C-153 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

• 1000 percent means that the block multiplies the value at input x by the factor 10

TI/T WORD
The integration time is specified at the input TI/T. It must be scaled to the cycle time.
During the time TI the output y of the integrator changes by the value K * x.
Value range : 0 < TI/T < 328
• If values which are beyond the admissible value range are specified, the PLC uses
the value 328.
• A large integration time (TI) can be achieved by choosing a great cycle time, too. If
the block is used within a run number block, the cycle time of the run number block is
valid for block INTK and not the cycle time (%KD 0,0) of the PLC program.

OG WORD
The manipulated variable y can be limited to a value range. The high limit for the
manipulated variable y is specified at the input OG.

UG WORD
The manipulated variable y can be limited to a value range. The low limit for the
manipulated variable y is specified at the input UG.

STOP BINARY *)
Integration can be stopped with the STOP input.
STOP = 0 -> integration is not stopped
STOP = 1 -> integration is stopped, i.e. the output y no longer changes.

S BINARY *)
By means of the input S, the manipulated variable y can be set to the initial value
specified at the input INIT. Integration then again begins as from the initial value.
S = 0 -> No setting
S = 1 -> Output y is set to the specified initial value

INIT WORD
The initial value to which the output y must be set when required is specified at the
input INIT.

R BINARY *)
With the input R, the output y can be reset to the value 0. Integration then again
begins as from the value 0.

*) Priority sequence for the inputs STOP, S and R : R Highest priority

STOP
S Lowest priority

y=OG BINARY
Whether the value at the output y has reached the specified top limit is signalled at
the output y=OG. Integration is stopped automatically when the limit is reached.
y=OG = 0 -> y has not reached the limit
y=OG = 1 -> y has reached the limit

y=UG BINARY

ABB Control Page C-154 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Whether the value at the output y has reached, the specified lower limit is signalled
at the output y=UG. Integration is stopped automatically when the limit is reached.
y=UG = 0 -> y has not reached the limit
y=UG = 1 -> y has reached the limit

y WORD
The manipulated variable (output value of the integrator) is output through the output
y.

PI PROPORTIONAL-INTEGRAL-CONTROLLER

FBD IL

PI CAL PI (w,x,KP,TN/T,INIT,S,R,
OG,UG,y,y=OG,y=UG)
w
x
KP
TN/T
OG
UG
S y=OG
INIT y=UG
R y

PARAMETERS
w WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Command variable (setpoint)
x WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Controlled variable (actual
value)
KP WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Proportional coefficient;
specified as a %
TN/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Integral action time scaled to
the PLC cycle time
OG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW High limit for the manipulated
variable y
UG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Low limit for the manipulated
variable y
S BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Enabling for setting the
manipulated variable y to the
initial value INIT
INIT WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Initial value for the manipulated
variable y
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset of the manipulated
variable y to the value 0
y=OG BINARY %O, %M High limit has been reached
y=UG BINARY %O, %M Low limit has been reached
y WORD %OW, %MW Output for the manipulated
variable y

ABB Control Page C-155 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The PI controller changes the value at its output y (manipulated variable) until the
value at the input x (controlled variable) is equal to the value at the input w
(command variable).

Control algorithm : Simple rectangle rule

KP w − x KP
Y= * + YI(z − 1) + * (w − x)
100 TN / T 100

Where :YI(z-1) is the integral component from the previous

program cycle

1
Transfer function : F(s) = KP * (1 + )
s * TN

ABB Control Page C-156 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

XD= w -x

t1 t

INIT

t1 t

Integr.comp. limit ed
because Y = OG
INIT TN

Int egr.component

Int egr.comp.(t1)= INIT-KP * XD

PI controller : Surge-free transition from the specified initial value to control

operation

ABB Control Page C-157 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

XD= w -x
1

t1 t

KP(t 1)

t1 t

INIT

t1 t

KP* XD
Y

Y1 = INIT + KP *
Y1

Int egral
component

INIT Int egr.comp.(t 1)= INIT

t1 t

PI controller : Surging transition from the specified initial value to control operation

w WORD

ABB Control Page C-158 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The command variable (setpoint) is specified at the input w.

x WORD
The controlled variable (actual value) is specified at the input x.

KP WORD
The proportional coefficient is specified at the input KP. This value is specified as a
percentage and may be positive or negative.
Example : 1 = 1 Percent
55 = 55 Percent
100 = 100 Percent
1000 = 1000 Percent
-500 = -500 Percent
• 1 percent means that the block multiplies the system deviation by the factor 0.01
(see also control algoritm)
• 100 percent means that the block multiplies the system deviation by the factor 1
(see also control algoritm)
• 1000 percent means that the block multiplies the system deviation by the factor 10
(see also control algoritm)
Generally, proportional coefficients of more than 1000% are not meaningful in control
systems.

TN/T WORD
The integral action time TN is scaled to the PLC cycle time T and is specified at the
input TN/T.
Value range : 0 < TN/T < 328
• If values which are beyond the admissible value range are specified, the PLC uses
the value 328.
• A large integral action time TN can be achieved by choosing a great cycle time T,
too. If the block is used within a run number block, the cycle time of the run number
block is valid for block PI and not the cycle time (%KD 0,0) of the PLC program.

Limiting the manipulated variable y

OG WORD
UG WORD
The output y (manipulated variable) of the controller can be limited
- To a maximum value by specifying a limit at the input OG (high limit);
- To a minimum value by specifying a limit at the input UG (low limit)
The high and low limits also apply to the controller’s internal I component. That is to
say, the I component can only assume values between the high and low limits. If the
manipulated variable y reaches one of the two limits, the controller’s I component is
no longer altered. This prevents the I component from running amock in the event of
limiting of the controller output y, assuming meaningless values from the point of
view of control and, in certain circumstances, not returning to the operating range
until after a very long time. This response of a controller is also referred to as a
“special anti-reset windup measure”.

Setting and resetting the controller

S BINARY
INIT WORD

ABB Control Page C-159 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

R BINARY
Setting the controller to an initial value
- The output y of the controller is set to the initial value specified at the INIT input by
means of a 1 signal at the input S (set).
- A 1 signal at the input R (reset) is equivalent to specifying the initial value 0 (see
above).

In doing so, adjustment to the initial value takes place internally in the controller. This
adjustment is a shift of the controller output from the momentary value to the
required initial value. Now, the controller continues operating from this initial value
precisely as it would have done at the old operating point before the shift, i.e. without
surges. The controller’s I component is defined so that the sum of the P component
and the I component just results in the initial value.

Advantage of surge-free operation :

- Control as from the new initial value is devoid of surges.

Disadvantage of surge-free operation :

- The following equation applies : I_component = INIT - P_component
In certain circumstances, the I component is set to high values and may take very
long before this “wrong” I component from the point of view of control is dissipated
again.

In the event of surging setting or resetting of the controller the I component is set
equal to the initial value. To do this, the P component must be suppressed during
setting.
Where : I component = INIT
Surging setting to an initial value is achieved by the following measure during setting:
- Specifying the value 0 at the input KP.
This measure renders the P component inactive. The controller output y assumes
the initial value during the set cycle.

The P component is enabled again after the set cycle. From the initial value, the
controller output y jumps according to the P component of the controller.

Advantage of surging setting :

- The I component is not set to “wrong” values from the point of view of control.

Disadvantage of surging setting :

- No freedom from surging

ABB Control Page C-160 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

y WORD
The controller’s manipulated variable y is output through the output y.

y=OG BINARY
The output y=OG signals whether or not the value at the output y has exceeded the
specified high limit.
y=OG = 0 limit has not been reached.
y=OG = 1 limit has been reached.

y=UG BINARY
The output y=UG signals whether or not the value at the output y has reached the
specified low limit.
y=UG = 0 limit has not been reached.
y=UG = 1 limit has been reached.

PIDT1 PIDT1 CONTROLLER

FBD IL

CAL PIDT1 (w,x,KP,TN/T,TV/T,T1/T

PIDT1
w D-FR,INIT,S,R,OG,UG,y
x y=OG,y=UG)
KP
TN/T
TV/T
T1/T
D-FR
OG
UG
S y=OG
INIT y=UG
R y

PARAMETERS
w WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Command variable (setpoint)
x WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Controlled variable (actual
value)
KP WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Proportional coefficient,
specified as a percentage
TN/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Integral action time scaled to
the PLC cycle time
TV/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Derivative action time scaled to
the PLC cycle time
T1/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Returning time scaled to the
PLC cycle time
D-FR BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Enable DT1 component
OG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW High limit for the manipulated
variable y
UG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Low limit for the manipulated

ABB Control Page C-161 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

variable y
S BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Enable for setting to initial
value INIT
INIT WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Initial value for the manipulated
variable y
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset the manipulated variable
y to the value 0
y=OG BINARY %O, %M High value has been reached
y=UG BINARY %O, %M Low value has been reached
y WORD %OW, %MW Output for manipulated variable
y

DESCRIPTION
The PI controller changes its output y (manipulated variable) until the input x
(controlled variable) is equal to the input w (command variable).

1 s * TV
Transfer function : F(s) = KP * (1 + + )
s * TN 1 + (s * T1)

Control algorithm : simple rectangle rule :

KP* XD KP XD T1/ TZ 1 TV KP
y= + * + YI( z −1) + * ç YDT1( z −1) + * * * ( XD − XD( z −1) )÷
100 100 TN/ TZ 1+ ( T1/ TZ) T1/ TZ TZ 100
where :
YI(z-1) : integral portion from the previous program cycle
YDT1(z-1) : differential portion from the previous program cycle
XD(z-1) : control system difference from the previous program cycle

ABB Control Page C-162 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

XD=w-x

t1 t

t1
t

D-FR

t1 t

KP(T1)

t1 t

INIT

t1 t

Y
OG

INIT
Integr.compon. limi-
ted because Y=OG

DT1 Comp. Integral compon.

TN Integr.comp.(t1)+KP*XD

P Comp

TV
__
Integr.comp.(t1)=INIT-KP*XD*(1+ )
T1

t1 t

PIDT1 controller : Surge-free transition from the specified intitial value to

control mode

ABB Control Page C-163 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

XD=w-x
1

t1 t

D-FR

t1 t

KP(T1)

t1 t

INIT

t1 t

Y
OG
TV
__
Y2 = Y1 + KP * * XD
T1
Y2
Integr. comp. limi-
ted because Y=OG

DT1 Comp.
Integral comp.

Y1 TN Y1 = INIT + KP * XD

P Comp.

INIT Integr.component(t1) = INIT

t1 t

PIDT1 controller : Surging transition from the specified initial value to control
mode

ABB Control Page C-164 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

w WORD
The command variable (setpoint) is specified at the input w.

x WORD
The controlled variable (actual value) is specified at the input x.

TN/T WORD
The integral action time TN is scaled to the PLC cycle time T and is specified at the
input TN/T.
Value range : 0 < TN/T < 328
• If values which are beyond the admissible value range are specified, the PLC uses
the value 328.
• A large integral action time TN can be achieved by choosing a great cycle time T,
too. If the block is used within a run number block, the cycle time of the run number
block is valid for block PIDT1 and not the cycle time (%KD 0,0) of the PLC program.

TV/T WORD
The derivative action time TV is scaled to the PLC cycle time T and is specified at
the input TV/T(0 < TV/T < 32767).

T1/T WORD
The returning time T1 is scaled to the PLC cycle time T and is specified at the input
T1/T(0 < T1/T < 32767). The returning time is the time in which the DT1 component
has decreased to approximately 37% of its initial value.
Inadmissible time parameters :
Every time value is set to the maximum positive value 32767 if the time value at the
input is erroneously specified as less than or equal to “0”.

D-FR WORD
The DT1 component of the controller can be connected or deactivated by means of
the D-FR input.
D-FR = 0 The DT1 component is deactivated -> pure PI controller
D-FR = 1 The DT1 component is connected -> PIDT1 controller

ABB Control Page C-165 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

In the following cases, from the control point of view it is often disturbing and not
meaningful for the DT1 component to be active :
- During activations
- In the event of large system deviations
- When setting the controller to a specified initial value
- When resetting the controller to the value 0

The command and controlled variables can be compared outside of the controller.
Depending on this comparison, the DT1 component can be activated or deactivated
specifically by way of the D-FR input.

For example, activation can be restricted to ensuring that the system deviation is
within a required bandwidth. That is to say, the DT1 component is only active if the
controlled variable fluctuates around the setpoint within a specific bandwidth. The
DT1 component is deactivated if the controlled variable leaves this tolerance band.

Limiting the maniulated variable y

This prevents the I component from running amock in the event of limiting of the
controller output y, assuming meaningless values from the point of view of control
and, in certain circumstances, not returning to the operating range until after a very
long time. This response of a controller is also referred to as a “special anti-reset
windup measure (ARW)”.

Setting and resetting the controller

S BINARY
INIT WORD
R BINARY
Setting the controller to an initial value
- The output y of the controller is set to the initial value specified at the INIT input by
means of a 1 signal at the input S (set).
- A 1 signal at the input R (reset) is equivalent to specifying the initial value 0 (see
above).

Surge-free setting/resetting
- The output y of the controller is set to the initial value specified at the input INIT by
means of a 1 signal at the binary input S (set).
- A 1 signal at the input R (reset) is equivalent to specifying the initial value 0.
In doing so, adjustment to the initial value takes place internally in the controller. This
adjustment is a shift of the controller output from the momentary value to the

ABB Control Page C-166 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

required initial value. Now, the controller continues operating from this initial value
precisely as it would have done at the old operating point before the shift, i.e. without
surges. The controller’s I component is defined so that the sum of the P component,
I component and DT1 component just results in the initial value.

Advantage of surge-free operation :

- Control as from the new initial value is devoid of surges.

Disadvantage of surge-free operation :

- The following equation applies :
I component = INIT - P component - DT1 component
In certain circumstances, the I component is set to high values and may take very
long before this “wrong” I component from the point of view of control is dissipated
again.

Surging setting/resetting
- The output y of the controller is set to the initial value specified at the INIT input by
means of a 1 signal at the input S (set).
- A 1 signal at the input R (reset) is equivalent to specifying the initial value 0.
- In the event of surging setting or resetting of the controller, the I component is set
equal to the initial value. To do this, the P and DT1 components must be suppressed
during setting.
Where : I component = INIT

Surging setting to an initial value is achieved by the following measures during

setting :
- Deactivation of the DT1 component via the D-FR control input and
- Specifying the value 0 at the input KP.
These measures render the P component and the DT1 component inactive during
setting of the controller.
The controller output assumes the initial value during the set cycle.
The P and DT1 components are enabled again after the set cycle. From the initial
value, the controller output y jumps according to the P and DT1 components of the
controller.

Advantage of surging setting :

- The I component is not set to “wrong” values from the point of view of control.

Disadvantage of surging setting :

- No freedom from surging

y WORD
The controller’s manipulated variable y is output through the output y.

y=OG BINARY
The output y=OG signals whether or not the value at the output y has reached the
specified high limit.
y=OG = 0 limit has not been reached.
y=OG = 1 limit has been reached.

ABB Control Page C-167 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

y=UG BINARY
The output y=UG signals whether or not the value at the output y has reached the
specified low limit.
y=UG = 0 limit has not been reached.
y=UG = 1 limit has been reached.

PT1 PT1 ELEMENT

FBD/LD IL

CAL PT1 (x,T1/T,y)

PT1
x
T1/T y

PARAMETERS
x WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Controlled variable
T1/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Time constant
y WORD %OW, %MW Manipulated variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block realizes a delay element of the first order.

Transfer function :
1
F=
1 + T1 * S

ABB Control Page C-168 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Transfer funktion:
x

T1 t

x WORD
The controlled variable is specified at the input x.

T1/T WORD
The delay time T1 is specified at the input T1/T. At the same time, the delay time T1
must be scaled to the cycle time T.
T1/T > 0 must apply
If a negative time value is specified erroneously, the PLC automatically sets the
value 32767 for T1/T.

y WORD
The result of the delay element (manipulated variable) is output through the output y.

7 Format conversion functions

tler
Format serie C 40 50 90 30
conversion
functions from pages C-169 to C-196
BCDDUAL / BCD to binary conversion x x x x
BCDBIN
BCDDUALD / BCD to binary conversion, double word x
BCDDW
DUALBCD / Binary to BCD conversion x x x x
BINBCD
DUABCDD / Binary to BCD conversion, double word x
DWBCD
DWW Double word to word conversion x x x x
PACK4 Pack 4 binary variables in a word x x x x
PACK8 Pack 8 binary variables in a word x x x x

ABB Control Page C-169 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PACK16 Pack 16 binary variables in a word x x x x

PACKD4 Pack 4 binary variables in a double word x
PACKD8 Pack 8 binary variables in a double word x
PACKD16 Pack 16 binary variables in a double x
word
PACKD24 Pack 24 binary variables in a double x
word
PACKD32 Pack 32 binary variables in a double x
word
UNPACK4 Unpacking a word into 4 binary variables x x x x
UNPACK8 Unpacking a word into 8 binary variables x x x x
UNPACK16 Unpacking a word into 16 binary x x x x
variables
UNPACKD4 Unpacking a double word into 4 binary x
variables
UNPACKD8 Unpacking a double word into 8 binary x
variables
UNPACKD16 Unpacking a double word into 16 binary x
variables
UNPACKD24 Unpacking a double word into 24 binary x
variables
UNPACKD32 Unpacking a double word into 32 binary x
variables
WDW Word to double word conversion x x x x

BCDDUAL BCD TO BINARY CONVERSION

FBD IL

CAL BCDDUAL(BCD,DUAL)
BCDDUAL or
!BA0
BCD DUAL
BCDBIN
BCD
DUAL

PARAMETERS
BCD WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW BCD-coded number
DUAL WORD %OW,%MW Binary number

DESCRIPTION
The positive BCD coded number at the input BCD is converted to a binary number
and is allocated to the operand at the DUAL output.

Definition :
The significance of the digits in a BCD coded number and a hexadecimal number is

ABB Control Page C-170 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

defined as follows :
BCD-NUMBER HEXDEC-NUMBER

15 11 7 3 0 BIT 15 11 7 3 0

Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1

Numerical value: Numerical value:

Z1 * 1 Z1 * 1
Z2 * 10 Z2 * 16
Z3 * 100 Z3 * 256
Z4 * 1000 Z4 * 4096

0 < Zi < 9 0 < Zi < F

Note :
At the BCD input, the block additionally also accepts digits to which the following
applies : 0 < Zi < F

ABB Control Page C-171 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example 1
BCD NUMBER HEXDEC NUMBER

15 11 7 3 0 BIT 15 11 7 3 0

1 2 3 4 0 4 D 2

Z1 = 4 *1 = 4 Z1 = 2 * 1 = 2
Z2 = 3 * 10 = 30 Z2 = 13 * 16 = 208
Z3 = 2 * 100 = 200 Z3 = 4 * 256 = 1024
Z4 = 1 * 1000 = 1000 Z4 = - * - =

+ 1234 + 1234

Example 2
BCD NUMBER HEXDEC NUMBER

15 11 7 3 0 BIT 15 11 7 3 0

A 2 F 4 2 8 7 2

Z1 = 4 *1 = 4 Z1 = 2 *1 = 2
Z2 = 15 * 10 = 150 Z2 = 7 * 16 = 112
Z3 = 2 * 100 = 200 Z3 = 8 * 256 = 2048
Z4 = 10 * 1000 = 10000 Z4 = 2 * 4096 = 8192

+ 10354 + 10354

Representation of a negative BCD number

A negative BCD number can be represented in the PLC by separate representation
of the value and the sign. In doing so, the value of the BCD number is stored in a
word variable and the information about the sign is stored in a binary variable.

Example :
Representation of the BCD number -7 :
%MW 02,00 = 7 Value of the number, BCD coded
%M 01,00 = 1 Sign of the number • Positive : 0
• Negative : 1

ABB Control Page C-172 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Conversion of a negative BCD number to a negative binary number

Example:

Sign AWT
Value BCDDUAL %M 01,00 0/1
%MW 02,00 BCD DUAL 0
positive BINARY

= Signed binary number

1 %MW 02,01
neg. BINARY

BCDDUALD BCD TO BINARY CONVERSION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL BCDDUALD(BCD,DUAL)
or
BCDDUALD !BA0
BCD DUAL
BCDDW
BCD
DUAL

PARAMETERS
BCD DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD BCD coded number
DUAL DOUBLE WORD %MD Binary number

DESCRIPTION
The positive BCD coded number at the input BCD is converted to a binary number
and is allocated to the operand at the DUAL output.

Definition
The significance of the digits in a BCD coded number and a hexadecimal number is
defined as follows :

ABB Control Page C-173 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

BINARY NUMBER HEXDEC NUMBER

31 15 0 BIT 31 15 0

Z8 Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z8 Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1

Numerical value: Numerical value:

Z1 * 1 Z1 * 1
Z2 * 10 Z2 * 16
Z3 * 100 Z3 * 256
Z4 * 1000 Z4 * 4096
Z5 * 10000 Z5 * 65536
Z6 * 100000 Z6 * 1048576
Z7 * 1000000 Z7 * 16777216
Z8 * 10000000 Z8 * 268435456

0 < Zi < 9 0 < Zi < F

Note :
The block also accepts digits at the BCD input to which the following applies :
0 < Zi < F

Representation of a negative BCD number

See function block BCDDUAL

Conversion of a negative BCD number to a negative binary number

See function block BCDDUAL

Example 1: Example 2:

BCD NUMBER HEXDEC NUMBER BCD NUMBER HEXDEC NUMBER

31 15 0 BIT 31 15 0 31 15 0 BIT 31 15 0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 0 B C 6 1 4 E 1 B 3 4 A 2 F 4 0 1 4 5 C 7 D 2

Z1 = 8 *1 = 8 Z1 =14 * 1 = 14 Z1 = 4 * 1 = 4 Z1 = 2 * 1 = 2
Z2 = 7 * 10 = 70 Z2 = 4 * 16 = 64 Z2 = 15 * 10 = 150 Z2 =13 * 16 = 208
Z3 = 6 * 100 = 600 Z3 = 1 * 256 = 256 Z3 = 2 * 100 = 200 Z3 = 7 * 256 = 1792
Z4 = 5 * 1000 = 5000 Z4 = 6 * 4096 = 24576 Z4 = 10 * 1000 = 10000 Z4 =12 * 4096 = 49152
Z5 = 4 * 10000 = 40000 Z5 =12 * 65536 = 786432 Z5 = 4 * 10000 = 40000 Z5 = 5 * 65536 = 327680
Z6 = 3 * 100000 = 300000 Z6 =11 * 1048576 = 11534336 Z6 = 3 * 100000 = 300000 Z6 = 4 * 1048576 = 4194304
Z7 = 2 * 1000000 = 2000000 Z7 = 0 * 16777216 = 0 Z7 = 11 * 1000000 = 11000000 Z7 = 1 * 16777216 = 16777216
Z8 = 1 * 10000000 = 10000000 Z8 = 0 * 268435456 = 0 Z8 = 1 * 10000000 = 10000000 Z8 = 0 * 268435456 = 0

+ 12345678 + 12345678 + 21350354 + 21350354

ABB Control Page C-174 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DUALBCD BINARY TO BCD CONVERSION

FBD IL

CAL DUALBCD (DUAL,BCD)

DUALBCD or
DUAL BCD !BA0
BINBCD
DUAL
BCD

PARAMETERS
DUAL WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Binary number
BCD WORD %OW,%MW BCD coded number

DESCRIPTION
The binary number at the DUAL input is converted to a BCD coded number and is
allocated to the operand at the output BCD.

The binary number is represented in 16 bits and must lie within the range
0 < DUAL < 270FH (corresponding to BCD 9999). The BCD number is limited to
9999 if it lies outside this range. The BCD number is stored in a 16-bit word.

Definition :
The significance of the digits in a hexidecimal number and a BCD coded number is
defined as follows :

HEXDEC NUMBER BCD NUMBER

15 11 7 3 0 BIT 15 11 7 3 0

Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1

Numerical value: Numerical value:

Z1 * 1 Z1 * 1
Z2 * 16 Z2 * 10
Z3 * 256 Z3 * 100
Z4 * 4096 Z4 * 1000

0 < Zi < F 0 < Zi < 9

ABB Control Page C-175 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example :

HEXDEC NUMBER BCD NUIMBER

15 11 7 3 0 BIT 15 11 7 3 0

0 4 D 2 1 2 3 4

Z1 = 2 * 1 = 2 Z1 = 4 *1 = 4
Z2 = 13 * 16 = 208 Z2 = 3 * 10 = 30
Z3 = 4 * 256 = 1024 Z3 = 2 * 100 = 200
Z4 = 0 * 4096 = 0 Z4 = 1 * 1000 = 1000

+ 1234 + 1234

Conversion of a negative binary number to a BCD number

A negative binary number with an amount less than 270FH can be converted to a
BCD number, whereby the value and the sign of the BCD number are each stored in
one flag.

Example : Converting positive and negative binary numbers

DUALBCD BCD number

%M 03,01

BETR Binary number

Binary number amount <>
%MW 03,00 %M 01,00
BCD number
1: negative
0: positive

Converting a binary number with an amount higher than 270FH

Binary numbers with an amount higher than 270FH are first of all converted to a
double word (function block WDW). They are then converted from BINARY to BCD
by means of the DUALBCDD function block.

Example

WDW DUALBCDD
%MW 03,00 %MD 03,00

The same procedure as above applies if a sign has to be taken into account.

ABB Control Page C-176 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DUALBCDD BINARY TO BCD CONVERSION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL DUALBCDD(DUAL,BCD)
or
DUALBCDD !BA0
DUAL BCD
DWBCD
DUAL
BCD

PARAMETERS
DUAL DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Binary number
BCD DOUBLE WORD %MD BCD coded number

DESCRIPTION
The binary number at the input DUAL is converted to a BCD coded number and is
allocated to the operand at the output BCD.

The binary number is represented in 32 bits and must lie within the range
0 < DUAL < 5F5E0FFH (corresponding to BCD 99 999 999).
if the BCD number lies outside of this range, it is limited to 99 999 999. The BCD
number is stored in a 32-bit word.

Definition
The significance of the digits in a hexadecimal number and a BCD coded number is
defined as follows :
HEXDEC NUMBER BCD NUMBER

31 15 0 BIT 31 15 0

Z8 Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z8 Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1

Numerical value: Numerical value:

Z1 * 1 Z1 * 1
Z2 * 16 Z2 * 10
Z3 * 256 Z3 * 100
Z4 * 4096 Z4 * 1000
Z5 * 65536 Z5 * 10000
Z6 * 1048576 Z6 * 100000
Z7 * 16777216 Z7 * 1000000
Z8 * 268435456 Z8 * 10000000

0 < Zi < F 0 < Zi < 9

ABB Control Page C-177 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example:

HEXDEC NUMBER BCD NUMBER

31 15 0 BIT 31 15 0

0 0 B C 6 1 4 E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 =14 * 1 = 14 Z1 = 8 *1 = 8
2 = 4 * 16 = 64 Z2 = 7 * 10 = 70
3 = 1 * 256 = 256 Z3 = 6 * 100 = 600
4 = 6 * 4096 = 24576 Z4 = 5 * 1000 = 5000
5 =12 * 65536 = 786432 Z5 = 4 * 10000 = 40000
6 =11 * 1048576 = 11534336 Z6 = 3 * 100000 = 300000
7 = 0 * 16777216 = 0 Z7 = 2 * 1000000 = 2000000
8 = 0 * 268435456 = 0 Z8 = 1 * 10000000 = 10000000

+ 12345678 + 12345678

Converting a negative binary number to a BCD number

See function block DUALBCD

DWW DOUBLE WORD TO WORD CONVERSION

FBD/LD IL

CAL DWW (E1,A1,Q)

DWW
E1 A1
Q

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Double word variable to be
WORD converted
A1 WORD %OW, %MW Result of conversion, word
variable
Q BINARY %O, %M Result limited

DESCRIPTION
The value of the double word operand at the input E1 is converted to a word variable
and the result is allocated to the word operand at the output A1.

The result is limited to the maximum or minimum number range.

Max. number range : +32 767 (7FFFH)

ABB Control Page C-178 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Min. number range : -32 767 (8001H)

If limiting has taken place, a 1 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the output
Q. If no limiting has taken place, a 0 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the
output Q.

If the value of the operand at the input E1 lies outside of the permissible number
range (value 8000 0000H), the converted value is set to -32 767 (8001H).

PACK4 PACK 4 BINARY VARIABLES IN A WORD

FBD IL

CAL PACK4 (B0,B1,B2,B3,WORD)

PACK4
B0
B1 WORD
B2
B3

PARAMETERS
B0...B3 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 4 binary variables to be
packed;
WORD WORD %OW, %MW Word variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 4 binary variables in one word variable.

B0-B3 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B3.

WORD WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B3 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 3) of the variable at the output WORD.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
B2 -> bit 2 of the output variable
B3 -> bit 3 of the output variable

Note : The bits 4 to 15 of the output variable are occupied with the value 0.

PACK8 PACK 8 BINARY VARIABLES IN A WORD

ABB Control Page C-179 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL PACK8 (B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,WORD)

PACK8
B0
B1 WORD
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

PARAMETERS
B0...B7 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 8 binary variables to be
packed;
WORD WORD %OW, %MW Word variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 8 binary variables in one word variable.

B0-B3 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B7.

WORD WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B7 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 7) of the variable at the output WORD.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
. . . .
B7 -> bit 7 of the output variable

Note : The bits 8 to 15 of the output variable are occupied with the value 0.

PACK16 PACK 16 BINARY VARIABLES IN A WORD

ABB Control Page C-180 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL PACK16 (B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,B8,B9,

PACK16 B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15,WORD)
B0
B1 WORD
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

PARAMETERS
B0...B15 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 16 binary variables to be
packed;
WORD WORD %OW, %MW Word variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 16 binary variables in one word variable.

B0-B3 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B15.

WORD WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B15 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 15) of the variable at the output WORD.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
. . . .
B15 -> bit 15 of the output variable

PACKD4 PACK 4 BINARY VARIABLES IN A DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-181 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL PACKD4 (B0,B1,B2,B3,DW)

PACKD4
B0
B1 DW
B2
B3

PARAMETERS
B0...B3 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 4 binary variables to be
packed;
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 4 binary variables in one double word variable.

B0-B3 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B3.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B3 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 3) of the variable at the output DW.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
B2 -> bit 2 of the output variable
B3 -> bit 3 of the output variable

Note : The bits 4 to 31 of the output variable are occupied with the value 0.

PACKD8 PACK 8 BINARY VARIABLES IN A DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-182 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL PACKD8 (B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,DW)

PACKD8
B0
B1 DW
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

PARAMETERS
B0...B7 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 8 binary variables to be
packed;
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 8 binary variables in one double word variable.

B0-B7 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B7.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B7 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 7) of the variable at the output DW.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
. . . .
B7 -> bit 7 of the output variable

Note : The bits 8 to 31 of the output variable are occupied with the value 0.

PACKD16 PACK 16 BINARY VARIABLES IN A DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-183 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL PACKD16 (B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,B8,B9,

PACKD16 B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15,DW)
B0
B1 DW
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

PARAMETERS
B0...B15 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 16 binary variables to be
packed;
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 16 binary variables in one double word variable.

B0-B15 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B15.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B15 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 15) of the variable at the output DW.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
. . . .
B15 -> bit 15 of the output variable

Note : The bits 16 to 31 of the output variable are occupied with the value 0.

PACKD24 PACK 24 BINARY VARIABLES IN A DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-184 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL PACKD24 (B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,B8

PACKD24 ,B9,B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15,B16,B17,B18,
B0 B19,B20,B21,B22,B23,DW)
B1 DW
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23

PARAMETERS
B0...B23 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 24 binary variables to be
packed;
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 24 binary variables in one double word variable.

B0-B23 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B23.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B23 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 23) of the variable at the output DW.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
. . . .

ABB Control Page C-185 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

B23 -> bit 23 of the output variable

Note : The bits 24 to 31 of the output variable are occupied with the value 0.

PACKD32 PACK 32 BINARY VARIABLES IN A WORD

FBD IL

CAL PACKD32 (B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,B8,B9,B10,

PACKD32 B11,B12,B13,B14,B15,B16,B17,B18,
B0 B19,B20,B21,B22,B23,B24,B25,B26,
B1 DW B27,B28,B29,B30,B31,DW)
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31

PARAMETERS
B0...B31 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S The 32 binary variables to be
packed;
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block packs 32 binary variables in one double word variable.

ABB Control Page C-186 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

B0-B31 BINARY
The binary variables to be packed are specified at the inputs B0...B31.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The value of each binary variable at the inputs B0...B31 is loaded into the
corresponding bit (bit 0 ... bit 31) of the variable at the output DW.

Affiliations
B0 -> bit 0 of the output variable
B1 -> bit 1 of the output variable
. . . .
B31 -> bit 31 of the output variable

UNPACK4 UNPACKING A WORD INTO 4 BINARY VARIABLES

FBD IL

CAL UNPACK4 (WORD,B0,B1,B2,B3)

UNPACK4
WORD
B0
B1
B2
B3

PARAMETERS
WORD WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Word variable to be unpacked
B0...B3 BINARY %O, %M The 4 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the word variable at the input WORD. The bit 0 to bit 4
of the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B3.

WORD WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input WORD. Each bit (bit 0...bit 3) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B3).

B0-B3 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input WORD are allocated to the binary
outputs B0...B3.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1

ABB Control Page C-187 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Input variable Bit2 -> B2

Input variable Bit3 -> B3

UNPACK8 UNPACKING A WORD INTO 8 BINARY VARIABLES

FBD IL

CAL UNPACK8 (WORD,B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7)

UNPACK8
WORD
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

PARAMETERS
WORD WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Word variable to be unpacked
B0...B7 BINARY %O, %M The 8 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the word variable at the input WORD. The bit 0 to bit 7
of the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B7.

WORD WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input WORD. Each bit (bit 0...bit 7) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B7).

B0-B7 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input WORD are allocated to the binary
outputs B0...B7.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1
. . .
Input variable Bit7 -> B7

UNPACK16 UNPACKING A WORD INTO 16 BINARY VARIABLES

ABB Control Page C-188 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL UNPACK16 (WORD,B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,

UNPACK16 B8,B9,B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15)
WORD
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

PARAMETERS
WORD WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Word variable to be unpacked
B0...B15 BINARY %O, %M The 16 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the word variable at the input WORD. The bit 0 to bit 15
of the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B15.

WORD WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input WORD. Each bit (bit 0...bit 15)
of this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B15).

B0-B15 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input WORD are allocated to the binary
outputs B0...B15.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1
. . .
Input variable Bit15 -> B15

UNPACKD4 UNPACKING A DOUBLE WORD INTO 4 BINARY

VARIABLES

ABB Control Page C-189 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL UNPACKD4 (DW,B0,B1,B2,B3)

UNPACKD4
DW
B0
B1
B2
B3

PARAMETERS
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable to be
WORD unpacked
B0...B3 BINARY %O, %M The 4 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the double word variable at the input DW. The bit 0 to
bit 4 of the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B3.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input DW. Each bit (bit 0...bit 3) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B3).

B0-B3 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input DW are allocated to the binary outputs
B0...B3.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1
Input variable Bit2 -> B2
Input variable Bit3 -> B3

UNPACKD8 UNPACKING A DOUBLE WORD INTO 8 BINARY

VARIABLES

ABB Control Page C-190 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL UNPACKD8 (DW,B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7)

UNPACKD8
DW
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

PARAMETERS
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable to be
WORD unpacked
B0...B7 BINARY %O, %M The 8 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the double word variable at the input DW. The bit 0 to
bit 7 of the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B7.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input DW. Each bit (bit 0...bit 7) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B7).

B0-B7 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input DW are allocated to the binary outputs
B0...B7.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1
. . .
Input variable Bit7 -> B7

UNPACKD16 UNPACKING A DOUBLE WORD INTO 16 BINARY

VARIABLES

ABB Control Page C-191 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

UNPACKD16
CAL UNPACKD16 (DW,B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,
B8,B9,B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15)
DW
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15

PARAMETERS
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable to be
WORD unpacked
B0...B15 BINARY %O, %M The 16 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the word variable at the input DW. The bit 0 to bit 15 of
the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B15.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input DW. Each bit (bit 0...bit 15) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B15).

B0-B15 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input DW are allocated to the binary outputs
B0...B15.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1
. . .
Input variable Bit15 -> B15

UNPACKD24 UNPACKING A DOUBLE WORD INTO 24 BINARY

VARIABLES

ABB Control Page C-192 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL UNPACKD24 (DW,B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,B8,B9,

UNPACKD24 B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15,B16,B17,
DW B18,B19,B20,B21,B22,B23)
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23

PARAMETERS
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable to be
WORD unpacked
B0...B23 BINARY %O, %M The 24 binary output variables
unpacked

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the word variable at the input DW. The bit 0 to bit 23 of
the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B23.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input DW. Each bit (bit 0...bit 23) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B23).

B0-B23 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input DW are allocated to the binary outputs
B0...B23.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0

ABB Control Page C-193 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Input variable Bit1 -> B1

. . .
Input variable Bit23 -> B23

UNPACKD32 UNPACKING A DOUBLE WORD INTO 32 BINARY

VARIABLES

FBD IL

CAL UNPACKD32 (DW,B0,B1,B2,B3,B4,B5,B6,B7,B8,B9,

UNPACKD32 B10,B11,B12,B13,B14,B15,B16,B17,
DW B18,B19,B20,B21,B22,B23,B24,B25,
B0 B26,B27,B28,B29,B30,B31)
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
B25
B26
B27
B28
B29
B30
B31

PARAMETERS
DW DOUBLE %MD Double word variable to be
WORD unpacked
B0...B31 BINARY %O, %M The 32 binary output variables
unpacked

ABB Control Page C-194 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block unpacks the word variable at the input DW. The bit 0 to bit 31 of
the input variable is allocated to the corresponding output B0...B31.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The variable to be unpacked is specified at the input DW. Each bit (bit 0...bit 31) of
this input variable is allocated to the affiliated output variable (B0...B31).

B0-B31 BINARY
The affiliated bits of the variable at the input DW are allocated to the binary outputs
B0...B31.

Affiliation
Input variable Bit0 -> B0
Input variable Bit1 -> B1
. . .
Input variable Bit31 -> B31

WDW WORD TO DOUBLE WORD CONVERSION

FBD/LD IL

CAL WDW (E1,A1)

WDW
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Word quantity to be converted
A1 DOUBLE %MD Result of conversion, double
WORD word quantity

DESCRIPTION
The value of the word operand at the input E1 is converted to a double word quantity
and the result is allocated to the double word operand at the output A1.

Value range for E1 : 8000H < E1 < 7FFFH

-32768 < E1 < 32767

ABB Control Page C-195 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

8 Standard double word functions

8.1 Comparison functions, double word

Comparison serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions,
double word from pages C-196 to C-199
<D / VKLD Less than, double word x
=?D / VGLD Equal, double word x
>D / VGRD Greater than, double word x

<D LESS THAN, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
<D
VKLD
Z1< Z1<
Q Z2
Z2
Q

PARAMETERS
Z1> DOUBLE %MD, %KD Value to be compared
WORD
Z2 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Comparison value
WORD
Q BINARY %O, %M Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1< is compared to the value of the operand at
the input Z2.
The state 1 is allocated to the operand at the output Q if the value at Z1< is less than
the one at Z2. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1< is equal to or greater than Z2.

Number range
Integer double word (32 Bit)
• low limit : 8000 0000H -2 147 483 648
• high limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

ABB Control Page C-196 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

=?D EQUAL, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
=?D
VGLD
Z1=? Z1=?
Z2 Q Z2
Q

PARAMETES
Z1=? DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Value to be compared
Z2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M Result of the comparison

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1=? is compared to the value of the operand
at the input Z2. If the vaule at Z1=? is identical to the one at Z2, the state 1 is
allocated to the operand at the output Q. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1=? is
unequal to Z2.

Number range
Integer double word (32 Bit)
• low limit : 8000 0000H -2 147 483 648
• high limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

>D GREATER THAN, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
>D
VGRD
Z1> Z1>
Z2 Q Z2
Q

PARAMETERS
Z1> DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Value to be compared
Z2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Comparison value
Q BINARY %O, %M Result of the comparison

ABB Control Page C-197 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input Z1> is compared to the value of the operand at
the input Z2.
The state 1 is allocated to the operand at the output Q if the value at Z1> is greater
than the one at Z2. The state 0 is allocated to Q if Z1> is equal to or less than Z2.

Number range
Integer double word (32 Bit)
• low limit : 8000 0000H -2 147 483 648
• high limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

ABB Control Page C-198 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

8.2 Arithmetic functions, double word

Arithmetic serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

+D ADDITION DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
+D ADDD
E1 E1
E2 A1 E2
Q A1
Q

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Summand 1
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Summand 2
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Total
Q BINARY %O, %M Total, limited

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is added to the value of the operand at the
input E2 and the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

The result is limited to the maximum or minimum value of the number range. If
limiting has taken place, a 1 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the output Q.
If no limiting has taken place, a 0 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the
output Q.

Number range
Integer, double word (32 bits).

The following particularly applies here to the inputs E1 and E2 :

ABB Control Page C-199 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

• Low limit : 8000 0000H - 2 147 483 648

• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

The following applies to the output A1 :

• Low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

-D SUBTRACTION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
-D
SUBD
E1 E1
E2 A1 E2
Q A1
Q

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Minuend
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Subtrahend
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Result (difference)
Q BINARY %O, %M Result, limited

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E2 is subtracted from the value of the operand
at the input E1 and the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

The result is limited to the maximum or minimum value of the number range.
If limiting has taken place, a 1 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the output
Q. If no limiting has taken place, a 0 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the
output Q.

The value of the operand at the input E2 is checked before subtraction to determine
whether or not it lies outside of the permissible number range (8000 0000H). If this is
the case, calculation is done with the value -2 147 483 647 (8000 0001H) instead of
this inadmissible value.

Number range
Integer double word (32 bits).

The following especially applies here to the input E1 :

• Low limit : 8000 0000H - 2 147 483 648.
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH + 2 147 483 647

ABB Control Page C-200 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The following applies to the input E2 and to output A1 :

• Low limit : 8000 0001H - 2 147 483 647
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH + 2 147 483 647
• Inadmissible value : 8000 0000H

*D MULTIPLICATION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
*D MULD
E1 E1
E2 A1 E2
Q A1
Q

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Multiplicand
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Multiplier
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Result (Product)
Q BINARY %O, %M Result limited

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is multiplied by the value of the operand at
the input E2 and the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

The result is limited to the maximum or minimum value of the number range.
If limiting has taken place, a 1 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the output
Q. If no limiting has taken place, a 0 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the
output Q.

Number range
Integer double word (32 Bits)

The following specially applies here to inputs E1 and E2 :

• Low limit : 8000 0000H -2 147 483 648
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

The following applies to the output A1 :

• Low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

:D DIVISION, DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-201 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA0
DIVD
:D E1
E1 E2
E2 A1 A1
REST REST
Q Q

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Dividend
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Divisor
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Result (quotient)
REST DOUBLE WORD %MD Rest
Q BINARY %O, %M Result limited

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is divided by the value of the operand at the
input E2 and the result is allocated to the operand at the output A1, the remainder
being allocated to the operand at the output REST.

If a remainder is produced, the result will always be rounded down.

If the result lies outside of the permissible number range, it will be limited to the
maximum or minimum value of the number range.
If limiting has taken place, a 1 signal is allocated to the binary operand at the output
Q and the value 0 is allocated to the output REST. If no limiting has taken place, a 0
signal is allocated to the binary operand at the output Q.

Division by “zero” is therfore also signalled at the binary output Q.

Remainder handling
If division results in a remainder, this is available at the double word output REST.
The result of division is always rounded down if a remainder occurs.
Example : 3 : 3 = 1 Remainder 0
4:3=1 Remainder 1
5:3=1 Remainder 2
6:3=2 Remainder 0

As the remainder is available at the output REST, the user can compare this to the
divisor and can round the result at the output A1 to suit his own requirements.
Example : Remainder > divisor/2 -> round up the result at A1.

Division by ”zero”
If the divisor has the value “zero”, the positive or negative limit of the number range is
allocated to the output A1.

ABB Control Page C-202 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The following applies to division by “zero” :

A1 = -2 147 483 647 (8000 0001H) if the dividend is negative.
A1 = +2 147 483 647 (7FFF FFFFH) if the dividend is positive.
REST = 0 Output for the remainder
Q=1 Output to signal that the value at the output A1 has been limited

Invalid result value

If the invalid value 8000 0000H is the result of division, this will be corrected to the
permissible limit 8000 0001H (-2 147 483 647), the binary output Q will be set to the
value 1 and the output REST will be set to the value 0.

Number range
Integer double word (32 bits)

Here, the following particularly applies to the inputs E1 and E2 :

• Low limit : 8000 0000H -2 147 483 648
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

The following applies to the outputs A1 and REST :

• Low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647
• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647

=D ALLOCATION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA0
=D ZUWD
E1 A1 E1
A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Source
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Target

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

If the inadmissible value 8000 0000H should appear at the input for any particular
reason, the permissible value 8000 0001H (-2 147 483 647) will be allocated to the
output A1. Therefore, the inadmissible value will be corrected.

ABB Control Page C-203 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Number range
Integer double word (32 bits)

• Low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647

• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647
• Inadmissible value : 8000 0000H ---

BETRD ABSOLUTE VALUE GENERATOR, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

BETRD CAL BETRD (E1,A1)

E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Input value
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Absolute value of the input
value

DESCRIPTION
The absolute value of the operand at the input E1 is generated and the result is
allocated to the operand at the output A1.

If, for any particular reason, the invalid value 8000 0000H (-2 147 483 648) is present
at the input E1, the value 7FFF FFFFH (+2 147 483 697) is allocated to the output
A1. Therefore, the invalid value 8000 0000H is first of all corrected to the valid value
8000 0001H and only then the absolute value is generated.

Number range
Integer double word (32 bits)
• low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647
• high limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647
• invalid value : 8000 0000H ---

MUL2ND DOUBLE WORD MULTIPLICATION BY 2 TO THE POWER

OF N

ABB Control Page C-204 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL MUL2ND (E1,N,A1)

MUL2ND
E1
N A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input operand
WORD
N WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Quantity
A1 DOUBLE %MD Result
WORD

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is shifted N times and bit-by-bit.
If the value at the input N is positive, shifting takes place to the left. For each shift by
1 bit position, this corresponds to multiplying the current value by 2.
If the value at the input N is negative, shifting takes place to the right. For each shift,
this corresponds to division of the current value by 2.
The result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

Meaningful range for N : -30 < N < +30

If N = 0, the value at the input E1 is passed directly to the output A1.

Sign of the value at the input E1 :

The sign of the value E1 is not influenced by the shift operation. That is to say, the
sign of the output value is always identical to that of the input value.

Left shifting (Multiplication) :

When the value at the input is shifted to the left, the bit 0 released in each case is
filled up with 0. The sign bit (bit 31) is not changed because setting to the limit of the
number range takes place beforehand.

Limiting of the value at the output A1 during left shifting :

• The following applies to positive values at the input E1 :

If bit 30 is assigned a “1” and if shift operations still have to be carried out as the
result of the value at the input N, these will no longer be executed. Instead, the
output will be set to the limit of the postivie number range. That is to say, the limit has
been reached in any case at the latest after shifting 30 times.
Output A1 = +2 147 483 647 (7FFF FFFFH).

• The following applies to negative values at the input E1 :

ABB Control Page C-205 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

If bit 30 is assigned a “0” and if shift operations still have to be carried out as the
result of the value at the input N, these will no longer be executed. Instead, the
output will be set to the limit of the postivie number range. That is to say, the limit has
been reached in any case at the latest after shifting 30 times.
Output A1 = -2 147 483 647 (8000 0001H).

Shifting to the right (division) :

When shifting to the right, each bit is moved to the right by one position. At the same
time, the sign bit (bit 31) always retains its value. The bit released (bit 30) is filled up
with the value of the sign bit in each case.

Limiting of the value at the output when shifting to the right :

• The following applies to positive values at the input :

If now only bit 0 has a “1” and if shift operations still have to be executed as the
result of the value at the input N, the output will be set to the value 0. That is to say,
the value 0 is reached in any case at the latest after shifting 30 times.
Output A1 = 0.

• The following applies to negative values at the input E1 :

If bits 0...31 have a “1” as the result of shifting, the limit (-1) has been reached.
Further shifts have no effect. That is to say, the value -1 has been reached in any
case at the latest after shifting 31 times.
Output A1 = -1 (FFFF FFFFH).

Examples
1. Input value E1 = 58350926 (37A5D4EH)
Exponent N = 4 --> 4 * Left shift
31 0 Bit

0000 0011 0111 1010 0101 1101 0100 1110 37A5D4EH

0011 0111 1010 0101 1101 0100 1110 0000 37A5D4E0H

(933614816

2. Input value E1 = 326786382 (137A5D4EH)

Exponent N = - 4 --> 4 * Right shift
31 0 Bit

0001 0011 0111 1010 0101 1101 0100 1110 137A5D4EH

0000 0001 0011 0111 1010 0101 1101 0100 0137A5D4H

(20424148

3. Input value E1 = -326786382 (EC85A2B2H)

Exponent N = - 4 --> 4 * Right shift

ABB Control Page C-206 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

31 0 Bit

1110 1100 1000 0101 1010 0010 1011 0010 EC85A2B2H

1111 1110 1100 1000 0101 1010 0010 1011 FEC85A2BH

NEGD NEGATION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL NEGD (E1,A1)

NEGD
E1 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Input value
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Negated value

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is negated and the result is allocated to the
operand at the output A1.

If the inadmissible value 8000 0000H (-2 147 483 648) is present at the input E1, the
value 7FFF FFFFH (+2 147 483 647) is allocated to the output A1. Therefore, the
inadmissible value is replaced by the admissible value 8000 0001H (-2 147 483 647)
before negation.

Number range
Integer double word (32 Bit).

• Low limit : 8000 0001H -2 147 483 647

• High limit : 7FFF FFFFH +2 147 483 647
• Inadmissible value : 8000 0000H

SQRT SQUARE ROOT

Please refer you to the description of the SQRT function block from the chapter :
"2.5. Arithmetic functions, word".

ABB Control Page C-207 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

8.3 Logical functions, double word

Logical serie Ctler 40 50 90 30

functions,
double word from pages C-208 to C-211
DWAND AND combination, double word x
DWOR OR combination, double word x
DWXOR Exclusive OR combination, double word x
MASKED Mask, double word x
SHIFT Shift block x

DWAND AND COMBINATION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL DWAND (E1,E2,A1)

DWAND
E1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Operand 1
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Operand 2
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Result of the AND combination

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates the bit-by-bit AND combination of the operands
present at the inputs E1 and E2. The result is allocated to the operand at the output
A1.

Example

E1 1.0.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0 1.0.1.0 1.1.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.1.0.1

E2 1.0.0.1 0.1.1.0 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 0.1.1.0 1.1.0.0

A1 1.0.0.0 0.0.1.0 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0 1.0.1.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.1.0 0.1.0.0

DWOR OR COMBINATION, DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-208 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

DWOR CAL DWOR (E1,E2,A1)

E1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Operand 1
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Operand 2
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Result of the OR combination

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates the bit-by-bit OR combination of the operands present
at the inputs E1 and E2. The result is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

Example

E1 1.0.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0 1.0.1.0 1.1.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.1.0.1

E2 1.0.0.1 0.1.1.0 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 0.1.1.0 1.1.0.0

A1 1.0.0.1 0.1.1.1 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 1.1.0.0 0.1.1.1 1.1.0.1

DWXOR EXCLUSIVE OR COMBINATION, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL DWXOR (E1,E2,A1)

DWXOR
E1
E2 A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Operand 1
E2 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Operand 2
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Result of the XOR combination

ABB Control Page C-209 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block generates the bit-by-bit XOR combination of the operands
present at the inputs E1 and E2. The result is allocated to the operand at the output
A1.

Example
E1 1.0.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.0.1.0 0.1.1.0 1.0.1.0 1.1.0.0 0.0.1.1 0.1.0.1

E2 1.0.0.1 0.1.1.0 0.0.1.0 1.1.1.1 1.1.1.1 0.0.0.0 0.1.1.0 1.1.0.0

A1 0.0.0.1 0.1.0.1 0.0.0.0 1.0.0.1 0.1.0.1 1.1.0.0 0.1.0.1 1.0.0.1

MASKED MASK, DOUBLE WORD

FBD/LD IL

CAL MASKED (E1,MASK,ALLE,KEIN)

MASKED
E1
MASK
ALLE
KEIN

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Input value
MASK DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Mask
ALLE BINARY %O, %M All bits agree
KEIN BINARY %O, %M No bit agrees

DESCRIPTION
The individual bits of the operand at the input E1 are compared to the bits of the
operand at the input MASK. The result of the comparison is signalled at the outputs
ALLE and KEIN.

If at least all bits, which are set on the operand at the input MASK, are set on the
operand at the input E1, the following applies to the outputs : ALLE = 1
KEIN = 0
If none of the bits, which are set on the operand at the input MASK, are set on the
operand at the input E1, the following applies to the outputs : ALLE = 0
KEIN = 1
If only some of the bits, which are set on the operand at the input MASK, are set on
the operand at the input E1, the following applies to the outputs : ALLE = 0

ABB Control Page C-210 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

KEIN = 0
Example

E1 : X1111XX11XXXX11X X1XXXXX1XXX1XXXX ALLE = 1

MASK : 0111100110000110 0100000100010000 KEIN = 0

E1 : X0000XX00XXXX00X X0XXXXX0XXX0XXXX ALLE = 0

MASK : 0111100110000110 0100000100010000 KEIN = 1

E1 : X1011XX10XXXX11X X1XXXXX0XXX1XXXX ALLE = 0

MASK : 0111100110000110 0100000100010000 KEIN = 0

X : These bits may have any values (don’t care).

SHIFT SHIFT BLOCK

Please refer you to the description of the SHIFT function block from the chapter :
"2.6. Logical functions, word".

9 High order functions

High order serie Ctler 40 50 90 30
functions from pages C-211 to C-287
ADRWA Address selection x
AMELD Analog value change annonciator x
AMELDD Analog value change annonciator, x
double word
ANAI4_20 Read analog value 4...20 mA (07KT92) x
AWM Selection multiplexer x
AWT Selection gate, word x x x x
AWTB Binary selection gate x x x x
AWTD Selection gate, double word x
BEG Limiter x x x x
BEGD Limiter, double word x
BITSU Bit searcher x
BMELD Binary value change annunciator x x x
DMUX Demultiplexer x
DMUXD Demultiplexer, double word x
DWUMC Double word decoder x
FEHSU Error searcher with automatic deletion x
FIFO Stack, first-in / first-out x
FKG Function generator x
HLG Ramp function generator x
IDLB Read binary variable, indexed x
IDLm / IDL Read word variable, indexed x x x x
IDSB Write binary variable, indexed x
IDSm / IDS Write word variable, indexed x x x x

ABB Control Page C-211 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

INITS Initialize memory area in the operand x

memory with zero
INITV Initialize variables x
LDT Illumination pushbutton control x
LIFO Stack, last-in / first-out x
LIZU List allocator x x x x
MAX Maximum value generator x x x x
MAXD Maximum value generator, double word x
MAZ Maximum value generator as a function x
of time
MAZD Maximum value generator as a function x
of time, double word
MIN Minimum value generator x x x x
MIND Minimum value generator, double word x
MUXR Multiplexer with reset x
MUXRD Multiplexer with reset, double word x
NPULSE Pulses generator x x
SFEHSU Error searcher with storage x
UHR Clock x x x
USM Switchover multiplexer x
UST Switchover gate x
USTD Switchover, double word x
USTR Switchover gate with reset x
USTRD Switchover with reset, double word x
WDEC Word decoder x
WUMC Word recoder x

ADRWA ADDRESS SELECTION

FBD IL

!BA 0
ADRWA ADRWA
E E
EC/AT #n
E=EC EC/AT
ADR E=EC
ADR

PARAMETERS
E WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input value
#n DIRECT #, #H Quantity EC or AT
CONSTANT
EC/AT WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input code/output table;
capable of duplication
E=EC BINARY %O, %M Input value = input code
ADR WORD %OW, %MW indirect address

ABB Control Page C-212 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This block generates indirect addresses at the output ADR.

Definition : An indirect address is an operand whose value is the address of another

operand.

E WORD
Input value to be compared with the input codes.

EC/AT WORD
The input EC/AT can be duplicated. The input codes for the comparison with the
input E are specified at the inputs EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1 The output table of operands
whose indirect addresses are to be generated are specified at the inputs EC/ATn ...
EC/AT2n-1.

The block compares the value at the input E successively against the values at the
inputs EC/AT0 ... EC/ATn-1. The comparison is restarted each time the block is
called, i.e. it begins with the input EC/AT0.

If the value at the input E agrees with one of the values at the inputs
EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1:
- The output E=EC is set to 1 (hit),
- The allocated operand is selected from the inputs EC/ATn ... EC/AT2n-1

If the value at the input E does not agree with one of the values at the inputs
EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1:
- The output E=EC is set to 0 (no hit)
- no operand is selected from the output table EC/ATn ... EC/AT2n-1 and accordingly
no indirect address is generated either.

Convention for allocation between EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1 and EC/ATn ... EC/AT2n-1:

EC/AT0 -> EC/ATn
EC/AT1 -> EC/ATn+1
. .
EC/ATn-1 -> EC/AT2n-1

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of input codes EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1 is specified at the
input #n. It is specified as a direct constant.

Example: EC/AT0, ..., EC/AT5 are planned

-> input codes = EC/AT0, ..., EC/AT2 and output table = EC/AT0, ..., EC/AT5
-> #n = 3.

E=EC BINARY
The output E=EC indicates whether or not the value at the input E agrees with one of

ABB Control Page C-213 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

the values at the inputs EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1.

E=EC = 0 -> No agreement
E=EC = 1 -> The value at the input E agrees with one of the values at the
inputs EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1.

ADR WORD
The operand specified at the ADR output is the indirect address of the operand
selected from the output table EC/ATn ... EC/AT2n-1. The address of the operand
selected from the output table is therefore allocating as a value to the operand
specified at the ADR output.
If no agreement between the input E and the inputs EC/AT0...EC/ATn-1 is
determined during comparison, no value is allocated to the ADR output. In that case,
the ADR output is not updated.

Reading/writing operands indirectly

The function blocks AWM or USM use the indirect address generated by the block
ADRWA in order to read or write the operand selected with the block ADRWA.
Therefore, the block ADRWA and the block AWM or USM is needed to read or write
operands indirectly. To do this, the operands to be read or written are listed at the
inputs EC/ATn ... EC/AT2n-1 of the ADRWA block and the read or write access is
then performed by the AWM or USM block.

Advantages of indirect addressing :

- In suitable applications, the PLC program is simplified substantially, thus reducing
the planning effort.
- Access to any number of operands (multiplex function) is achieved with only one
block (AWM or USM). In this process, the ADRWA block represents a powerful tool
with which the operands to be accessed can be selected in a very flexible manner.

ABB Control Page C-214 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example: Indirect reading of the flag % MW 3,2

ADRWA
E
EC/AT0
% MW 3,2 is EC/AT1 AWM
selected EC/AT2
E= EC
ADR Indirect address
% MW 3,1 EC/AT3 ADR
of % MW 3,2 Value of
-> % MW 3,2 EC/AT4 A
% MW 3,2
% MW 4,5 EC/AT5
The value of t he
f lag % MW 3,2
read by indirect
addressing and
is output
t hrough the
output A

Example: Indirect writing of the flag % MW 4,5

ADRWA
E
EC/AT0
% MW 4,5 EC/AT1 USM
selected EC/AT2
E= EC
ADR Indirect address ADR
% MW 3,1 EC/AT3 of % MW 4,5
% MW 3,2 EC/AT4
-> % MW 4,5 EC/AT5

Value t o be
allocat ed to E
% MW 4,5

The value at
the input E is
allocated to
the f lag % MW 4,5
by means
of indirect
addressing

AMELD ANALOG VALUE CHANGE ANNUNCIATOR

ABB Control Page C-215 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
AMELD AMELD
FREI FREI
R NR R
E A #n
ÄND E
NR
A
ÄND

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Block enabling
R BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Reset
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of input values
CONSTANT
E WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input values, duplicable
NR WORD %OW, %MW Number of the input value
A WORD %OW, %MW Current input value
ÄND BINARY %O, %M Change detected

DESCRIPTION
This function block monitors the change of the analog values present at the inputs E
(#E0 ... #En-1).

Recognition of a change
Each time the block is processed, the current input values at the inputs E0...En-1 are
successively compared against the historical values (input values from the previous
processing of the block). If a change is recognized at one of the inputs E0...En-1 :
- this is indicated at the ÄND output
- the number of the input where the change was recognized is output through the NR
output
- the changing input value is output through the A output
Each time the block is processed, a change at one input only is recognized. If a
change is recognized, the inputs following the one where the change was previously
discovered are monitored the next time the block is processed.

Initialization of historical values

The first time the block is processed after PLC initialization (FREI = 1) or enabling of
processing after it had been disabled (FREI changes from 0 to 1), all current input
values are assumed once as historical values and all outputs are set to the value 0.
These initialized historical values now represent the starting basis for recognition of
changes.

FREI BINARY
Processing of the block is enabled with the FREI input.
FREI = 0 -> Block is not processed

ABB Control Page C-216 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FREI = 1 -> Processing of the block is enabled

If FREI = 0, the outputs of the block are also no longer updated.

R BINARY
The block can be reset with the R input.
R = 0 -> No reset
R = 1 -> Reset of the block
Reset signifies :
- Adoption of the current values at the inputs E0...En-1 as historical values.
- All outputs are set to the value 0

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
ONLY in IL language
The number of values to be monitored at the inputs E0...En-1 is specified at the input
#n. The number is specified as a direct constant.
Range for #n : 1 < #n < 127

E WORD
The input E can be duplicated (E0...En-1).
The operands to be monitored for a change are specified at the inputs E.

NR WORD
The serial number of the input E0...En-1 where a change has been discovered is
output through the output NR.
If no output change is discovered during processing of the block, the number of the
input changing last is still output through the output NR.
The following affiliations apply :
Change discovered at E0 -> NR = 0
Change discovered at E1 -> NR = 1
Change discovered at En-1 -> NR = n-1

A WORD
If a change is discovered at one of the inputs E0...En-1, the changing input value is
allocated to the output A.
If no change is discovered at the inputs E0...En-1 during processing of the block, the
value of the input changing last is still output through the output A.

ÄND BINARY
The output ÄND indicates whether or not a change has been discovered at the
inputs E0...En-1.
ÄND = 0 -> No change discovered
ÄND = 1 -> Change discovered

AMELDD ANALOG VALUE CHANGE ANNUNCIATOR DOUBLE

WORD

ABB Control Page C-217 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
AMELDD AMELDD
FREI FREI
R NR R
E A #n
ÄND E
NR
A
ÄND

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Block enable
R BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Reset
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of input values
CONSTANT
E DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input values; duplicable
WORD
NR WORD %OW, %MW Number of the input value
A DOUBLE %MD Current input value
WORD
ÄND BINARY %O, %M Change detected

DESCRIPTION
This function block monitors the change of the analog values present at the inputs E
(#E0 ... #En-1).

Recognition of a change
Each time the block is processed, the current input values at the inputs E0...En-1 are
successively compared against the historical values (input values from the previous
processing of the block). If a change is recognized at one of the inputs E0...En-1 :
- this is indicated at the ÄND output
- the number of the input where the change was recognized is output through the
NR output
- the changing input value is output through the A output
Each time the block is processed, a change at one input only is recognized. If a
change is recognized, the inputs following the one where the change was previously
discovered are monitored the next time the block is processed.

Initialization of historical values

FREI BINARY

ABB Control Page C-218 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Processing of the block is enabled with the FREI input.

FREI = 0 -> Block is not processed
FREI = 1 -> Processing of the block is enabled
If FREI = 0, the outputs of the block are also no longer updated.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
ONLY used in IL language
The number of values to be monitored at the inputs E0...En-1 are specified at input
#n. Range for #n : 1 < #n < #63

E DOUBLE WORD
The input E can be duplicated (E0...En-1).
The operands to be monitored for a change are specified at the inputs E0...En-1.

NR WORD
The serial number of the input E0...En-1 where a change has been discovered is
output through the output NR.
If no change is discovered during processing of the block the number of the input
changing last is still output through the output NR.
The following affiliations apply :
Change discovered at E0 -> NR = 0
Change discovered at E1 -> NR = 1
Change discovered at En-1 -> NR = n-1

A DOUBLE WORD
If a change is discovered at one of the inputs E0...En-1, the changing input value is
allocated to the output A.
If no change is discovered at the inputs E0...En-1 during processing of the block, the
value of the input changing last is still output through the output A.

ÄND BINARY
The output ÄND indicates whether or not a change has been discovered at the
inputs E0...En-1.
ÄND = 0 -> No change discovered
ÄND = 1 -> Change discovered

ANAI4_20 READ ANALOG VALUE 4...20 mA (07 KT 92)

ABB Control Page C-219 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

ANAI4_20
see CE-IL in the
EW AW software
ERR

PARAMETERS
EW WORD %IW, %MW Direct analog input
AW WORD %MW, %OW Word variable, to which the
result of the evaluation is
assigned (0...32760 <-> 4...20
mA)
ERR BINARY %M, %O Output open–circuit monitoring
(1 = open circuit)

DESCRIPTION
The connection element ANAI4_20 is intended for reading current values of a
4...20 mA range. It is used with the direct analog inputs IW06,00...IW06,03 of the
central unit 07 KT 92. The input range of 4...20 mA is converted into an internal
numerical range of 0...32760. There is also an open–circuit monitoring.

The analog inputs, for which the connection element ANAI4_20 is used, have to be
configured as current inputs. A separate connection element ANAI4_20 is required
for each 4...20 mA current input.

The analog inputs are designed for currents of 0...20 mA. The analog input words
IW06,00...IW06,03 generate values of a 0...32760 range corresponding to 0...20 mA.

The connection element ANAI4_20 transforms the numerical range at EW of

6552...32760 (4...20 mA) into a numerical range of 0...32760 at AW.
One step of the output value AW then amounts to 10 (4,883 mA). An input value at
EW which is lower than 6552 (4 mA) leads to an output value at AW of 0.

EW WORD Direct analog input

The input EW is assigned to the analog input to be read.

AW WORD Analog value in internal representation

The word output AW provides the analog signal converted into the internal numerical
range. In case of an open-circuit, the output is set to 0. The diagram 1 shows the
relationship between the input current at the direct analog input and the output value
at AW.

ERR BINARY Open–circuit monitoring

The binary output ERR indicates a signal 1 if the connection element ANAI4_20 has

ABB Control Page C-220 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

detected an open–circuit. If the input current of an analog input of the 07 KT 92 is

lower than 3.6 mA, the open–circuit monitoring assumes an open–circuit (see
diagram 2). AW is set to 0, if an open–circuit is detected.

32760

24570
Numerical
value at
AW 16380

8190

0 4 10 15 20
Input current / mA
Diagram 1: Relat ionship betw een the input current at the direct analog input and t he output value AW

1
Open-circuit
ERR 0
0 4 10 15 20
3.6 Input current / mA
Diagram 2: The output ERR indicates an open-circuit signal if the input current is low er than 3.6 mA

AWMSELECTION MULTIPLEXER

FBD IL

CAL AWM (ADR,A)

AWM

ADR A

PARAMETERS
ADR WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Indirect address of the operand
to be read
A WORD %OW, %MW Value of the operand read

DESCRIPTION
This function block reads the value of an operand, using the method of indirect
addressing. The value read is allocated to the output A

Note : The AWM block can only be used meaningfully in conjunction with the

ABB Control Page C-221 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

ADRWA block.
The value of the operand at the input ADR is interpreted as an address of the
operand to be read (indirect addressing). Therefore, the operand at the input ADR
represents an indirect address together with its value. This indirect address is
generated by the ADRWA function block.

Note : An explanation of the indirect addressing method and the possibilities of using
the AWM function block are described in the section dealing with the ADRWA
function block.

AWT SELECTION GATE, WORD

FBD IL

CAL AWT (0/1,0,1,A1)

AWT
0/1
0
1 A1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
0 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Word input for 0/1 = 0
1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Word input for 0/1 = 1
A1 WORD %OW, %MW Word output

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the word operand at the input
0 to the word operand at the output A1.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the word operand at the input
1 to the word operand at the output A1.

AWTB BINARY SELECTION GATE

ABB Control Page C-222 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL AWTB (0/1,0,1,A1)

AWTB
0/1
0
1 A1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
0 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Binary input for 0/1 = 0
1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Binary input for 0/1 = 1
A1 BINARY %O, %M Binary output

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the status of the operand at the input 0 to
the operand at the output A1.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the status of the operand at the input 1 to
the operand at the output A1.

AWTD SELECTION GATE, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL AWTD (0/1,0,1,A1)

AWTD
0/1
0
1 A1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
0 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Double word input for 0/1 = 0
WORD
1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Double word input for 0/1 = 1
WORD
A1 DOUBLE %MD Double word output
WORD

ABB Control Page C-223 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the double word operand at
the input 0 to the double word operand at the output A1.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the double word operand at
the input 1 to the double word operand at the output A1.

BEG LIMITER

FBD IL

CAL BEG (E1,OG,UG,A1)

BEG
E1
OG
UG A1

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value
OG WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW High limit
UG WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Low limit
A1 WORD %OW, %MW Limited value

DESCRIPTION
The value of the operand at the input E1 is limited to the range between the high and
low limits.
The high limit is specified by the operand at the OG input and the low limit is
specified by the one at the UG input.

The following applies : A1 = UG for E1 < UG

A1 = E1 for UG < E1 < OG
A1 = OG for E1 > OG

ABB Control Page C-224 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

UG
OG E1

BEGD LIMITER, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL BEGD (E1,OG,UG,A1)

BEGD
E1
OG
UG A1

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE WORD %MD, Input value
OG DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD High limit
UG DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD Low limit
A1 DOUBLE WORD %MD Limited value

The following applies : A1 = UG for E1 < UG

A1 = E1 for UG < E1 < OG
A1 = OG for E1 > OG

ABB Control Page C-225 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

UG
OG E1

BITSU BIT SEARCHER

FBD IL

CAL BITSU (R,R/V,#ANZ,ANF,BIT,END,NR,POS)

BITSU
R
R/V
#ANZ END
ANF NR
BIT POS

PARAMETERS
R BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Reset of the block and new
search
R/V BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Search direction, up/down
#ANZ DIRECT #, #H Field length, number of word
CONSTANT operands
ANF WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Field start, 1st word operand
BIT WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Number of set bits to be
skipped
END BINARY %O, %M Field end reached
NR WORD %OW, %MW Number of the word operand
containing the set bit
POS WORD %OW, %MW Bit position within the word
operand

DESCRIPTION
This function block searches through a bit field for a set bit. The bit field consists of
successive word operands. If a set bit is found, this is indicated at the block’s
outputs.

ABB Control Page C-226 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The first word operand in the bit field is specified at the input ANF. After the start of
the PLC program (1st program cycle), the block sets all outputs to the value 0 and
immediately begins searching for set bits. Therefore, the search is already active in
the first program cycle. If the block finds a set bit, its position is indicated at the
block’s outputs and the search is ended. The next time the block is called in the next
program cycle, it continues the search, doing so at the bit position directly following
the bit found last. If the end of the bit field is reached during the search, this is
indicated at the output END and a new search can be started again by means of a
reset signal. The new search again begins at the start of the bit field.

R BINARY
The input R serves to reset the block and start a new search from the beginning of
the bit field.
R = 0 -> No reset
R = 1 -> Reset is triggered
A 1 signal at the input R resets all of the block’s outputs to the value 0 and results in
immediate starting of a new search from the beginning of the bit field. Therefore, the
new search begins in the same processing cycle in which the block’s outputs are
reset. The search within the reset cycle ends either at the first set bit or, if no bit is
set, at the end of the field. The next time the block is called, the reset input must be
set to 0 so that the block will be able to continue searching through the bit field for
set bits. The reset input is dominant with respect to the other inputs.

R/V BINARY
The searching direction is specified at the input R/V.
R/V = 0 -> Search down : The start of the bit field within the meaning of the search is
identical with the physical start of the bit field.
R/V = 1 -> Search up : The start of the bit field within the meaning of the search is
identical with the physical end of the bit field.

#ANZ DIRECT CONSTANT

The number of word operands in which the bit field consists is specified at the input
#ANZ. This is specified as a direct constant.

ANF WORD
The word operand with which the bit field physically begins is specified at the input
ANF. The entire bit field consists in the operand at the input ANF and in the
subsequent operands corresponding to the operand numbering. The total number of
word operands is specified at the input #ANZ.

BIT WORD
The way in which the function block is to indicate the bits set in the bit field is
specified at the input BIT.
BIT = 1 -> Each set bit in the bit field is indicated at the outputs NR and POS.
BIT = 2 -> The first set bit in the bit field is indicated and then only every second set
bit of the other set bits in the bit field is indicated.
BIT = 3 -> The first set bit in the bit field is indicated and then only every third set
bit of the other set bits in the bit field is indicated.
BIT = n -> The first set bit in the bit field is indicated and then only every n-th set
bit of the other set bits in the bit field is indicated.

ABB Control Page C-227 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

- Special function : BIT = 0

- If the block finds a set bit, in the next program cycle the search is not automatically
continued at the subsequent bit position. The search is interrupted at this point until
the bit found has assumed the significance 0. During interruption of the search, the
position of the bit found last continues to be indicated at the outputs. If the bit found
last assumes the value 0, the search is continued at the next bit position. If a further
bit is set in the selected search direction, this bit’s position is indicated and the
search is interrupted again. If no more bits are set in the search direction, the
position of the bit found last is indicated. The output END is set to 1.
- If no bits are set after a reset, the block runs through the bit field up to its end and
stops there. The output END is set to one. The outputs NR and POS are set to 0.
- If bits are set after a reset, the block indicates the first set bit in the search direction
and stops at this bit.

END BINARY
Whether or not the end of the bit field has been reached during the search is
indicated at the END output.
END = 0 -> End of the bit field not reached
END = 1 -> End of the bit field reached
Search down : The end of the bit field is defined by bit position 15 in the last word
operand of the physical bit field.
Search up :The end of the bit field is defined by bit position 15 in the first word
operand of the physical bit field.
If the bit is set at the last bit position of the field and it is found and indicated during a
search, the output END is not yet set to the value 1. This is not done until the next
processing cycle of the block. Therefore, the prerequisite for setting the output END
is that no set bit has been found during the current search.

NR, POS WORD

If the block finds a set bit in the planned bit field, its position is indicated at the
outputs NR and POS.
Meanings :
NR : Current number of the word operand in which the set bit has been found.
POS : Position of the set bit within the word operand.

Current number of the word operand

NR = 0 -> 1st word operand of the bit field
NR = 1 -> 2nd word operand of the bit field
. . .
. . .
NR = n-1 -> nth word operand of the bit field

The word operands are numbered in the sense of the search.

Therefore, the following applies to down searching :
First word operand -> first word operand of the physical bit field
Last word operand -> last word operand of the physical bit field

Therefore, the following applies to up searching :

First word operand -> last word operand of the physical bit field

ABB Control Page C-228 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Last word operand -> first word operand of the physical bit field

Position of the set bit within the word operand

Numbering within a word operand is from 0...15. At the same time, position 0
corresponds to the least significant bit and position 15 to the most significant bit
within the word operand.
If the end of the field is reached during a search without a set bit having been found,
the position of the bit found last continues to be output through the output NR and
the output POS. This takes place until a new search is compelled from the start of
the bit field by a reset at the input R.
If no bits are set at all within the entire bit field, the outputs assume the following
values at the end of the first search : END = 1
NR =0
POS = 0
This state can be terminated again by a 1 signal at the input R (reset).

BMELD BINARY VALUE CHANGE ANNUNCIATOR

FBD IL

!BA 0
BMELD BMELD
FREI FREI
R NR R
E A #n
ÄND E
NR
A
ÄND

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Block enable
R BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Reset
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of input values
CONSTANT
E BINARY %O, %I, %M, %S, %K Input values; duplicable
NR WORD %OW, %MW Number of the input value
A BINARY %O, %M Current input value
ÄND BINARY %O, %M Change detected

DESCRIPTION
This function block monitors the change of the analog values present at the inputs E
(#E0 ... #En-1).

Detection of a change
Each time the block is processed, the current input values at the inputs E0...En-1 are
compared to the historical values (input values from the previous time the block was
processed). If a change is detected at one of the inputs E0...En-1 :
- this is signalled at the output ÄND

ABB Control Page C-229 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

- the number of the input at which the change was discovered is output through the
output NR
- the input value that has changed is output through the output A.
Each time the block is processed, a change at only one input is recognized. When a
change is recognized, the inputs following the input where the change was previously
discovered are monitored the next time the block is processed.

Initialization of historical values

The first time the block is processed after PLC initialization (Frei = 1) or processing is
enabled after it had been disabled (FREI changes from 0 to 1), all current input
values are taken over once as historical values and all outputs are set to the value 0.
These initialized historical values now represent the starting basis for recognition of
changes.

FREI BINARY
Processing of the block is enabled with the FREI input.
FREI = 0 -> Block is not processed
FREI = 1 -> Processing of the block is enabled
If FREI = 0, the block’s outputs are also no longer updated.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
ONLY used in IL language
The number of values to be monitored at the inputs E0...En-1 are specified at the #n
input. This is specified as a direct constant.
Range for #n : < #n < 127

E BINARY
The input E is capable of duplication (E0...En-1).
The operands to be monitored for a change are specified at the inputs E0...En-1.

NR WORD
The serial number of the input E0...En-1 where a change has been discovered is
output through the output NR.
If no change is discovered during processing of the block, the number of the input
that changed last continues to be output through the output NR.
The following affiliations apply :
Change discovered at E0 -> NR = 0
Change discovered at E1 -> NR = 1
Change discovered at En-1 -> NR = n-1

A BINARY
If a change is discovered at one of the inputs E0...En-1, the input value that has

ABB Control Page C-230 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

changed is allocated to the output A.

If no change is discovered at the inputs E0...En-1 during processing of the block, the
value of the input that has changed last continues to be output through the output A.

ÄND BINARY
The output ÄND indicates whether or not a change has been discovered at the
inputs E0...En-1.
ÄND = 0 -> No change discovered
ÄND = 1 -> Change discovered

DMUX DEMULTIPLEXER
FBD IL

!BA 0
DMUX
DMUX
INDX INOK INDX
E A #n
E
INOK
A

PARAMETERS
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Index input
#n DIRECT #, #H Quantity n of word inputs
CONSTANT E0 ... En-1
E WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Word input, duplicable
INOK BINARY %O, %M Range monitoring of the index
input
A WORD %OW, %MW Word output to which one of
the inputs E0...En-1 is
switched through.

DESCRIPTION
This function block connects one of the inputs E0...En-1 to the output A depending
on the input INDX.
The value at the input INDX is monitored for validity.
The output A is set to 0 if the word input INDX is not within the valid range.

Relationship between E0...En-1, INDX and A :

The input INDX is used to define which of the inputs E0...En-1 is connected to the
output A.

The following applies :

INDX = 1 : E0 -> A
INDX = 2 : E1 -> A
INDX = 3 : E2 -> A

ABB Control Page C-231 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

: : :
INDX = n : En-1 -> A
where : 1 < INDX < n < 32767 (theoretically)
The output A is set to 0 if the input INDX = 0.

INDX WORD
Index input for selection of one of the inputs E0...En-1.
The following applies : 1 < INDX < n (Number of inputs E0...En-1)
Note : INDX = 0 -> Initialization of the output A with 0.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL.
Quantity n of word inputs E0...En-1

E WORD
Input E capable of duplication (E0 ... En-1)
One of the inputs E0 ... En-1 is connected to the output A.

INOK BINARY
Range monitoring for the input INDX
The output INOK indicates whether or not the input INDX is within the valid range.
The outputs INOK and A are set to 0 if the word input INDX is not within the valid
range.

The following applies : INOK = 1 -> INDX in the valid range

INOK = 0 -> INDX in the invalid range -> A = 0
Valid range for the index : 1 < INDX < n

A WORD
Output to which one of the inputs E0...En-1 is switched through.
By means of the input INDX, one of the inputs E0...En-1 is selected and its value is
allocated to the output A.
The output A is set to 0 if the word input INDX is not within the valid range.

DMUXD DEMULTIPLEXER DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-232 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
DMUXD
DMUXD
INDX INOK INDX
E A #n
E
INOK
A

PARAMETERS
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Index input
#n DIRECT #, #H Quantity n of the double word
CONSTANT inputs E0 ... En-1
E DOUBLE %MD, %KD Double word inputs E0 ... En-1;
WORD capable of duplication.
NOK BINARY %O, %M Range monitoring of the index
input
A DOUBLE %MD Double word output to which
WORD one of the inputs E0 ... En-1 is
switched through.

DESCRIPTION
This function block connects one of the inputs E0...En-1 to the output A depending
on the input INDX.
The value at the input INDX is checked for validity. The output A is set to 0 if the
word input INDX is not within the valid range.

Relationship between E0 ... En-1, INDX and A :

The input INDX is used to define which of the inputs E0 ... En-1 is connected to the
output A.

The following applies :

INDX = 1 : E0 -> A
INDX = 2 : E1 -> A
INDX = 3 : E2 -> A
: : : :
INDX = n : En-1 -> A
where : 1 < INDX < n < 32767 (theoretically)
Note : The output A is is set to 0 if the input INDX = 0.

INDX WORD
Index input for selection of one of the inputs E0 ... En-1.

ABB Control Page C-233 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The following applies : 1 < INDX < n (number of inputs E0 ... En-1)
Note : INDX = 0 -> Initialization of the output A with 0.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL.
Quantity n of double word inputs E0 ... En-1.

E DOUBLE WORD
Input E capable of duplication (E0 ... En-1)
One of the n inputs E0 ... En-1 is connected to the output A.

The following applies : INOK = 1 -> INDX within the valid range
INOK = 0 -> INDX in the invalid range -> A = 0
Valid range for the index : 1 < INDX < n

A DOUBLE WORD
Output to which one of the n inputs E0...En-1 is switched through.
By means of the input INDX, one of the inputs E0...En-1 is selected and its value is
allocated to the output A.
The output A is set to 0 if the input INDX is not within the valid range.

DWUMC DOUBLE WORD RECODER

FBD/LD IL

!BA 0
DWUMC DWUMC
E E
EC/AC #2* n
E= EC EC/AC
A E= EC
A

PARAMETES
E DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input
WORD
#2*n DIRECT #, #H, %KW Quantity n of reference values
CONSTANT (multiplied by 2)
EC/AC DOUBLE %MD, %KD Reference value / Output code;

ABB Control Page C-234 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

WORD can be duplicated

E=EC BINARY %O, %M Coincidence indication
A DOUBLE %MD Output of the output code’s
WORD value

DESCRIPTION
This function block compares the value of the operand at the input E to the reference
values of the operands at the inputs EC/AC. If the input E agrees with at least one of
the reference values EC/ACi, the output E=EC is set to 1. The output A receives the
value of the output code EC/ACn+i, which is allocated to the reference value EC/ACi
found.
An operand for the output code EC/ACn+i is allocated to each reference value at the
inputs EC/ACi. Affiliation of EC/ACi to EC/ACn+i is recognizable by the index i.

Note : In IL language, the number of inputs EC/AC must be specified as a direct

constant at the input #2*n.

E DOUBLE WORD
The operand whose value is to be compared to the values of the n reference values
(EC0...ECn-1) is specified at the input E.

#2*n DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

Only used in IL.
The total number (2*n) of the reference values and output codes (EC/AC) is
specified at the input #2*n. This is specified as an indirect constant.

EC/AC DOUBLE WORD

The input EC/AC must be duplicated according to the number of reference values
needed. The operands for the reference values are specified at the inputs
EC/AC0...EC/ACn-1. The output codes are specified at the inputs
EC/ACn...AC/AC2n-1.
The value of the operand at the input E1 is compared to the reference values.
The output code EC/ACn+i is output through the output A if the input E agrees with
one of the reference values EC/ACi.
Affiliation between reference values and output codes :
EC/AC0 <-> EC/ACn
EC/AC1 <-> EC/ACn+1
. .
. .
EC/ACn-1 <-> EC/ACn+(n-1)

E=EC BINARY
Agreement between the operand value of the input E and one of the reference
values is signalled at the output E=EC.
The following applies: E=EC = 0 -> No agreement
E=EC = 1 -> Agreement

A DOUBLE WORD
The output code EC/ACn+i is output through the output A if the input E agrees with

ABB Control Page C-235 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

one of the reference values EC/ACi.

The following applies: A = 0 -> No agreement
A = EC/ACn+i -> Agreement

FEHSU ERROR SEARCHER WITH AUTOMATIC DELETION

FBD IL

!BA 0
FEHSU
FEHSU R
FREI FREI
R END #n
B NR B
END
NR

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Enable search
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of binary variables
CONSTANT
B BINARY %I, %O, %M List of binary variables;
capable of duplication
END BINARY %O, %M List end reached
NR WORD %OW, %MW List number of the variables
found

DESCRIPTION
This function block searches through a list of binary variables (%I, %O, %M, %S) for
set binary variables. If a set binary variable is found, its serial number referred to the
list is indicated at the input NR. The set binary variable at the input is deleted.

FREI BINARY
The search for a set binary variable is enabled with the FREI input.
FREI = 0 Search is not enabled
FREI = 1 Search is enabled.

The search is continued until

- a set binary variable is found or
- the end of the variable list is reached.
If a binary variable with the value 1 is found in the list, the search is ended, the
variable is deleted and its list number is output through the output NR.
The search is continued again when the block is called again (in the next program
cycle). The binary variable directly following the one found is now examined first.
The search ends at the end of the list if no further set variable is found.
The value 1 is then allocated to the END output and the number of the variable found

ABB Control Page C-236 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

last during the search is indicated at the output NR.

If no set variable is found during a search from the start of the list, the search is
automatically repeated from the start of the list when the block is called again. This
takes place until a set variable is found.

R BINARY
By means of the input R, the function block is set to a defined state (reset) in order to
be able to start a search from the start of the variable list.
R = 0 -> No reset of the block
R = 1 -> Reset of the block for preparation of a search from the start of the list

Note : Even when the block is called for the very first time after starting the PLC
program, a reset must first of all be executed in order to create the correct marginal
conditions for the first search.
A reset of the block results in the following :
- Output END = 0
- Output NR = 0
- The next search takes place from the start of the list.

Priority : The input R has higher priority than the input FREI, i. e. no search is
executed as long as there is a 1 signal at the input R.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
ONLY used in IL language
The number of binary variables planned at the inputs B0...Bn-1 is specified at the
input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.

B BINARY
The input B can be duplicated (B0...Bn-1).
The list of binary variables to be examined is specified at the inputs B0...Bn-1. Owing
to the reset mechanism, step operands (%S) and indirect constants (%K) are not
allowed.

END BINARY
END = 0 -> List end not reached
END = 1 -> List end reached without a set binary variable having been found in the
current search

NR WORD
The list number of the binary variable found last is output through the NR output.
The following affiliations apply :
Variable at the input List number
B0 1
B1 2
. .
. .
. .
Bn-1 n

ABB Control Page C-237 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

If the end of the list is reached during the search without a set variable having been
found, the number of the variable last found continues to be output through the
output NR.

Searching from the start of the list without a variable being found :
If no set binary variable is found during a search from the start of the list, the state 1
is assigned to the output END when the end of the list is reached and the value 0 is
assigned to the output NR. When the block is called again in the next program cycle,
the search automatically takes place again from the start of the list. Automatic
searching from the start of the list continues until a set binary variable is found once.

FIFO STACK, FIRST IN/FIRST OUT

FBD IL

CAL FIFO (R,LADE,LESE,E,B/W,#L,ANF,A,FST,L,V)

FIFO
B/W
LADE
LESE
R A
E FST
#L L
ANF V

PARAMETERS
B/W BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Binary/word data
LADE BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Load FIFO
LESE BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Read FIFO
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset FIFO, 0->1 edge
E BINARY, %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Input of data in the FIFO
WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW
#L DIRECT #, #H Number of memory locations
CONSTANT (bytes)
ANF BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Start of the FIFO in the flag
WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW area
A BINARY, %O, %M Output of data from the FIFO
WORD %OW, %MW
FST WORD %OW, %MW Filling level of the FIFO
L BINARY %O, %M FIFO empty
V BINARY %O, %M FIFO full

DESCRIPTION
This function block realizes a stack for binary or word data from which the data
written in first is again read out first (first in/first out).

B/W BINARY
The input BW serves to preselect binary or word processing.

ABB Control Page C-238 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

B/W = 0 -> word processing

B/W = 1 -> binary processing
Binary or word processing is defined once and must not be changed during operation
of the FIFO.

LADE BINARY
The value present at the input E is transferred to the next free position of the FIFO
by means of a 1 signal at the LADE input. If the FIFO is “full” and a “load” signal is
present, the new value will not be read in. A new value can only be read if a value
has been read out first. It is then transferred to the first position of the FIFO.

LESE BINARY
A 1 signal at the input LESE results in output of the current FIFO value through the
output A. If the FIFO is “empty”, a pending read order is ignored and the value 0 is
output through the output A. The output A is always set to 0 if there is no read order.

LADE and LESE

If load and read orders are present simultaneously, the value to be loaded is
forwarded directly from the input E to the output A. Then the FIFO is empty.
If the FIFO is not empty, the current FIFO value is output and the new load
information is transferred to it.
The FIFO does not change its filling level in this mode. The value output through the
output FST remains constant. If the FIFO is empty, the output L remains 1 and the
output FST is set to 0.

R BINARY
A 0->1 edge at the input R results in the reset of the block. Therefore, values read in
before are no longer available.
The output L assumes the value 1 and the outputs FST and A assume the value 0.

R and LADE
If R and LADE signals are present simultaneously, the reset is performed first and
then directly afterwards the load operation. Therefore, the FIFO is reset and the new
value to be read in is then immediately stored in the FIFO as the first value.

R and LADE and LESE

The value at the input E is forwarded directly to the output A. The output L is set
permanently to 1 and the output FST is set permanently to 0.

E BINARY/WORD
The value to be transferred into the FIFO is specified at the input E.

#L DIRECT CONSTANT
The number of required memory locations (bytes) of the FIFO is specified at the
input A. This quantity is specified as a direct constant and results from the following
formula :
BINARY data : #L = Number of binary values to be stored
WORD data : #L = 2 * Quantity of word values to be stored
E.g. : BINARY data : 3 values -> #L = 3
WORD data : 3 values -> #L = 6

ABB Control Page C-239 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The FIFO length parameter is subjected to a plausibility check for the value 0 and
also, in word processing mode, for an odd byte parameter. If the parameter specified
at the input #L is incorrect, the FIFO will assume the initial state (as after R).

ANF BINARY/WORD
The FIFO memory start address is specified as a binary or word flag at the input
ANF. The FIFO begins with the specified flag.

A BINARY/WORD
When the FIFO is read, the current value is available at the output A. If no read order
is available, the value 0 is output.

FST WORD
The output FST indicates the current filling level of the FIFO at any time. The filling
level is the number of binary or word values stored in the FIFO.

L BINARY
The output L indicates whether or not the FIFO is empty.
L = 0 -> FIFO is not empty
L = 1 -> FIFO is empty

V BINARY
The output V indicates whether or not the FIFO is full.
V = 0 -> FIFO is not full
V = 1 -> FIFO is full
No more values can be read in if the FIFO is full. A value can only be read in once a
value has been read out. This then takes place as from the start of the FIFO.

ABB Control Page C-240 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example

FIFO for 9 binary data, stored as of %M 01,10

FBD

FIFO
%K 00,01 B/W
%M 01,01 LADE
%M 01,05 LESE
%M 01,09 R A %M 12,05
%M 06,04 E FST %MW 11,07
# 9 #L L %A 00,01
%M 01,10 ANF V %A 01,15

IL
CAL LIFO (%M01,09, %M01,01, %M01,05, %M06,04, %K00,01, #9, %M01,10,
%M12,05, %MW11,07, %A00,01, %A01,15)

FIFO for 3 word data, stored as of %MW 10,00

FBD

FIFO
%K 00,00 B/W
%M 01,00 LADE
%M 01,01 LESE
%M 02,00 R A %MW 11,01
%MW 03,01 E FST %MW 11,02
# 6 #L L %M 03,00
%MW 10,00 ANF V %M 03,01

IL
CAL LIFO (%M02,00, %M01,00, %M01,01, %MW03,01, %K00,00, #6, %MW10,00,
%MW11,01, %MW11,02, %M03,00, %M03,01)

ABB Control Page C-241 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FKG FUNCTION GENERATOR

FBD IL

!BA 0
FKG FKG
x x
XC/YC #2*n
XC/YC
y y

PARAMETERS
x WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input for the x value of the
polygon
#2*n DIRECT #, #H n : number of interpolation
CONSTANT points
XC/YC WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input for x/y-axis values of the
interpolation points;
duplicable
y WORD %OW, %MW Output for the y value of the
polygon

DESCRIPTION
In an x/y coordinate system, a polygon is defined by n coordinate points X0/Y0...Xn-
1/Yn-1. For each value at the input x, the function block outputs the affiliated y value
of the polygon through the output y.

The following applies to the x-axis coordinates :

X/Y0 < X/Y1 < X/Y2 ... < X/Yn-1
2 < n < 32767

This function block make a linear interpolation between the interpolation points. The
resulting polygon representing the relationship between x and y is :
(x - X i-1 ) * (Y i - Y i-1 )
y= + Yi-1
X i - X i-1

Note : The result of division is always rounded down, i.e. any division remainder
is ignored.

The following applies to the range outside of the interpolation points :

y = Y0 for x < X0

ABB Control Page C-242 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

y = Yn-1 for x > Xn-1

(X2/Y2)

(X1/Y1) (X3/Y3)

(Xn-1/Yn-1)
(X0/Y0)

x WORD
The current x coordinate is specified at the input x. The block then defines the y
coordinate affiliated by the polygon.

#2*n DIRECT CONSTANT

Only used in IL Language
The number of x/y coordinates needed to define the polygon is specified at the input
#2*n. This is specified as a direct constant.
n = number of interpolation points
2*n = number of x/y coordinates for n interpolation points

XC/YC WORD
This input has to be duplicated by a multiple of 2 : 2*n
- XC/YC0...XCYCn-1 specify the x coordinates of the n interpolation points.
- XC/YCn...XC/YC2n-1 specify the y coordinates of the n interpolation points.

Affiliation between (Xi,Yi) and XC/YCi :

(Xi,Yi) <-> (XC/YCi,XC/YCn+i)

y WORD
The y coordinate affiliated by the polygon of the specified x coordinate is output
through the output y.

ABB Control Page C-243 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

HLG RAMP-FUNCTION GENERATOR

FBD IL

CAL HLG (0/1,0 S,1 S,TH/T,TR/T,STOP,S,INIT,R,A1)

HLG
0/1
0 S
1 S
TH/T
TR/T
STOP
S
INIT
R A1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Selection of the setpoint 0 or
the setpoint 1
0S WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Setpoint 0
1S WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Setpoint1
TH/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Start up time scaled to the
cycle time
TR/T WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Return time scaled to the cycle
time
STOP BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Latching of the output at the
current value
S BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Setting of the output to the INIT
value
INIT WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW INIT value to which the output
can be set
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset of the output to the value
0
A1 WORD %MW, %OW Output

DESCRIPTION
The ramp-function generator serves to provide ramp-shaped adaption of the current
actual value at the output to a specified setpoint.

The value at the output of the HLG is adapted linearly from the current actual value
to the specified setpoint with the slope y’. In doing so, the value at the output
precisely runs through the amount of the setpoint during the time TH or TR. If the
value at the output of the HLG has reached the setpoint, it no longer changes unless
a new setpoint is specified.

The slope y’ of the ramp results from the specified time TH (start up time) or TR
(return time) and the amount of the setpoint :

ABB Control Page C-244 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Setpoint amount
Slope y' =
TH or TR

The slope is - positive if setpoint > actual value

- negative if setpoint < actual value
-0 if setpoint = 0
Therefore, the specified setpoint has two functions :
- its amount defines the slope of the ramp together with the specified time TH or TR;
- it represents the value to which the current actual value must be adapted in a ramp
shape.

The user may specify the start up time TH and the return time TR separately. The
direction of the slope is defined on the basis of the setpoint. The direction of the
slope then defines whether or not the running time TH or TR is used.
Slope y’ positive -> TH, i.e. the ramp runs upwards.
Slope y’ negative -> TR, i.e. the ramp runs downwards.

The start up time TH and the return time TR must be scaled to the program cycle
time TZ, i.e. the following must be specified at the corresponding inputs of the block :
- Start up time : TH/TZ
- Return time : TR/TZ
The times are specified in milliseconds.
The following applies to the time constants TH or TR : 0 < TH < 32767
0 < TR < 32767

Two setpoints can be planned (0 S and 1 S), whereby one of these setpoints is
selected by the binary input 0/1 (setpoint selection). The setpoints may assume the
following values : -32767 < setpoint < +32767

At any time, the output of the ramp-function generator can be

- stopped at the current value
- set to an initial value
- reset (output = 0)
The STOP input has the highest priority and the R input has the lowest.

The values at the inputs of the HLG can be altered at any time in the user program.
In this way, any (non-linear) adaptation to the setpoint can be realized on the basis of
the linear adaptation of the actual value.

Important
Setpoint = 0 means that the slope of the ramp is also 0, i.e. the current actual value
does not change. If it is intended to switch from an actual value unequal to 0 to an
actual value of 0, a setpoint unequal to 0 must be specified and the output of the
ramp-function generator must be limited to 0 by a subsequent limiter. (On
interpolation, the rounding transitions are based on calculation of integral numbers
only).

0/1 BINARY
One of the two setpoints is selected with the input 0/1.

ABB Control Page C-245 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

0/1 = 0 -> setpoint 0 S

0/1 = 1 -> setpoint 1 S

0S WORD
The setpoint 0 is specified at the input 0 S.

1S WORD
The setpoint 1 is specified at the input 1 S.

TH/T WORD
The startup time is specified at the input TH/T. At the same time, the start up time TH
must be scaled to the cycle time T.

TR/T WORD
The start up time is specified at the input TH/T. At the same time, the start up time
TH must be scaled to the cycle time T.

STOP BINARY
The output can be latched to the current value by means of the STOP input.
STOP = 0 -> Output not latched
STOP = 1 -> Output is latched
The STOP input has higher priority than the inputs S and R.

S BINARY
With the input S, the output can be set to the initial value specified at the input INIT.
S = 0 -> Output is not set to initial value.
S = 1 -> Output is set to initial value.

INIT WORD
The initial value to which the output is to be set if required is specified at the input
INIT.

R BINARY
The output can be set to the value 0 with the input R.
R = 0 -> Output is not reset
R = 1 -> Output is reset to the value 0.

A1 WORD
Output of the block.

Example 1
The actual value is to be changed from 0 to the setpoint + 500 (setpoint amount 500)
and then from +500 to the setpoint -1000 (setpoint amount 1000).
The start up time is TH and the return time TR.
0 S : 500
1 S : -1000

ABB Control Page C-246 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Output (actual value)

Setpoint sw itchover from 0 S -> 1

+ 500

t
TH

- 500
TR

- 1000
TR(* )

TR(*) is the actual time until the actual value has reached -1000.
During the time TH or TR, the actual value changes by the amount of the applied
setpoint.

Example 2
The actual value is to be changed from 0 to the setpoint +500 (setpoint amount 500)
and then from +500 to the setpoint 1500 (setpoint amount 1500).
The startup time is TH and the return time TR.
0 S : 500
1 S : 1500

Output (actual value)

+ 2000

+ 1500

+ 1000
Setpoint changeover
f rom 0 S -> 1

+ 500

t
TH1 TH2(* )

TH2

TR(*) is the actual time until the actual value has reached 1500.
During the time TH or TR, the actual value changes by the amount of the applied
setpoint.

IDLB READ BINARY VARIABLE, INDEXED

ABB Control Page C-247 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL IDLB (FREI,INDX,BASI,ZIEL)

IDLB
FREI
INDX
BASI
ZIEL

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Enable for the block
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW The index and the basic
variable result in the source
variable
BASI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Basic variable
ZIEL BINARY %O, %M Target variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves the purpose of indexed reading of binary variables.
The source variable to be read is obtained from indexing the basic variable. The
value of the source variable read is allocated to the target variable.

The group and channel numbers of the source flag (source variable) are determined
from the basic flag and the index INDX.
The source flag is : M (G_Basis + A) , (K_Basis + B)
where : G_Basis : Group number of the basic flag
K_Basis : Channel number of the basic flag

INDX
Formula : A= Remainder B
16

Group No. of the source flag : Group No. of the basic flag + A
Channel No. of the source flag :Channel No. of the basic flag + B

Example :
Basic variable : M 000,00
INDX = 10
-> A = 10 : 16 -> A = 0, Remainder B = 10
->Source variable : M (000+A),(00+B) = M (000+0),(00+10) = M 000,10

Further examples :
Basic variable INDX Source variable
M 000,00 0 M 000,00
M 000,00 2 M 000,02
M 000,00 16 M 001,00
M 000,02 18 M 001,04

ABB Control Page C-248 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

I 00,00 3 I 00,03
I 01,01 5 I 01,06
O 05,05 6 O 05,11

FREI BINARY
Enable block
FREI= 0 -> Block is not processed
FREI= 1 -> The value of the source variable is read and allocated to the
target variable ZIEL.

INDX WORD
The index value is specified at the input INDX. The source variable (see above for a
calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.
Value range : -16383 < INDX < +16383

BASI BINRAY
The basic variable is specified at the input BASI. The source variable (see above for
a calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.

ZIEL BINARY
The target variable is specified at the output ZIEL. The value of the selected source
variable is allocated to the target variable ZIEL.

IDLm READ WORD VARIABLE, INDEXED

FBD IL
CAL IDLm (FREI,INDX,BASI,ZIEL)
or
!BA0
IDLm IDL
FREI FREI
INDX INDX
BASI BASI
ZIEL ZIEL

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Enable for the block
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW The index and the basic
variable result in the source
variable
BASI WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Basic variable
ZIEL WORD %OW, %MW Target variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves the purpose of indexed reading of word variables.
The source variable to be read is obtained from indexing the basic variable. The
value of the source variable read is allocated to the target variable.

ABB Control Page C-249 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The group and channel numbers of the source flag (source variable) are determined
from the basic flag and the index INDX.
The source flag is : MW (G_Basis + A) , (K_Basis + B)
where : G_Basis : Group number of the basic flag
K_Basis : Channel number of the basic flag

INDX
Formula : A= Remainder B
16

Group No. of the source flag : Group No. of the basic flag + A
Channel No. of the source flag :Channel No. of the basic flag + B

Example :
Basic variable : MW 000,00
INDX = 10
-> A = 10 : 16 -> A = 0, Remainder B = 10
->Source variable : MW (000+A),(00+B) = MW(000+0),(00+10) = MW 000,10

Further examples :
Basic variable INDX Source variable
MW 000,00 0 MW 000,00
MW 000,00 2 MW 000,02
MW 000,00 16 MW 001,00
MW 000,02 18 MW 001,04
IW 00,00 3 IW 00,03
IW 01,01 5 IW 01,06
OW 05,05 6 OW 05,11

FREI BINARY
Enable block
FREI= 0 -> Block is not processed
FREI= 1 -> The value of the source variable is read and allocated to the
target variable ZIEL.

INDX WORD
The index value is specified at the input INDX. The source variable (see above for a
calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.
Value range : -16383 < INDX < +16383
If INDX is out of range, the function block is not processed.

BASI WORD
The basic variable is specified at the input BASI. The source variable (see above for
a calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.

ZIEL WORD
The target variable is specified at the output ZIEL. The value of the selected source
variable is allocated to the target variable ZIEL.

ABB Control Page C-250 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

IDSB WRITE BINARY VARIABLE, INDEXED

FBD IL

CAL IDSB (FREI,QUEL,INDX,BASI)

IDSB
FREI
QUEL
INDX
BASI

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Enable block
QUEL BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Source variable
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW The current target variable
results from the index and the
basic variable
BASI BINARY %O, %M Basic variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves the purpose of indexed wri–ting of binary variables.
When the block is enabled, the value of the source variable is read and allocated to
the target variable. The target variable is defined by indexing the basic variable.

The group and channel number of the target flag (target variable) are determined on
the basis of the basic flag and the index INDX.
The target flag is called : M (G_Basis+A),(K_Basis+B) where :
G_Basis : Group number of the basic flag
K_Basis : Channel number of the basic flag

INDX
Formula : A= Remainder B
16

Group No. of the target flag : Group No. of the basic flag + A
Channel No. of the target flag : Channel No. of the basic flag + B

Example :
Basic variable : M 000,00
INDX = 10
-> A = 10 : 16 -> A = 0, Remainder B = 10
-> Target variable : M(000+A), (00+B) = M (000+0),(00+10) = M 000,10

Further examples :
Basic variable INDX Target
M 000,00 0 M 000,00
M 000,00 2 M 000,02
M 000,00 16 M 001,00

ABB Control Page C-251 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

M 000,02 18 M 001,04
O 00,00 3 O 00,03
O 01,01 5 O 01,06
O 05,05 6 O 05,11

FREI BINARY
Enable block
FREI=0 : -> Block is not processed
FREI=1 : -> The value of the source variable is read and allocated to the
target variable ZIEL.

QUEL BINARY
The source variable is specified at the input QUEL. The value of this variable is read
and allocated to the target variable.

INDX WORD
The index value is specified at the input INDX. The target variable (see above for a
calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.
Value range : -16383 < INDX < +16383

BASI BINARY
The basic variable is specified at the input BASI. The target variable (see above for a
calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.

IDSm WRITE WORD VARIABLE, INDEXED

FBD/LD IL
CAL IDSm (FREI,QUEL,INDX,BASI)
or
!BA0
IDSm IDS
FREI FREI
QUEL QUEL
INDX INDX
BASI BASI

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Enable block
QUEL WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Source variable
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW The current target variable
results from the index and the
basic variable
BASI WORD %OW, %MW Basic variable

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves the purpose of indexed wri–ting of word variables.
When the block is enabled, the value of the source variable is read and allocated to

ABB Control Page C-252 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

the target variable. The target variable is defined by indexing the basic variable.

The group and channel number of the target flag (target variable) are determined on
the basis of the basic flag and the index INDX.
The target flag is called : MW (G_Basis+A),(K_Basis+B) where :
G_Basis : Group number of the basic flag
K_Basis : Channel number of the basic flag

INDX
Formula : A= Remainder B
16

Group No. of the target flag : Group No. of the basic flag + A
Channel No. of the target flag : Channel No. of the basic flag + B

Example :
Basic variable : MW 000,00
INDX = 10
-> A = 10 : 16 -> A = 0, Remainder B = 10
-> Target variable : MW(000+A), (00+B) = MW (000+0),(00+10) = MW 000,10

Further examples :
Basic variable INDX Target
MW 000,00 0 MW 000,00
MW 000,00 2 MW 000,02
MW 000,00 16 MW 001,00
MW 000,02 18 MW 001,04
OW 00,00 3 OW 00,03
OW 01,01 5 OW 01,06
OW 05,05 6 OW 05,11

FREI BINARY
Enable block
FREI=0 : -> Block is not processed
FREI=1 : -> The value of the source variable is read and allocated to the
target variable ZIEL.

QUEL WORD
The source variable is specified at the input QUEL. The value of this variable is read
and allocated to the target variable.

INDX WORD
The index value is specified at the input INDX. The target variable (see above for a
calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variable.
Value range : -16383 < INDX < +16383
If INDX is out of range, the function block is not processed.

BASI WORD
The basic variable is specified at the input BASI. The target variable (see above for a
calculation) results from the index INDX and the basic variables.

ABB Control Page C-253 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

INITS INITIALIZE MEMORY AREA IN THE OPERAND MEMORY

WITH ZERO

FBD/LD IL

INITS CAL INITS (01,#n,VAR)

01
#n
VAR

PARAMETERS
01 BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S Enabling for non-recurring
processing of the block (0/1
edge)
#n DIRECT #, #H Quantity (n) of memory words
CONSTANT to be initialized
VAR BINARY, %I, %O, %M, %K, %S, The n memory words specified
WORD, %IW, %AM, %MW, %KW, at the input #n are initialized as
DOUBLE %MD, %KD from this variable.
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves the purpose of word-by-word initialization of memory
areas in the operand memory with the value 0.

The block is run through precisely once in the event of a 0/1 edge at the input 01. In
doing so, n memory words are initialized with the value 0 as from the variable
specified at the input VAR. The variable specified at this input can be a BINARY,
WORD or DOUBLE WORD operand.
The following must be observed :
BINARY operand : Occupies 1 BYTE in the operand memory.
WORD operand : Occupies 1 WORD in the operand memory.
DOUBLE WORD operand : Occupies 2 WORDS in the operand memory.

0-1 BINARY
Block enable.
The block is run through precisely once when a 0/1 edge appears at this input.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Quantity (n) of memory words to be initialized specified as a DIRECT CONSTANT.
Value range : 0 < n < 65535
No initialization is realized if the value 0 is specified.

ABB Control Page C-254 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

VAR BINARY, WORD, DOUBLE WORD

n memory words are initialized with the value 0 as from this variable (inclusive).

Example

The 4 binary flags

%M 03,01
%M 03,02
%M 03,03
%M 03,04
are to be initialized with the value 0.
A binary flag in memory takes up 1 byte. Therefore, there is a total of 4 bytes = 2 words to be initialized.
For this reason, the value 2 must be specified at the input #n as a DIRECT CONSTANT and the flag %M
03,01 at the input VAR.

FBD/LD IL

INITS
CAL INITS( %M00.00, #2, %M03.01
%M 00,00 01
#2 #n
%M 03,01 VAR

INITV INITIALIZE VARIABLES

ABB Control Page C-255 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD/LD IL

!BA 0
INITV
INITV
01
0-1
BW/VAL
#W/B
#n
#W0
VR0

PARAMETERS
0-1 BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S Enabling for non-recurring
processing of the block (0/1
edge)
BW/VAL BINARY, %I, %O, %M, Initialization value for the I
WORD %IW, %OW, %MW subsequent variable and
DIRECT CONSTANT #,#H variable (the format is internally
recognised)The inputs BW/val
can be duplicated in pairs
#W/B DIRECT #, #H Format specification
CONSTANT
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of variables to be
CONSTANT initialized
#W0 DIRECT #, #H Initialization value for the
CONSTANT subsequent variable;
The inputs #W0 and VR0 can
be duplicated in pairs
VR0 BINARY, %I, %O, %M, Variable to be initialized;
WORD %IW, %OW, %MW The inputs VR0 and #W0 can
be duplicated in pairs

DESCRIPTION
This function block serves to initialize BINARY and WORD variables with numeric
values.
The initialization values are specified as direct constants. The block is run through
precisely once when a 0/1 edge appears at the input 0-1.

01 BINARY
The block is run through precisely once when a 0/1 edge appears at the input 0-1.

BW/VAL BINARY/WORD/DIRECT CONSTANT

The variable to be initialized is specified at the input BW/val and the second
parameter is its value as a direct constant
This parameter has to be duplicated in pair

ABB Control Page C-256 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

#W/B DIRECT CONSTANT

The format of the variable to be initialized is specified as a direct constant at the
input #W/B. The following applies :
#W/B = 1 : Word variable (%IW, %OW, %MW)
#W/B = 0 : Binary variable (%I, %O, %M)

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
The quantity n of variables to be initialized is specified as a direct constant at the
input #n.

#W0 DIRECT CONSTANT

The initialization value for the subsequent variable is specified as a direct constant at
the input #W0.
The inputs #W0 and VR0 can be duplicated in pairs.
The following affiliations apply :
Value 0 -> Variable 0
Value n-1 -> Variable n-1

VR0 BINARY/WORD
The first variable to be initialized is specified at the input VR0.
The inputs VR0 and #W0 can be duplicated in pairs.

Example
The following variables are to be initialized:
%MW 00,09 = 4853
%MW 03,07 = 12
%MW 02,15 = 8

FBD/LD IL

!BA 0
INITV
INITV
%M 00.00 01 %M 00.00
%MW 00.09 BW/val # 1
# 4853 BW/val # 3
%MW 03.07 BW/val # 4853
# 12 BW/val %MW 00.09
%MW 02.15 BW/val # 12
# 8 BW/val %MW 03.07
# 8
%MW 02.15

LDT ILLUMINATION PUSHBUTTON CONTROL

ABB Control Page C-257 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL LDT (EIN,AUS,E,R,A,EINI,AUSI)

LDT
EIN
AUS
E A
R EINI
AUSI

PARAMETERS
EIN BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Dynamic input for activating
output A
AUS BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Dynamic input for deactivating
output A
E BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Dynamic input for activating
and deactivating output A
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Static input for deactivating
output A
A BINARY %O, %M Output
EINI BINARY %O, %M Pulse for the duration of one
PLC program cycle when
activating output A
AUSI BINARY %O, %M Pulse for the duration of one
PLC program cycle when
deactivating output A

DESCRIPTION
This function block changes the state at the output A with every 0/1 edge at the input
E (like a toggle flip-flop). However, this only applies if the input R is inactive. The
output A can be influenced additionally with the inputs EIN, AUS and R.
All inputs except R are edge-controlled, i. e. they react only to a 0/1 edge. The input
R is active for as long as a static 1 signal is present at it. Brief pulses are available at
the output EINI and AUSI when a status change of the output A occurs.

EIN AUS E R A NA : Inverting of the previous state of A

X X X H L X : State is ignored
X X > L NA > : 0/1 edge
X > < L L < : no 0/1 edge
> < < L H L : State 0
H : State 1

EIN BINARY
The output A is set with every 0/1 edge at the input EIN. However, this only applies
when the inputs AUS, E and R are inactive. Therefore, of all inputs the input EIN has
the lowest priority.

ABB Control Page C-258 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

AUS BINARY
The output A is reset with every 0/1 edge at the input AUS. Therefore, the input AUS
has a higher priority than the input EIN, but a lower priority than the inputs E and R.

E BINARY
With every 0/1 edge at the input E, the block changes the status at the output A.
However, this only applies if the input R is inactive. Therefore, the input E has a
higher priority than the inputs EIN and AUS, but a lower priority than the input R.

R BINARY
The output A is reset when a static 1 signal is present at the input R.
The input R has a higher priority than the inputs E and EIN. A priority conflict with the
input AUS is not possible because both inputs have the same effect on the outputs.

A BINARY
The output A is changed corresponding to the definition of the inputs.

EINI BINARY
A pulse is generated at the output EINI with every 0/1 edge of the output A. The
length of this pulse is 1 program cycle.

AUSI BINARY :
A pulse is generated at the output AUSI with every 1/0 edge of the output A. The
length of this pulse is 1 program cycle.

LIFO STACK, LAST IN/FIRST OUT

FBD IL

CAL LIFO (R,LADE,LESE,E,B/W,#L,ANF,A,FST,L,V)

LIFO
B/W
LADE
LESE
R A
E FST
#L L
ANF V

PARAMETERS
B/W BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Binary data/word data
LADE BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Load LIFO
LESE BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Read LIFO
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset LIFO, 0/1 edge
E BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Enter data in the LIFO
WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW
#L DIRECT #, #H Number of memory locations

ABB Control Page C-259 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

CONSTANT (bytes)
ANF BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Start of the LIFO in the flag
WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW area
A BINARY %I, %M Output of data from the LIFO
WORD %OW, %MW
FST WORD %OW, %MW Filling level of the LIFO
L BINARY %O, %M LIFO empty
V BINARY %O, %M LIFO full

DESCRIPTION
This function block realizes a stack for binary or word data from which the data
written in last is read out first (last in/first out).

B/W BINARY
The input B/W serves to preselect binary or word processing.
B/W = 0 -> word processing
B/W = 1 -> binary processing
Binary or word processing is defined once and must not be changed during operation
of the LIFO.

LADE BINARY
The value present at the input E is transferred to the next free position of the LIFO by
means of a 1 signal at the LADE input. If the LIFO is “full” and a “load” signal is
present, the new value will not be read in. A new value can only be read in if a value
has been read out first. It is then transferred to the first position of the LIFO.

LESE BINARY
A 1 signal at the input LESE results in output of the current LIFO value through the
output A. If the LIFO is “empty”, a pending read order is ignored and the value 0 is
output through the output A. The output A is always set to 0 if there is no read order.

LADE and LESE

If load and read orders are present simultaneously, the value to be loaded is
forwarded directly from the input E to the output A. At the same time, the LIFO does
not store the value. The LIFO does not change its filling level in this mode. The value
output through the output FST remains constant. If the LIFO is empty, the output L
remains 1 and the output FST is set to 0.

R BINARY
A 0->1 edge at the input R results in the reset of the block. Therefore, values read in
before are no longer available. The output L assumes the value 1 and the outputs
FST and A assume the value 0.

R and LADE
If R and LADE signals are present simultaneously, the reset is performed first and
then directly afterwards the load operation. Therefore, the LIFO is reset and the new
value to be read in is then immediately stored in the LIFO as the first value.

R and LADE and LESE

ABB Control Page C-260 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

The value at the input E is forwarded directly to the output A. The output L is set
permanently to 1 and the output FST is set permanently to 0.

E BINARY/WORD
The value to be transferred into the LIFO is specified at the input E.

#L DIRECT CONSTANT
The number of required memory locations (bytes) of the LIFO is specified at the
input #L. This quantity is specified as a direct constant and results from the following
formula :
BINARY data : #L = Number of binary values to be stored
WORD data : #L = 2 * Quantity of word values to be stored
E.g. : BINARY data : 3 values -> #L = 3
WORD data : 3 values -> #L = 6

The LIFO length parameter is subjected to a plausibility check for the value 0 and
also, in word processing mode, for an odd byte parameter. If the parameter specified
at the input #L is incorrect, the LIFO will assume the initial state (as after R).

ANF BINARY/WORD
The LIFO memory start address is specified as a binary or word flag at the input
ANF. The LIFO begins with the specified flag.

A BINARY/WORD
When the LIFO is read, the current value is available at the output A. If no read order
is available, the value 0 is output.

FST WORD
The output FST indicates the current filling level of the LIFO at any time. The filling
level is the number of binary or word values stored in the LIFO.

L BINARY
The output L indicates whether or not the LIFO is empty.
L = 0 -> LIFO is not empty
L = 1 -> LIFO is empty

V BINARY
The output V indicates whether or not the LIFO is full.
V = 0 -> LIFO is not full
V = 1 -> LIFO is full
No more values can be read in if the LIFO is full. A value can only be read in again
once a value has been read out. This then takes place as from the start of the LIFO.

Example

ABB Control Page C-261 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

LIFO for 9 binary data, stored as of %M 01,10

FBD

LIFO
%K 00,01 B/W
%M 01,01 LADE
%M 01,05 LESE
%M 01,09 R A %M 12,05
%M 06,04 E FST %MW 11,07
# 9 #L L %A 00,01
%M 01,10 ANF V %A 01,15

IL
CAL LIFO (%M01,09, %M01,01, %M01,05, %M06,04, %K00,01, #9, %M01,10,
%M12,05, %MW11,07, %A00,01, %A01,15)

LIFO for 3 word data, stored as of %MW 10,00

FBD

LIFO
%K 00,00 B/W
%M 01,00 LADE
%M 01,01 LESE
%M 02,00 R A %MW 11,01
%MW 03,01 E FST %MW 11,02
# 6 #L L %M 03,00
%MW 10,00 ANF V %M 03,01

IL
CAL LIFO (%M02,00, %M01,00, %M01,01, %MW03,01, %K00,00, #6, %MW10,00,
%MW11,01, %MW11,02, %M03,00, %M03,01)

LIZU LIST ALLOCATOR

ABB Control Page C-262 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD/LD IL

!BA 0
LIZU LIZU
ZEIG ZEIG
#E A= #E #n
A #E
A= #E
A

PARAMETERS
ZEIG WORD %OW, %IW, %MW, %KW Pointer to the list of direct
constants
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of direct constants in
CONSTANT the list
#E DIRECT #, #H List of direct constants;
CONSTANT capable of duplication
A WORD %OW, %MW Selected direct constant
A=#E BINARY %O, %M 0 < ZEIG < #n, i. e. pointer in
the valid range

DESCRIPTION
This function block has a list of direct constants at its inputs #E (#E0... #En-1). With
a list pointer, it selects a constant out of this list and outputs it through its output A.

ZEIG WORD
The pointer to the direct constant to be selected from the list is specified at the input
ZEIG. The following affiliations apply :
ZEIG = 0 -> Direct constant at #E0
ZEIG = 1 -> Direct constant at #E1
. . . .
ZEIG = n-1 -> Direct constant at #En-1

The value at the input ZEIG is subjected to a validity check. The result of this range
check is signalled at the output A=#E.
Allowed range : 0 < ZEIG < n-1
Where n : Number of the inputs #E0...#En-1.
No allocation to the output A takes place if the value at the input ZEIG is outside the
allowed range.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
ONLY used in IL language
The number n of the direct constants planned at the inputs #E is specified at the
input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.

ABB Control Page C-263 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

#E DIRECT CONSTANT
The input #E is capable of duplication (#E0...#En-1). One of the direct constants
specified at the inputs #E is selected with the value at the input ZEIG and allocated
to the output A.

A=#E BINARY
The output A=#E specifies whether the value of the list pointer (input ZEIG) is within
the allowed range.
Allowed range : 0 < ZEIG < n-1
where n : Number of the direct constants at #E0...#En-1.
The following applies :
ZEIG in the allowed range -> A=#E = 1
ZEIG in the forbidden range -> A=#E = 0
If the list pointer has a forbidden value, no constant can be selected nor allocated to
the output A. In this case, the output A is not updated.

A WORD
The value of the selected direct constant is allocated to the operand at the output A.

MAX MAXIMUM VALUE GENERATOR

FBD IL

!BA 0
MAX MAX
#n
E1 MAX E1
MAX

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs
CONSTANT
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW 1st input value;
capable of duplication
MAX WORD %OW, MW Output (maximum value)

DESCRIPTION
From n operands, this function block generates the maximum value and allocates it
to the output.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

Only used in IL.
The number of operands from which the maximum value is to be determined is
specified at the input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.
n > 0 applies.

ABB Control Page C-264 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

E1 WORD
The input must be duplicated as many times as necessary until the number of inputs
specified at the input #n exists. On the basis of the values of the operands at these
inputs, the maximum value is determined and is allocated to the output MAX.

MAX WORD
The maximum value from the n input operands is available at the output MAX.

MAXD MAXIMUM VALUE GENERATOR, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

!BA 0
MAXD MAXD
#n
E1 MAX E1
MAX

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs
CONSTANT
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD 1st input value;
WORD capable of duplication
MAX DOUBLE %MD Output (maximum value)
WORD

DESCRIPTION
From n operands, this function block generates the maximum value and allocates it
to the output.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

Only used in IL.
The number of operands from which the maximum value is to be determined is
specified at the input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.
n > 0 applies.

E1 DOUBLE WORD
The input must be duplicated as many times as necessary until the number of inputs
specified at the input #n exists. On the basis of the values of the operands at these
inputs, the maximum value is determined and is allocated to the output MAX.

MAX DOUBLE WORD

The maximum value from the n input operands is available at the output MAX.

ABB Control Page C-265 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MAZ MAXIMUM VALUE GENERATOR AS A FUNCTION OF TIME

FBD IL

CAL MAZ (E1,S,INIT,MAZ)

MAZ
E1
S
INIT MAZ

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input value whose maximum
time is to be determined
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Set input
INIT WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Initial value
MAZ WORD %OW, %MW Maximum value

DESCRIPTION
This function block determines, on the basis of the time progression of a signal, its
maximum value occurring up to the current point in time.

The value of the operand at the input E1 is compared to the previously occurring
maximum value.

If the input value E1 is higher than the previously occurring maximum, the input value
is the new maximum value and is allocated to the operand at the output MAZ.

If the input value E1 is less than the previously occurring maximum value, the
previous maximum value is allocated to the output.

The output MAZ is set to the value of the operand at the input INIT (initial value) with
the 0->1 edge at the binary input S.

The following applies :

E1 < MAZ -> MAZ = MAZ
E1 > MAZ -> MAZ = E1
S = 0->1 edge -> MAZ = INIT

MAZD MAXIMUM VALUE GENERATOR AS A FUNCTION OF

TIME, DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-266 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL MAZD (E1,S,INIT,MAZ)

MAZD
E1
S
INIT MAZ

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input value whose maximum
WORD time is to be determined
S BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Set input
INIT DOUBLE %MD Initial value
WORD
MAZ DOUBLE %MD Maximum value
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block determines, on the basis of the time progression of a signal, its
maximum value occurring up to the current point in time.

The value of the operand at the input E1 is compared to the previously occurring
maximum value.

If the input value E1 is higher than the previously occurring maximum, the input value
is the new maximum value and is allocated to the operand at the output MAZ.

If the input value E1 is less than the previously occurring maximum value, the
previous maximum value is allocated to the output.

The output MAZ is set to the value of the operand at the input INIT (initial value) with
the 0->1 edge at the binary input S.

The following applies :

E1 < MAZ -> MAZ = MAZ
E1 > MAZ -> MAZ = E1
S = 0->1 edge -> MAZ = INIT

MIN MINIMUM VALUE GENERATOR

ABB Control Page C-267 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
MIN MIN
#n
E1 MIN E1
MIN

PARAMETER
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs
CONSTANT
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW 1st input value;
capable of duplication
MIN WORD %OW, %MW Output (minimum value)

DESCRIPTION
This function block determines the minimum value from n operands and allocates it
to the output.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

Only used in IL.
The number of operands from which the minimum value is to be determined is
specified at the input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.
n > 0 applies.

E1 WORD
The input E1 must be duplicated as often as the number of inputs specified at the
input #n exists. On the basis of the values of the operands at these inputs, the
minimum value is determined and is allocated to the output MIN.

MIN WORD
The minimum value of the n input operands is available at the output MIN.

MIND MINIMUM VALUE GENERATOR, DOUBLE WORD

ABB Control Page C-268 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
MIND MIND
#n
E1 MIN E1
MIN

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs
CONSTANT
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD 1st input value;
WORD capable of duplication
MIN DOUBLE %MD Output (minimum value)
WORD

DESCRIPTION
This function block determines the minimum value from n operands and allocates
this value to the output.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

Only used in IL.
The number of operands from which the minimum value is to be determined is
specified at the input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.
n > 0 applies.

E1 DOUBLE WORD
The input E1 must be duplicated until the number of inputs specified at the input #n
exists. On the basis of the values of the operands at these inputs, the minimum
value is determined and is allocated to the output MIN.

MIN DOUBLE WORD

The minimum value of the n input operands is available at the output MIN.

MUXR MULTIPLEXER WITH RESET

ABB Control Page C-269 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

! BA 0
MUXR
MUXR
E E
INDX INDX
#n
INOX
A INOK A

PARAMETERS
E WORD %IW, %OW, MW, KW Input
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, MW, KW Index input
#n DIRECT #,#H Quantity n of word outputs
CONSTANT A0 ... An-1
INOK BINARY %O, M Range monitoring for input
INDX
A WORD %OW, MW Word outputs A0 ... An-1;
capable of duplication

DESCRIPTION
This function block connects the input E to one of the outputs A0...An-1 depending
on the input INDX.
The word outputs that are not connected are set to 0.
The validity of the value at the input INDX is checked.

Relationship between E, INDX and A0...An-1 :

The input INDX is used to define with which of the outputs A0...An-1 the input E is
connected.

The following apply : INDX = 1 : E -> A0

INDX = 2 : E -> A1
INDX = 3 : E -> A2
: :: :
INDX = n : E -> An-1
where 1 < INDX < n < 32767 (theoretically)

E WORD
Input which is switched through to one of the outputs A0...An-1.

INDX WORD
Index input for selection of one of the outputs A0...An-1.
Value range : 1 < INDX < n
Note : INDX = 0 can be used to initialize the outputs A0 ... An-1 (A0 ... An-1 = 0).

ABB Control Page C-270 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL.
Quantity n of word outputs A0 ... An-1.

INOK BINARY
Range monitoring of the INDX input
The output indicates whether or not the input INDX is within the valid range.
Valid range : 1 < INDX < n
INOK = 1 -> Index input INDX within the valid range
INOK = 0 -> Index input INDX in the invalid range -> A0...An-1 = 0

If the word input INDX is not within the valid range, all word outputs A0 to An-1 are
set to 0. Thus, for example, INDX = 0 can be used to initialize the outputs (A0...An-1
= 0).

A WORD
The output A is capable of duplication (A0...An-1). The input E is allocated to one of
the n outputs A0...An-1.

MUXRD MULTIPLEXER, DOUBLE WORD WITH RESET

FBD IL

! BA 0
MUXRD
MUXRD
E E
INDX INDX
#n
INOX
A INOK A

PARAMETERS
E DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input
WORD
INDX WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Index input
#n DIRECT #,#H Quantity n of double word
CONSTANT outputs A0 ... An-1
INOK BINARY %O, %M Range monitoring for input
INDX
A WORD %MD Double word outputs A0...An-1;
capable of duplication

DESCRIPTION
This function block connects the input E to one of the outputs A0...An-1 depending

ABB Control Page C-271 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

on the input INDX.

The double word outputs that are not connected are set to 0.
The validity of the value at the input INDX is checked.

Relationship between E, INDX and A0...An-1 :

The input INDX is used to define with which of the outputs A0...An-1 the input E is
connected.

The following applies :

INDX = 1 : E -> A0
INDX = 2 : E -> A1
INDX = 3 : E -> A2
: : : :
INDX = n : E -> An-1
where : 1 < INDX < n < 32767 (theoretically)

E DOUBLE WORD
Input which is switched through to one of the outputs A0...An-1.

INDX WORD
Index input for selection of one of the outputs A0...An-1.
Value range : 1 < INDX < n
Note : INDX = 0 can be used to initialize the outputs A0...An-1 (A0...An-1 = 0).

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL.
Quantity n of double word outputs A0...An-1.

INOK BINARY
Range monitoring of the input INDX
The output indicates whether or not the input INDX is within the valid range.
Valid range : 1 < INDX < n
INOK = 1 -> Index input INDX within the valid range
INOK = 0 -> Index input INDX in the invalid range -> A0...An-1 = 0

If the word input INDX is not within the valid range, all double word outputs A0 to An-
1 are set to 0. Therefore, for example, INDX = 0 can be used to initialize the outputs
(A0...An-1 = 0).

A DOUBLE WORD
The output A is capable of duplication (A0...An-1). The input E is allocated to one of
the n outputs A0...An-1.

NPULSE

ABB Control Page C-272 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL NPULSE (VAL,RESET,FREQ,

NPULSE NB,RDY,VAL_P)
VAL
RESET
FREQ RDY
NB VAL_P

PARAMETERS
VAL BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S Validation bit
RESET BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S Reset
FREQ WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Frequnecy
NB WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Number of pulses
RDY BINARY %M, %O Ready
VAL_P WORD %OW, %MW Number of pulses elapsed

DESCRIPTION
The %O 62.00 output of central units serie 40 and 50 can be used for a pulse
generator.

Pulses are generated at the output %O 62.00.

The rising edge at the input VAL starts the pulse generator from the beginning.
The first period starts with a high signal.

VAL 0 NB

% O 62.00

T w ith T < 1 cycle time

VAL BINARY
Validation bit
VAL 0->1 The pulse mode is validated. %O 62.00 can not be used normally.

RESET BINARY
Reset =1 stops the pulse generator, the output is set to 0 till reset =1

FREQ WORD
The frequency is defined with : 1/( (256-FREQ)*384 10 -6 ) Hz

Pulse frequency : 10 Hz ≤ Frequency ≤ 2,604 kHz

ABB Control Page C-273 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FREQ = 0 Frequency = 10.173Hz

FREQ = 1 Frequency = 11.212Hz
...
FREQ = 255 Frequency = 2,604Khz

If FREQ <0 then Frequency = 10.173Hz

If FREQ > 255 then Frequency = 2,604Khz

NB WORD
Number of pulses to be generated.
If NB<0 then the function NPULSE generates continiuously pulses till RESET input is
valided.

RDY BINARY
Ready bit
RDY = 0 Counting
RDY = 1 No counting

VAL_P WORD
Number of pulses elapsed
This number is estimated by the function bloc every cycle time. It doesn’t represent
the exact value.

The internal memory bit %O62.00 is disabled during pulses are generating

SFEHSU ERROR SEARCHER WITH STORAGE

FBD IL

!BA 0
SFEHSU
SFEHSU S
S R
R FSU
FSU FKOP
FKOP #n
B END B
NR END
NR

PARAMETERS
S BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Set
R BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Reset
FSU BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Enable search
FKOP BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Enable copy
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of binary variables
CONSTANT
B BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K List of binary variables;
capable of duplication

ABB Control Page C-274 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

END BINARY %O, %M List end reached

NR WORD %OW, %MW List number of the variable
found

DESCRIPTION
This function block successively searches through a list of binary variables (%I, %O,
%M, %S) for set binary variables. If a set binary variable is found, its number is
output through the output NR. In doing so, the block does not directly search through
the input list for the set binary variables, but through its image, which it stores in an
internal list. After a set binary variable has been found in the internal list and its
number has been output through the output NR, this binary variable is deleted from
the internal list.

S BINARY
A 1 signal at the input S results in the following :
– All set binary variables of the input list are additionally entered in the internal list
(ORed with the internal list).
– The block is prepared for a search from the start of the internal list, i. e. the internal
list’s pointer is set to its start.
– The output END (list end reached) is set to 1 and the output NR (number of the
binary variable) is set to 0.
– If a set variable has been found during the previous search in the internal list, this
is deleted from the internal list in order to avoid a double message.

R BINARY
– All set binary variables in the internal list are deleted when the input R has a 1
signal. The set binary variables at the block’s inputs are not affected by this.
– The pointer to the internal list is not changed, i. e. a subsequent search begins as
from the point to which the pointer of the internal list pointed before deletion.
– The output END is set to 1 and the output NR is set to 0.

FSU BINARY
– A 1 signal enables the search for set binary variables in the internal list.
– A 0 signal disables the search; in doing so, the old values at the outputs are
reallocated during each cycle.
– If a binary variabe with the value 1 has been found in the internal list, the number
of this set binary variable is output through the output NR. The binary variable is then
cleared from the internal list. The output END (list end reached) is set to 0 if the
binary variable is not the last one in the list.
– Numbering of the binary variables begins with 1.
– The output END retains the value 0 as long as the block has not reached the end
of the internal list during the search.
– Each time it is called again, the block continues the search in the internal list,
beginning with the next binary variable a fter the one found last. Beforehand, the
binary variable found last is deleted from the internal list in order to avoid a double
message.
– The following applies if the end of the internal list is reached during the search :
• the output END (list end reached) is set to 1.
• the number of the binary variable found last in the internal list is output through the

ABB Control Page C-275 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

output NR.
• each further time the block is called, the internal list is searched through as from
the point of the binary variable found last. The search ends when a set binary
variable is found or when the end of the list is reached.
- If the last binary variable of the list is set and has been found during the search, the
search stops there until a new search from the start of the internal list is prepared by
means of the input S.
– If no set binary variable has been found during the course of a search from the
start of the list, the output END (list end reached) is set to 1 and the output NR
(number) retains the value 0. Each time the block is called again, the whole list is
always searched through until a binary variable assumes the value 1 and is found.

FKOP BINARY
When the input FKOP has a 1 signal, all set binary variables of the input list are
additionally entered in the internal list. At the same time, the binary variables already
set in the internal list are retained. Updating is realized by “ORing” of the input list
with the internal list.
Restart when searching after updating
Updating of the internal list has no influence on the next search. The search begins
precisely at the point in the internal list where it would also have been begun if no
updating had taken place.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
ONLY used in IL language
The number of binary variables planned at the inputs B0...Bn-1 is specified at the
input #n. This is specified as a direct constant.
Important : The quantity at the input #n must be an integral multiple of 16. Dummy
operands may also be planned (e.g. %K0,0 is specified at all inputs not needed) in
order to keep to this stipulation.

B BINARY
The input B is capable of duplication (B0...Bn-1). The binary variables to be
examined are specified at the inputs B0...Bn-1. The number of variables must always
be an integral multiple of 16. To achieve this, assign %K0,0 = 0 to inputs Bi that are
not needed.

END BINARY
Whether or not the end of the list has been reached during the search is signalled at
the output END.
END = 0 -> List end not reached
END = 1 -> List end reached
If the last variable of the list is set and has been found during the search just carried
out, its number is output through the output NR and the value 1 is additionally
allocated to the output END.

NR WORD
The list number of the variable found last is output through the output NR. The
following affiliations apply :

ABB Control Page C-276 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Variable at the input List number

B0 1
B1 2
. .
. .
. .
Bn-1 n

If the end of the list is reached during the search without a new variable having been
found, the number of the variable found at last continues to be output through the
output NR.
The value 0 is output through the output NR if no variable is set in the list.

Priorities of the inputs S, R, FSU, FKOP

- The set input S has the highest priority. No other input is processed as long as the
input S has a 1 signal.
- The reset input R has the second highest priority. The subsequent inputs are not
processed as long as the input R has a 1 signal.
- The update input FKOP has priority over the enable search input FSU.
Updating of the internal list (input FKOP) :
Case 1 : Updating enabled (FKOP = 1)
If updating is enabled, all set binary input variables are additionally entered in the
internal list. If the search is enabled at the input FSU, it is carried out immediately
after updating of the internal list.
Case 2 : Updating not enabled (FKOP = 0)
If updating is not enabled, the search is carried out immediately if enabled at the
input FSU.
If the search is not enabled in both cases, the old values are output through the
outputs END and NR.

ABB Control Page C-277 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

UHR CLOCK

FBD IL

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S Enable block processing
S BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K, %S 0/1 edge sets the time and date
SEC WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set input for the seconds
MIN WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set inputs for the minutes
H WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set inputs for the hours
TAG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set inputs for the days
MON WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set inputs for the months
JHR WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set inputs for the years
WTG WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Set inputs for the weekdays
AKT BINARY %O, %M Topicality (usefulness) of the
data at the outputs
FEHL WORD %OW, %MW Error identifier
ASEC WORD %OW, %MW Seconds output
AMIN WORD %OW, %MW Minutes output
AH WORD %OW, %MW Hours output
ATAG WORD %OW, %MW Days output
AMON WORD %OW, %MW Months output
AJHR WORD %OW, %MW Years output
AWTG WORD %OW, %MW Weekday No. output

DESCRIPTION
This function block allows users to set and display the current time and the current
date.
The clock is set by means of the set inputs for the time and date. The values present
at the set inputs are adopted by a 0/1 edge at the input S. As long as a 1 signal is
present at the FREI input, the current date and time are indicated at the block’s
outputs.

ABB Control Page C-278 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FREI BINARY
Block enable
FREI = 0 : The block is not processed. The AKT and FEHL outputs are set to 0. The
time and date outputs are no longer changed by the block.
FREI = 1 : Block is processed

S BINARY
Set inputs for date and time
In the event of a 0/1 edge at the input S, the clock is set to the values present at the
time and date inputs. During the setting, the time and date at the block’s output are
invalid (output AKT = 0).
If the specified set values are inadmissible, the AKT output is set to 0 and an error
message appears at the FEHL output. The values present at the time and date
outputs are invalid in this case. The clock has to be set again.

SEC WORD
Set input for the seconds.
Value range : 0...59.

MIN WORD
Set input for the minutes.
Value range : 0...59.

H WORD
Set input for the hours.

The clock operates in 24 hour mode, i.e. it changes from 23 :59 :59 h to 0 :0 :0 h.
Value range : 0...23.

TAG WORD
Set input for the days (which day of the month)

Note for 07 KR 31:

The clock knows the number of days depending on the months and leap years. For
the clock, a leap year exists when the year number is an integral multiple of 4. The
maximum value for the days (28, 29, 30, 31) depends on the month.
Value range : 1...28, 29, 30, 31.

MON WORD
Set input for the month.
Value range : 1...12.

JHR WORD
Set input for the years.
The clock only indicates the years and decades.
Value range : 0...99.

WTG WORD
Set input for the number of the weekday.
Value range : 1...7.

ABB Control Page C-279 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example :
The clock is set on Friday, 01.07.88. If the value 6 is entered for the week day
number, Friday is now the 6th day of the week and Sunday is defined as the 1st day
of the week.

AKT BINARY
Indication of the topicality (usefulness) of the outputs.
AKT is 1 if :
- The date and time outputs were updated in the current cycle;
- The values at the outputs are consistent, i.e. none of the values at the date or time
outputs has changed during updating. They all originate from the same clock pulse;
- The clock was set correctly;
AKT = 1 -> FEHL = 0 : Date/time are valid.
AKT = 0 -> FEHL > 0 : Date/time are invalid.
The reason why is displayed at the output FEHL as error identifier.

FEHL WORD
In the event of an error, the relevant error identifier is available at the output FEHL.

Meanings of the error identifiers :

- No error has occurred :
FEHL = 0 : No error has occurred or FREI = 0,i.e. block disabled
- Error when setting the clock :
FEHL = 1 : 0 < SEC < 59 has not been obeyed
FEHL = 2 : 0 < MIN < 59 has not been obeyed
FEHL = 3 : 0 < H < 23 has not been obeyed
FEHL = 4 : 1 < TAG < 28, 29, 30, 31 (depending on the month, not
tested in 07 KR 31) has not been obeyed
FEHL = 5 : 1 < MON < 12 has not been obeyed
FEHL = 6 : 0 < JHR < 99 has not been obeyed
FEHL = 7 : 1 < WTG < 7 has not been obeyed

The following errors are not used in the 07 KR 31 :

FEHL = 8 : The transmission mailbox is currently occupied by another
user. The block waits till the mailbox is free and thereafter sets date/time.
FEHL = 9 : Date/time at the outputs are invalid.
FEHL = 10 :Date/time are currently being set; this may take several PLC
cycles.
FEHL = 11 :Setting was not successful, please repeat (unknown request
code).
FEHL = 12 :Setting was not successful, please repeat (invalid mail
parameter).
FEHL = 13 :Setting was not successful, please repeat (request code
cannot be excecuted).
- Error when displaying date and time :
FEHL = 9 : Date/time at the outputs are invalid.

Outputs for date and time

The outputs are updated whenever a 1 signal is present at the FREI input and the

ABB Control Page C-280 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

clock has been set once. During the setting the outputs for date and time are invalid.
If the AKT output is equal to 1, the outputs for the date and time are valid. In the
event of an error, an error identifier is output through the output FEHL.

ASEC WORD
Seconds output.
Value range : 0...59

AMIN WORD
Minutes output.
Value range : 0...59.

AH WORD
Hours output.
Value range : 0...23.

ATAG WORD
Days output.
Value range : 1...28, 29, 30, 31.

AMON WORD
Months output.
Value range : 1...12.

AJHR WORD
Years output.
Value range : 0...99.

AWTG WORD
Weekday No. output.
Value range : 1...7.

ABB Control Page C-281 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

USM SWITCHOVER MULTIPLEXER

FBD IL

CAL USM (ADR,E)

USM

ADR
E

PARAMETERS
ADR WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Indirect address of the operand
to be written
E WORD %OW, %MW Value to be allocated to the
operand

DESCRIPTION
This function block allocates the value from the input E to an operand, using the
method of indirect addressing.

Note : The USM block can only be used meaningfully in conjunction with the ADRWA
block.
The value of the operand at the input ADR is interpreted as the address of the
operand to be written (indirect addressing). Therefore, the operand at the input ADR
and its value represent an indirect address. This indirect address is generated by the
ADRWA function block.

Note : Refer to the function block ADRWA for an explanation of the method of
indirect addressing and the possibilities of using the USM function block.

UST SWITCHOVER GATE

FBD IL

CAL UST (0/1,E1,0,1)

UST
0/1
E1 0
1

ABB Control Page C-282 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input
0 WORD %OW, %MW Output for 0/1 = 0
1 WORD %OW, %MW Output for 0/1 = 1

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the word operand at the input
E1 to the word operand at the output 0.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the word operand at the input
E1 to the word operand at the output 1.

The respective output that is not allocated retains its old value, but the old value is
not updated.

USTD SWITCHOVER GATE, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL USTD (0/1,E1,0,1)

USTD
0/1
E1 0
1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input
WORD
0 DOUBLE %MD Output for 0/1 = 0
WORD
1 DOUBLE %MD Output for 0/1 = 1
WORD

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the double word operand at
the input E1 to the double word operand at the output 0.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the double word operand at
the input E1 to the double word operand at the output 1.

The respective output that is not allocated retains its old value, but the old value is
not updated.

ABB Control Page C-283 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

USTR SWITCHOVER GATE WITH RESET

FBD IL

CAL USTR (0/1,E1,0,1)

USTR
0/1
E1 0
1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input
0 WORD %OW, %MW Output for 0/1 = 0
1 WORD %OW, %MW Output for 0/1 = 1

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the word operand at the input
E1 to the word operand at the output 0.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the word operand at the input
E1 to the word operand at the output 1.

The respective output that is not allocated is set to 0.

USTRD SWITCHOVER GATE WITH RESET, DOUBLE WORD

FBD IL

CAL USTDR (0/1,E1,0,1)

USTRD
0/1
E1 0
1

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Switchover input
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input
WORD
0 DOUBLE %MD Output for 0/1 = 0
WORD

ABB Control Page C-284 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

1 DOUBLE %MD Output for 0/1 = 1

WORD

DESCRIPTION
A 0 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the double word operand at
the input E1 to the double word operand at the output 0.

A 1 signal at the binary input 0/1 allocates the value of the double word operand at
the input E1 to the double word operand at the output 1.

The respective output that is not allocated is set to 0.

WDEC WORD DECODER

FBD IL

!BA 0
WDEC WDEC
E E
EC #n
E=EC EC
NR E=EC
NR

PARAMETERS
E WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of reference values
CONSTANT
EC WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Reference value;
duplicable
E=EC BINARY %O, %M Coincidence indication
NR WORD %OW, %MW Number of the reference value
in the event of coincidence

DESCRIPTION
This function block compares the value of the operand at the input E to the reference
values of the operands at the inputs EC (EC0 ... ECn-1). The result of the
comparison is signalled at the outputs.
If the input E agrees with at least 1 of the n reference values EC, the output E=EC is
set to 1. The number of the 1st reference value EC agreeing with the input E is
allocated to the operand at the output NR. Therefore, the number may assume a
value from 1 to n.The outputs E=EC and NR are set to 0 if no agreement between
the input value E and the reference value EC is determined.

ABB Control Page C-285 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

No coincidence -> The outputs are : E=EC = 0 and NR = 0

Coincidence -> The outputs are : E=EC = 1 and NR = n, where n > 1
E = EC0 -> NR = 1
E = EC2 -> NR = 2
. . .
E = ECn-1 -> NR = n

Note : In IL language, the number of inputs EC must be specified as a direct

constant at the input #n.

WUMC WORD RECODER

FBD/LD IL

!BA 0
WUMC WUMC
E E
EC/AC #2* n
E= EC EC/AC
A E= EC
A

PARAMETERS
E WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Input
#2*n DIRECT #, #H Quantity n of reference values
CONSTANT (multiplied by 2)
EC/AC WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Reference value and output
code; duplicable
E=EC BINARY %O, %M Coincidence indication
A WORD %OW, %MW Output of the output code’s
value

DESCRIPTION
This function block compares the value of the operand at the input E to the reference
values of the operands at the inputs EC/AC. If the input E agrees with at least one of
the reference values EC/ACi, the output E=EC is set to 1. The output A receives the
value of the output code EC/ACn+i, which is allocated to the reference value EC/ACi
found. At each reference value at the inputs EC/ACi is assigned an operand for the
output code EC/ACn+1.

Note : In IL language, the number of inputs EC must be specified as a direct

constant at the input #2*n.

E WORD
The input E specify the value to be compared to the values of the n reference values

ABB Control Page C-286 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

EC/ACi.

#2*n DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

Only used in IL language
The total number (2*n) of the reference values (EC/AC0...EC/ACn-1) and output
codes (EC/ACn...EC/AC2n-1) is specified at the input #2*n. This is specified as an
indirect constant.

EC/AC WORD
The input EC/AC must be duplicated according to the required number of reference
values. The operands for the reference values are specified at the inputs
EC/AC0...EC/ACn-1. The value of the operand at the input E is compared to the
reference values. The output codes are specified at the inputs EC/ACn...EC/AC2n-1.
The output code EC/ACi+n is output through the output A if the input E agrees with
one of the reference values EC/ACi.
Affiliations between the reference values and output codes :
EC/AC0 <-> EC/ACn
EC/AC1 <-> EC/ACn+1
. .
. .
EC/ACn-1 <-> EC/ACn+(n-1)

E=EC BINARY
Agreement between the operand value of the input E and one of the reference
values is signalled at the output E=EC.
The following applies : E=EC = 0 -> No coincidence
E=EC = 1 -> Coincidence

A WORD
The output code EC/ACn+i is output through the output A if the input E agrees with
one of the reference values EC/ACi.
The following applies : A = 0 -> No coincidence
A = EC/ACn+i -> Coincidence

10 Memory access functions

Memory serie Ctler 40 50 90 30
Access from pages C-287 to C-314
COPY Copying memory areas x x x x
DWAES Write double word in the event of value x
change
DWOL Read double word with enable x

ABB Control Page C-287 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DWOS Write double word with enabling x

FDEL Delete data segment in Flash EPROM x
FRD Read data segment from the Flash x
EPROM
FWR Write data segment to the Flash EPROM x
IOR Read byte value from I/O address x
IOW Write byte value to I/O address x
RDB Read binary values from historical values x
memory
RDDW Read double word values from historical x
values memory
RDW Read word values from historical values x
memory
WAES Write word in the event of value change x
WOL Read word with enabling x x x x
WOS Write word with enabling x
WRB Write binary values into historical values x
memory
WRDW Write double word values to historical x
values memory
WRW Write word values to historical values x
memory

COPY COPYING MEMORY AREAS

FBD IL

COPY CAL COPY

FREI
ANZ
QOFF
QSEG
ZOFF
ZSEG

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I,%O,%M,%K,%S Block enable
ANZ WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Quantity (n) of words to be
copied
QOFF WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Offset address of the start of
the source area
QSEG WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Segment address of the start of
the source area
ZOFF WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Offset address of the start of
the target area
ZSEG WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Segment address of the start of
the target area

ABB Control Page C-288 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block copies n words from a source memory area into a target memory
area. The contents of the source memory area are not changed.
In each case, the start of the source and target memory areas is specified at the
block’s inputs by means of the offset and segment addresses.

FREI BINARY
Block enable
FREI = 0 -> The block is not processed
FREI = 1 -> The block is processed

ANZ WORD
Quantity n of words to be copied.
The following applies : 0 < n < + 8000H
n = 0 :No copying
n = 8000H : A whole segment (64 kbytes) is copied

QOFF WORD
Offset address of the start of the source area

QSEG WORD
Segment address of the start of the source area

ZOFF WORD
Offset address of the start of the target area

ZSEG WORD
Segment address of the start of the target area

Example for 07 KR 91 central unit :

96 words are to be copied :
- from MW 00,00 to MW 05,15 :
MW 00,00 address is : offset = A410H and segemnt = 30C2H
- to AW 00,00 to AW 05,15 :
AW 00,00 address is : offset = 9310H and segemnt = 30C2H

serie 90
Number of words to be copied : 96
Offset address of the source memory : A410H
Segment address of the source memory : 30C2H
Offset address of the target memory : 9310H
Segment address of the target memory : 30C2H

Warning : The data addresses vary from a central unit to another.

DWAES WRITE DOUBLE WORD IN THE EVENT OF VALUE

CHANGE

ABB Control Page C-289 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL DWAES (E1,#OFF,#SEG)

DWAES
E1
#OFF
#SEG

PARAMETERS
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input for the operand to be read
WORD
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the memory
CONSTANT location to which the value of
E1 must be written in the event
of a change.
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT memory location to which the
value of E1 must be written in
the event of a change.

DESCRIPTION
If the value of the operand at the input E1 changes in comparison with the value
during previous processing of the block, the value of the operand at the input E1 is
written to the specified physical address.
The physical address consists of a segment and an offset.

E1 DOUBLE WORD
If the operand at the input E1 changes, its value is written to the address specified at
the inputs #OFF and #SEG.

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The offset component of the address to be written is specified at the #OFF input.
This is specified as a direct constant.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The segment component of the address to be written is specified at the input #SEG.
This is specified as a direct constant.

DWOL READ DOUBLE WORD WITH ENABLE

ABB Control Page C-290 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL DWOL (FREI,#OFF#SEG,A1)

DWOL
FREI
#OFF
#SEG A1

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %S, %K Block enable
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the memory
CONSTANT location whose double word
value is to be read.
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT memory location whose double
word value is to be read.
A1 DOUBLE %MD Output to which the value read
WORD is allocated.

DESCRIPTION
When a 1 signal is present at the FREI input, the value of the specified physical
address is read and is allocated to the operand at the output A1.
No double word is read if there is a 0 signal at the FREI input.
The physical address consists of a segment and an offset.

FREI BINARY
Processing of the block is enabled or disabled with the operand at the input FREI.
The following applies:
FREI = 0 -> Processing disabled
FREI = 1 -> Processing enabled

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

The offset component of the address to be read is specified at the input #OFF. This
is specified as a direct constant.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

The segment component of the address to be read is specified at the input #SEG.
This is specified as a direct constant.

A1 WORD
The value read is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

DWOS WRITE DOUBLE WORD WITH ENABLING

ABB Control Page C-291 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL DWOS (FREI,E1,#OFF,#SEG)

DWOS
FREI
E1
#OFF
#SEG

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Block enable
E1 DOUBLE %MD, %KD Input for the operand to be
WORD written
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the memory
CONSTANT location to which the value of
E1 must be written.
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT memory location to which the
value of E1 must be written.

DESCRIPTION
If there is a 1 signal at the input FREI, the value of the operand at the input E1 is
read and then written to the specified physical address.
No double word is written if there is a 0 signal at the FREI input.
The physical address consists of a segment and an offset.

FREI BINARY
Processing of the block is enabled or disabled with the operand at the input FREI.
The following applies : FREI = 0 -> Processing disabled
FREI = 1 -> Processing enabled

E1 DOUBLE WORD
The operand at the input E1 is read and its value is written to the address defined by
the inputs #OFF and #SEG.

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The offset component of the address to be written is specified at the input #OFF.
This is specified as a direct constant.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The segment component of the address to be written is specified at the input #SEG.
This is specified as a direct constant.

FDEL DELETE DATA SEGMENT IN FLASH EPROM

ABB Control Page C-292 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD/LD IL

FDEL CAL FDEL (0/1,#SEG,RDY,ERR)

0/1 RDY
#SEG ERR

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Deletion of one data segment
by a 0/1 edge
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Data segment number in the
FLASH EPROM
RDY BINARY %O, %M Write procedure completed
ERR BINARY %O, %M Error

DESCRIPTION
This function block deletes a data segment in the Flash EPROM. All data in this data
segment are lost after deletion.

The input #SEG defines the data segment in the Flash EPROM. The deletion
procedure in the Flash EPROM can take several PLC cycles. A 0->1 edge at the
input 0/1 starts the deletion procedure once. Until the procedure has not been
finished (RDY = 1), the input 0/1 is not evaluated again. After completion of the
deletion procedure all function block outputs are updated. If then RDY = 1 and ERR
= 0, the deletion was successful. If the outputs show RDY = 1 and ERR = 1, the data
segment could not be deleted.

Important notes :
An access to the Flash EPROM is only permitted by using the function blocks FWR
and FRD. It is not allowed to access the Flash EPROM by other function blocks
(WOL, WOS, COPY,...).

0/1 BINARY
The input 0/1 controls the processing of the function block.
0/1 = 0 : All outputs are set to the value of ”0”. This is not valid during
a deletion procedure.
0/1= 0->1 edge : Deletion of the data segment is started once. Until the
procedure has not been finished (RDY = 1), the input 0/1
is not evaluated again.
0/1 = 1 : The function block is not processed, i.e. the function block
does no longer change its outputs. This is not valid during a
deletion procedure.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT

The number of the data segment in the Flash EPROM is given at the input SEG.
In the Flash EPROM, 4 data segments are available :
#0 corresponds to data segment 0

ABB Control Page C-293 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

#1 corresponds to data segment 1

#2 corresponds to data segment 2
#3 corresponds to data segment 3

RDY BINARY
The output RDY indicates that the deletion procedure has been completed. This
output has always to be considered together with the output ERR.
RDY = 1 and ERR = 0 : The deletion procedure has been completed. The data
segment has been deleted successfully.
RDY = 1 and ERR = 1 : An error has occurred during the deletion procedure. The
data segment could not be deleted.

ERR BINARY
The output ERR indicates whether or not an error has occurred during the deleting
procedure. This output has always to be considered together with the output RDY.
If the data segment could not be deleted, the outputs have the following status :
RDY = 1 and ERR = 1

FRD READ DATA SET FROM FLASH EPROM

FBD/LD IL

FRD CAL FRD (0/1,SM,#nB,#SEG,BNR,RDY,ERR,ERNO)

0/1 RDY
SM ERR
#nB ERNO
#SEG
BNR

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Reading of one data set by a
0/1 edge
SM BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Start flag of the location of the
WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW data set
DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD
#nB DIRECT #, #H Block number of the data set
CONSTANT
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Data segment number in the
CONSTANT Flash EPROM
BNR WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Block number in the data
segment
RDY BINARY %O, %M Reading procedure completed
ERR BINARY %O, %M Error indication
ERNO WORD %OW, %MW Error number

DESCRIPTION
This function block reads a data set from a data segment in the Flash EPROM and

ABB Control Page C-294 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

stores the read data set beginning at the start flag defined by SM. The data of the
data set had been stored in the Flash EPROM by the function block FWR or by the
operating command FWR.

The inputs SM and #nB define which data are read from the Flash EPROM. The
input #SEG defines the data segment in the Flash EPROM. The number of data,
which are read from a block, depends on input SM.
Either 32 binary data or 16 word data or 8 double word data are read per block. The
data of each block are secured by a checksum.
The reading procedure is carried out once by a 0/1 edge at the input 0/1. If there was
no error when reading the data, the output RDY is set to ”1” and the outputs ERR
and ERNO are set to ”0”. The data set is stored beginning at the defined start flag
SM.
Storing the data set can take several PLC cycles.
If an error occurs during the reading procedure, RDY and ERR are both set to ”1”.
The error type is indicated at the output ERNO.
The outputs RDY, ERR and ERNO are set to ”0” by a signal 0 at the input 0/1.

Important note:
An access to the Flash EPROM is only permitted by using the function blocks FWR
and FRD. It is not allowed to access the Flash EPROM by other function blocks
(WOL, WOS, COPY,...).

0/1 BINARY
The processing of the block is controlled by the input 0/1.
0/1 = 0 : The outputs RDY, ERR and ERNO are set to ”0”.
0/1= 0->1 edge : The reading procedure of the data set is carried out once.
0/1 = 1 : The block is not processed, i.e. it does not change its
outputs any more.

SM BINARY / WORD / DOUBLE WORD

The first binary / word / double word flag for storing the data set is given at input SM.

#nB DIRECT CONSTANT

The block number of the data set is given at input #nB. The number of data, which
are read by a block, depends on the input SM. Either 32 binary data or 16 word data
or 8 double word data are read per block.
Examples:
SM = M 01,00 and #nB = 1 : Storing the data from M 01,00 to M 02,15
(1 block = 32 binary data)
SM = M 01,00 and #nB = 2 : Storing the data from M 01,00 to M 04,15
(2 blocks = 64 binary data)
SM = MW 02,00 and #nB = 1 : Storing the data from MW 02,00 to MW 02,15
(1 block = 16 word data)
SM = MW 02,00 and #nB = 2 : Storing the data from MW 02,00 to MW 03,15
(2 blocks = 32 word data)
SM = MD 03,00 and #nB = 1 : Storing the data from MD 03,00 to MD 03,07
(1 block = 8 double word data)
SM = MD 03,00 and #nB = 2 : Storing the data from MD 03,00 to MD 03,15
(2 blocks = 16 double word data)

ABB Control Page C-295 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT

The number of the data segment in the Flash EPROM is given at the input SEG.
In the Flash EPROM, 4 data segments are available.
#0 corresponds to data segment 0
#1 corresponds to data segment 1
#2 corresponds to data segment 2
#3 corresponds to data segment 3

BNR WORD
The number of the block in the data segment is given at the input BNR.
Valid values: 0...480

RDY BINARY
The output RDY indicates, that the reading procedure has been completed. The
output has always to be considered together with the output ERR.
RDY = 1 and ERR = 0: The reading procedure has been completed. The data set is
stored beginning at the definition at the input SM.
RDY = 1 and ERR = 1: An error has occurred during the reading procedure. The
output ERNO indicates the error number.

ERR BINARY
The output ERR indicates whether or not an error has occurred during the reading
procedure. The output has always to be considered together with the output RDY.
If there was an error, the outputs have the following status :
RDY = 1 and ERR = 1

ERNO WORD
In case of error, the output ERNO indicates the error number coded binary.
ERNO = 0: There was no error.
ERNO = 1: Block number and number of blocks is greater than 480
(bit 0 of ERNO = 1).
ERNO = 2: Data segment is greater than 3 (bit 1 of ERNO = 1).
ERNO = 4: Checksum error of read data. The data are not entered into the flag area
(bit 2 of ERNO = 1).
This output has always to be considered together with the outputs RDY and ERR.

FWR WRITE DATA SET TO FLASH EPROM

FBD/LD IL

FWR CAL FWR (0/1,SM,#nB,#SEG,BNR,RDY,ERR,ERNO)

0/1 RDY
SM ERR
#nB ERNO
#SEG
BNR

ABB Control Page C-296 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PARAMETERS
0/1 BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Saving of one data set by a
0/1 edge
SM BINARY %I, %M, %O, %K, %S Start flag of the location of the
WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW data set
DOUBLE WORD %MD, %KD
#nB DIRECT #, #H Block number of the data
CONSTANT set
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Data segment number in the
CONSTANT Flash EPROM
BNR WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Block number in the data
segment
RDY BINARY %O, %M Writing procedure completed
ERR BINARY %O, %M Error indication
ERNO WORD %OW, %MW Error number

DESCRIPTION
The function block writes a data set to a data segment in the Flash EPROM. For this
purpose, there are 4 data segments (0...3) available in the Flash EPROM. A deletion
procedure (function block FDEL) always deletes a complete data segment. Each
data segment consists of 481 blocks (0...480). After deletion, each of these 481
blocks can store data only once. If a block containing data is to be overwritten by
new data, the entire data segment has to be deleted beforehand. In doing so, all
data in this segment are lost.

The inputs SM and #nB define, which data are written to the Flash EPROM. The
input #SEG defines the data segment in the Flash EPROM. The number of data,
which can be stored in the block, depends on input SM.
Either 32 binary data or 16 word data or 8 double word data are written per block.
The data of each block are secured by a checksum.
When a writing procedure of a data set is started (0->1 edge at input 0/1), the data of
the data set must not be changed until the end of the writing procedure (RDY = 1).
Storing the data set in the Flash EPROM can take several PLC cycles.
A 0->1 edge at input 0/1 starts the writing procedure of the data set once. The input
0/1 is no longer evaluated until the storing of the data set has been completed (RDY
= 1).
After completion of the writing procedure the block outputs RDY, ERR and ERNO
are updated. If RDY = 1 and ERR = 0, the procedure was successful. If RDY = 1 and
ERR = 1, an error had occurred. The output ERNO indicates the error type then.
After storing the data set in the Flash EPROM, the block outputs RDY, ERR and
ERNO are set to ”0” by a signal 0 at input 0/1. A new 0/1 edge at input 0/1 starts a
new writing procedure. Since without a previous deletion of the data segment no new
data can be written to blocks which already contain data, the input BNR must point to
the next free block for the next writing procedure.

Important note:
An access to the Flash EPROM is only permitted by using the function blocks FWR
and FRD. It is not allowed to access the Flash EPROM by other function blocks

ABB Control Page C-297 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

(WOL, WOS, COPY,...).

For each user data set, a separate function block FWR as well as a separate
function block FRD have to be planned in the PLC program.

0/1 BINARY
The processing of the block is controlled by the input 0/1.
0/1 = 0 : The outputs RDY, ERR and ERNO are set to ”0”.
This is not valid during a writing procedure.
0/1= 0->1 edge : The writing procedure of the data set is carried out once.
The 0/1 is no longer evaluated until the writing procedure
has been completed (RDY =1)
0/1 = 1 : The block is not processed, i.e. it does not change its
outputs any more.
This is not valid during a writing procedure.

SM BINARY / WORD / DOUBLE WORD

The first binary / word / double word flag for storing the data set is given at input SM.
When the writing procedure of a data set has been started (0->1 edge at input 0/1),
the data of the data set must not been changed until the procedure has been
completed (RDY = 1).

#nB DIRECT CONSTANT

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT

BNR WORD
The number of the block in the data segment is given at the input BNR.
Valid values: 0...480

ABB Control Page C-298 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

RDY BINARY
The output RDY indicates, that the writing procedure has been completed. The
output has always to be considered together with the output ERR.
RDY = 1 and ERR = 0: The writing procedure has been completed. The data set is
stored beginning at the definition at the input SM.
RDY = 1 and ERR = 1: An error has occurred during the writing procedure. The
output ERNO indicates the error number.

ERR BINARY
The output ERR indicates whether or not an error has occurred during the writing
procedure. The output has always to be considered together with the output RDY.
If there was an error, the outputs have the following status :
RDY = 1 and ERR = 1

IOR READ BYTE VALUE FROM I/O ADDRESS

FBD IL

CAL IOR (ADR,A1)

IOR
ADR A1

PARAMETERS
ADR WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Address from the I/O area
whose BYTE value is to be
read.
A1 WORD %OW, MW The BYTE value read is
allocated to the output A1.

ABB Control Page C-299 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DESCRIPTION
This function block reads a byte out of the I/O area and allocates it to the operand at
the output.

ADR WORD
The value of the operand at the input ADR represents the I/O address to be read.

A1 WORD
The byte read out of the I/O area is allocated to the LOW BYTE of the operand at the
output A1.

IOW WRITE BYTE VALUE TO I/O ADDRESS

FBD IL

CAL IOW (E1,ADR)

IOW
E1
ADR

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW Operand whose LOW byte is
read and written into the I/O
area
ADR WORD %IW, %OW, %MW, %KW I/O address to which the value
of the operand is written.

DESCRIPTION
This function block writes the byte specified at the input E1 into the I/O area.

E1 WORD
The LOW BYTE of the operand at the input E1 is written into the I/O area.

ADR WORD
The value of the operand at the input ADR represents the I/O address to which the
value is written.

RDB READ BINARY VALUES FROM HISTORICAL VALUES

MEMORY

ABB Control Page C-300 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
RDB
RDB
#n
BI
BI

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of outputs BI0 ... BIn-1
CONSTANT
BI BINARY %O, %M Output for the binary values,
capable of duplication

DESCRIPTION
This function block allows to use ready-made program parts several times in one
user program. It works with local variables within this part of the program. The local
variables lose their validity outside of this program part.

At the end of the program part, the local variables values at the input BI0...BIn-1 are
stored in the historical values memory of the RDB block by the affiliated WRB block.
The function block RDB reads these values out of the historical values memory again
at the start of the program part.

The function blocks WRB and RDB always occur in pairs.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of outputs BI0...BIn-1 is specified at the input #n.

BI BINARY
The BI output can be duplicated (BI0...BIn-1). The block allocates the values read
out of the historical values memory to the outputs BI0...BIn-1.

Note : The number n of BI outputs must agree with the number of inputs of the
affiliated WRB block.

Example :

ABB Control Page C-301 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD/LD IL

RDB
!BA 0
%M 03,00 BI RDB
%M 03,01 BI #3
%M 03,02 BI %M 03,00
%M 03,01
%M 03,02
The program part, which is used multiply and in which the
variables %M 03,00 ... %M 03,02 are needed in the next cycle,
is located here. For this purpose, the values are written into the
historical value memory by means of the WRB block and are
read out again in the next cycle by means of the RDB block.

WRB !BA 0
WRB
%M 03,00 BI #0
%M 03,01 BI #3
%M 03,02 BI %M 03,00
%M 03,01
%M 03,02

RDDW READ DOUBLE WORD VALUES FROM HISTORICAL

VALUES MEMORY

FBD IL

!BA 0
RDDW
RDDW
#n
DW
DW

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of outputs
CONSTANT DW0 ... DWn-1
DW DOUBLE %MD Output for the double word
WORD values, capable of duplication

ABB Control Page C-302 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

At the end of the program part, the local variables values at the input DW0...DWn-1
are stored in the historical values memory of the RDB block by the affiliated WRB
block. The function block RDB reads these values out of the historical values
memory again at the start of the program part.

The function blocks WRDW and RDDW always occur in pairs.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of the outputs DW0...DWn-1 is specified at the input
#n.

DW DOUBLE WORD
The DW output can be duplicated (DW0...DWn-1). The block allocates the values
read out of the historical values memory to the outputs DW0...DWn-1.

Note : The number n of DW outputs must agree with the number of inputs of the
affiliated WRDW block.

ABB Control Page C-303 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example :

FBD/LD IL

RDDW
!BA 0
%MD 03,00 DW RDDW
%MD 03,01 DW #3
%MD 03,02 DW %MD 03,00
%MD 03,01
%MD 03,02
The program part, which is used multiply and in which the
variables %MD 03,00 ... %MD 03,02 are needed in the next
cycle, is located here. For this purpose, the values are written
into the historical value memory by means of the WRDW block
and are read out again in the next cycle by means of the RDDW
block.

WRDW !BA 0
WRDW
%MD 03,00 DW #0
%MD 03,01 DW #3
%MD 03,02 DW %MD 03,00
%MD 03,01
%MD 03,02

RDW READ WORD VALUES FROM HISTORICAL VALUES MEMORY

FBD IL

!BA 0
RDW
RDW
#n
WO
WO

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of outputs
CONSTANT WO0 ... WOn-1
WO WORD %OW, MW Output for the word values,
capable of duplication

ABB Control Page C-304 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

At the end of the program part, the local variables values at the input WO0...WOn-1
are stored in the historical values memory of the RDB block by the affiliated WRB
block. The function block RDB reads these values out of the historical values
memory again at the start of the program part.

The function blocks WRW and RDW always occur in pairs.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of outputs WO0...WOn-1 is specified at the input #n.

WO WORD
The output WO can be duplicated (WO0...WOn-1). The block allocates the values
read out of the historical values memory to the outputs WO0...WOn-1.

Note : The number n of WO outputs must agree with the number of inputs of the
affiliated WRW block.

Example

FBD/LD IL

RDW
!BA 0
%MW 03,00 WO RDW
%MW 03,01 WO #3
%MW 03,02 WO %MW 03,00
%MW 03,01
%MW 03,02
The program part, which is used multiply and in which the
variables %MW 03,000 ... %MW 03,002 are needed in the next
cycle, is located here. For this purpose, the values are written
into the historical value memory by means of the WRW block
and are read out again in the next cycle by means of the RDW
block.

WRW !BA 0
WRW
%MW 03,00 WO #0
%MW 03,01 WO #3
%MW 03,02 WO %MW 03,00
%MW 03,01
%MW 03,02

WAES WRITE WORD IN THE EVENT OF VALUE CHANGE

ABB Control Page C-305 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL WAES (E1,#OFF,#SEG)

WAES
E1
#OFF
#SEG

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input for the operand to be read
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the memory
CONSTANT location to which the value of
E1 must be written in the event
of a change.
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT memory location to which the
value of E1 must be written in
the event of a change.

DESCRIPTION
If the value of the operand at the input E1 compared to the value during previous
processing of the block changes, the value of the operand at the input E1 is written
to the specified physical address.
The physical address consists of a segment and an offset.

E1 WORD
If the operand at the input E1 changes, its value is written to the address specified at
the inputs #OFF and #SEG.

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

The offset of the address to be written is specified at the input #OFF. This is
specified as a direct constant.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT (#, #H)

The segment of the address to be written is specified at the input #SEG. This is
specified as a direct constant.

WOL READ WORD WITH ENABLING

ABB Control Page C-306 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL WOL (FREI,#OFF,#SEG,A1)

WOL
FREI
#OFF
#SEG A1

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Enable block
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the memory
CONSTANT location whose value must be
read
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT memory location whose value
must be read
A1 WORD %OW, %MW Output to which the read value
is allocated.

DESCRIPTION
When the FREI input has a 1 signal, the value of the specified physical address is
read and is allocated to the operand at the output A1.
No reading and no allocation take place if the input FREI has a 0 signal.
The physical address consists of a segment and an offset.
The attainable address space is 1 MByte.

FREI BINARY
Processing of the block is enabled or disabled with the operand at the FREI input.
The following applies:
FREI = 0 -> Processing disabled
FREI = 1 -> Processing enabled

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The offset of the address to be read is specified at the input #OFF. This is specified
as a direct constant.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The segment of the address to be read is specified at the input #SEG. This is
specified as a direct constant.

A1 WORD
The read value is allocated to the operand at the output A1.

WOS WRITE WORD WITH ENABLING

ABB Control Page C-307 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

CAL WOS (FREI,E1,#OFF,#SEG)

WOS
FREI
E1
#OFF
#SEG

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Enable block
E1 WORD %IW, %MW, %OW, %KW Input for the operand to be
written
#OFF DIRECT #, #H Offset address of the memory
CONSTANT location to which the value of
E1 must be written
#SEG DIRECT #, #H Segment address of the
CONSTANT memory location to which the
value of E1 must be written

DESCRIPTION
When the input FREI has a 1 signal, the value of the operand at the input E1 is read
and is then written to the specified physical address. The block is not processed if
there is a 0 signal at the FREI input. The physical address consists of a segment and
an offset. The attainable address area is 1 MByte.

FREI BINARY
Proces sing of the block is enabled or disabled with the operand at the input FREI.
The following applies : FREI = 0 -> Processing disabled
FREI = 1 -> Processing enabled

E1 WORD
The operand at the input E1 is read and its value is written to the address defined by
the inputs #OFF and #SEG.

#OFF DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H)

The offset of the address to be written is specified at the input #OFF. This is
specified as a direct constant.

#SEG DIRECT CONSTANT (#,#H).

The segment of the address to be written is specified at the input #SEG. This is
specified as a direct constant.

WRB WRITE BINARY VALUES INTO HISTORICAL VALUES

MEMORY

ABB Control Page C-308 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD IL

!BA 0
WRB WRB
#0
BI #n
BI

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs BI0 ... BIn-1
CONSTANT
BI0 BINARY %O, %M Input for the binary values to be
written, capable of duplication

At the end of the program part, the local variables values at the input BI0...BIn-1 are
stored in the historical values memory of the affiliated RDB block by the WRB block.
The affiliated function block RDB reads these values out of the historical values
memory again at the start of the program part.

The function blocks WRB and RDB always occur in pairs.

#0 DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The PLC enters the pointer to the historical values of the affiliated
RDB block at this point.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of inputs BI0...BIn-1 is specified at the input #n as a
direct constant.

Note : The value specified at the input #n must also agree with the number of
outputs belonging to the affiliated RDB block.

BI BINARY
The input BI is capable of duplication (BI0...BIn-1). The values of the operands
specified at the inputs BI0...BIn-1 are written into the historical values memory of the
affiliated RDB block.

Example

ABB Control Page C-309 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FBD/LD IL

WRB !BA 0
WRB
%M 03,00 BI #0
%M 03,01 BI #3
%M 03,02 BI %M 03,00
%M 03,01
%M 03,02

WRDW WRITE DOUBLE WORD VALUES INTO HISTORICAL

VALUES MEMORY

FBD IL

!BA 0
WRDW WRDW
#0
DW0 #n
DW0

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs
CONSTANT DW0 ... DWn-1
DW0 DOUBLE %MD Input for the double word
WORD values to be written, capable of

ABB Control Page C-310 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

At the end of the program part, the local variables values at the input DW0...DWn-1
are stored in the historical values memory of the affiliated RDB block by the WRB
block. The affiliated function block RDB reads these values out of the historical
values memory again at the start of the program part.

The function blocks WRDW and RDDW always occur in pairs.

#0 DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. At this point, the PLC enters the pointer to the historical values of the
affiliated RDDW block.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of inputs DW0...DWn-1 is specified at the input #n.

Note : The value specified at the input #n must also agree with the number of
outputs of the affiliated RDDW block.

D DOUBLE WORD
The input DW is capable of duplication (DW0...DWn-1). The values of the operands
specified at the inputs DW0...DWn-1 are written into the historical values memory of
the affiliated RDDW block.

ABB Control Page C-311 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

Example

FBD/LD IL

WRDW !BA 0
WRDW
%MD 03,00 DW #0
%MD 03,01 DW #3
%MD 03,02 DW %MD 03,00
%MD 03,01
%MD 03,02

WRW WRITE WORD VALUES TO HISTORICAL VALUES

MEMORY

FBD IL

!BA 0
WRW WRW
#0
WO0 #n
WO0

PARAMETERS
#n DIRECT #, #H Number of inputs
CONSTANT WO0 ... WOn-1
WO0 WORD %OW, %MW Input for the word values to be
written, capable of duplication

ABB Control Page C-312 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

At the end of the program part, the local variables values at the input WO0...WOn-1
are stored in the historical values memory of the affiliated RDB block by the WRB
block. The affiliated function block RDB reads these values out of the historical
values memory again at the start of the program part.

The function blocks WRW and RDW always occur in pairs.

#0 DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The PLC then enters the pointer to the historical values of the
affiliated RDW block at this point.

#n DIRECT CONSTANT
Only used in IL. The number of the inputs WO0...WOn-1 is specified at the input #n
as a direct constant.

Note : The value specified at the input #n must also agree with the number of the
outputs belonging to the affiliated block RDW.

WO BINARY
The input WO0 can be duplicated (WO0...WOn-1). The values of the operands
specified at the inputs WO0...WOn-1 are written into the historical values memory of
the affiliated RDW block.

Example

FBD/LD IL

RDW
!BA 0
% MW 03,00 WO RDW
% MW 03,01 WO #3
% MW 03,02 WO % MW 03,00
% MW 03,01
% MW 03,02
The program part, w hich is used multiply and in w hich t he
variables %MW 03,000 ... %MW 03,002 are needed in the
next cycle, is located here. For t his purpose, t he values are
w rit ten into t he historical value memory by means of t he
WRW block and are read out again in the next cycle by
means of t he RDW block.

WRW !BA 0
WRW
% MW 03,00 WO #0
% MW 03,01 WO #3
% MW 03,02 WO % MW 03,00
% MW 03,01
% MW 03,02

ABB Control Page C-313 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

11 Special Functions
Special serie Ctler 40 50 90 30
functions from pages C-314 to C-322
5F_ARC94 Arcnet for 07KT94 94
COUNTB Test of number of bits in a word/double 94
word
COUNTW Fast counter on 07KT94 94
DWWW One double word in 2 words conversion 94
IDENT Identification 94
MODMASTK MODBUS master 94
SETB Set a bit in a word/double word 94
TESTB Test a bit in a word/double word 94
WWDW 2 words in one double word conversion 94

5F_ARC94 ARCNET for 07KT94

FBD IL

5F_ARC94 CAL 5F_ARC94(FREI, T_I1, T_01, ERR,

OP0)
FREI

T_I1
T_01
ERR
OP0

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %M, %O, %S, %K Enable block
T_I1 WORD %IW,%OW,%KW,%MW Offset address of the
memory
T_01 WORD ,%OW, %MW Segment address of the
memory
ERR WORD ,%OW, %MW Error number
OP0 BINARY,
WORD,
DOUBLE WORD

DESCRIPTION
This funtion is used for ARCNET communication . Refer to 07KT94 and ARCNET
documentation for a complete description.

ABB Control Page C-314 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

COUNTB TEST of NUMBER of BITS in a WORD/DW

FBD/LD IL

CAL COUNTB (W/D, E,

COUNTB NUM, LOW, HIGH)
W/D
E NUM
LOW
HIGH

PARAMETERS
W/D BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Word or Double word selection
E WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Word/Double word for test of
number of bits
NUM WORD %OW,%MW Number of bits in E
LOW WORD %OW,%MW Position of lower bit
HIGH WORD %OW, %MW Position of higher bit

DESCRIPTION
This function block defines the number of bits in a word or double word.
The position of the lower bit ( 0…31) is in LOW and the position of higher bit (0..31)
is in HIGH.

COUNTW Fast counter on 07KT94

FBD/LD IL

CAL COUNTW(N0, U/D,

COUNTW SET, STA, END, ERR,
N0 STAT, CF, OUT)
U/D ERR
EN STAT
SET CF
STA OUT
END

PARAMETERS
NO WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Counter number 0 or 1
U/D BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K 0=Up / 1=Down
EN BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K 1=Enable counting

ABB Control Page C-315 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

SET BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K 1=Set start value

STA WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Star value
END WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW End value
ERR BINARY %O, %M Error
STAT WORD %OW,%MW Status
CF BINARY %O, %M Carry Flag (1= End value
reached )
OUT WORD %OW,%MW Actual value output

DESCRIPTION
This function block defines the fast counter on the central unit 07KT94.
Refer to the relevant documentation for a complete description

DWWW One double word in 2 words conversion

FBD/LD IL

CAL DWWW(E, A1, A2)

DWWW
E
A1
A2

PARAMETERS
E DOUBLE %KD, %MD Double word to slip into 2
WORD words
A1 WORD %OW,%MW Low word
A2 WORD %OW,%MW High word

DESCRIPTION
The Low word of the input E ( double word) is set to the output A1. and the High
word of the input E is set to A2

ABB Control Page C-316 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

IDENT Identification

FBD/LD IL

CAL IDENT (FREI, TYP,

IDENT RUB, VER)
FREI
TYP
RUB
VER

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Enable input
TYP WORD %OW,%MW 94 for 07KT94
RUB WORD %OW,%MW Rubric =101 for R0101
VER WORD %OW,%MW Sofware version =100 for V1.00

MODMASTK MODBUS master for 07KT94

FBD/LD IL

CAL MODMASTK(FREI,
MODMASTK COM, SLAV, FCT, TIME,
FREI ADDR, NB, DATA, RDY,
COM RDY ERR, ERN)
SLAV ERR
FCT ERN
TIME
ADDR
NB
DATA

PARAMETERS
FREI BINARY %I,%O,%M,%K,%S Enable signal for one
communication (rising edge)
COM WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Communication interface
(always=2)
SLAV WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Slave number

ABB Control Page C-317 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

FCT WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Function code

TIME WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Time–out for MODBUS
communication
ADDR WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Address in the slave
NB WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW Number of data to send or to
read
DATA WORD %IW,%OW,%MW,%KW, Data to send to the slave or to
BINARY %I,%O,%M write with the data received
from a slave MODBUS
RDY BINARY %O,%M Ready, communication in
progress
ERR BINARY %O,%M Communication error
ERN WORD %OW,%MW Communication error, detail of
error

DESCRIPTION
MODMASTK master communication function block

The central unit is a master on a MODBUS network and can communicate with other
products with MODBUS protocol.
The function MODMASTK in the central unit is valided by :
- system constant KW 00,06 = 100

The MODBUS protocol is a master/slave protocol. The master sends a frame to a

slave and waits for the answer (a time–out is defined). Binary or numeric data can be
read or written in a slave.

The area of data in the master is chosen by the address of the first variable. The size
of area is necessary for sending or receiving. Reading or writing data are done
automatically from these areas.

COM WORD
This parameter is always set to 2

SLAV WORD
Address of the slave which receives the request.
Value : 1 < ADDR < 254

FCT WORD
The function depends on the type of parameters and if it is reading or writing.
Value : 1: reading n bits

ABB Control Page C-318 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

2: reading n bits
3: reading n words
4: reading n words
5: writing one bit
6: writing one word
7: fast reading
15 : writing n bits
16 : writing n words

ADDR WORD
Address of data in the slave memory to read or write.

NB WORD
Number of data to read or write in the slave.
This number defines also the size of the data area in the master to send to the slave
or to receive from the slave. NB=1….96

DATA WORD, BINARY

DATA defines the first variable of the data area in the master. The size of this area
depends on the NB parameter.

ERN WORD
Details of error :
0: no error
1: unknown function code
2: address error
3: data error
9: time–out
10 : checksum error
The error is clear after one cycle time.

ABB Control Page C-319 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

SETB Set a bit in a word/double word

FBD/LD IL

CAL SETB (E, #BIT, A)

SETB
E
#BIT A

PARAMETERS
E BINARY %I, %O, %M, %K Bit value
#BIT DIRECT Position of the bit into the
CONSTANT word/double word
A WORD %OW,%MW output

DESCRIPTION
A bit can be set in a word or double word
The bit number defined by #BIT in the output is set to the value of E
The value of #BIT is 0…31
The output A is a word
If #BIT is higher than 15 then the following address is used
For example :
A=%MW00.00 and #BIT=16 -> bit 0 of %MW00.01 will be set

TESTB Test a bit in a word/double word

FBD/LD IL

CAL TESTB (E, #BIT, A)

TESTB
E
#BIT A

ABB Control Page C-320 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

PARAMETERS
E WORD %KW, %IW, %OW, %MW Word to test
#BIT DIRECT Position of the bit into the
CONSTANT word/double word
A BINARY %O,%M Result of the test

DESCRIPTION
A bit can be tested in a word or double word
The bit number defined by #BIT in the input E is set to output A
The value of #BIT is 0…31
The output A is a bit
If #BIT is higher than 15 then the following address is used
For example :
E=%MW00.00 and #BIT=16 -> bit 0 of %MW00.01 will be set on the output A

WWDW 2 words in one double word conversion

FBD/LD IL

CAL WWDW(E1, E2, A)

WWDW
E1
A
E2

PARAMETERS
E1 WORD %KW, %IW, %OW,%MW E1 is the lower word in A
E2 WORD %KW, %IW, %OW,%MW E2 is the higher word in A
A DOUBLE %MD Output A
WORD

DESCRIPTION
The Low word of the input E1 and Higher word E2 is set in the double word A

ABB Control Page C-321 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

12 Historical values

12.1 Definition

Some specific functions need several program cycles to be processed. An historical

value is an internal register used by the function and during the function processing,
to stock the function result of the (n-1) program cycle.

A maximum number of historical values can be used in a program :

- for the controller : 256
- for serie 40 : 256
- for serie 50 : 256
- for serie 90 : 1024
- for serie 30 : 128

In case of serie 40, 50, 30, and of the controller, the historical values of timer
functions are independent from the historical value list of the other functions. The
number of timer function allowed in a program is illimited, but a maximum of 42
timers can be processed in the program at the same time.

Important note concerning ONLINE modifications :

The insertion of a function with historical values modify the historical value registers.
For this reason, it is not possible to insert in a running program a function with
historical values before other functions with historical values; the new program would
work with wrong historical values.

12.2 Historical value table

serie 40 &50 serie 90 serie 30

AMELD - #n + 3 -
AMELDD - 4 + (2 * #n) -
ASV 1 1 1
BITSU - 9 -
BMELD 3+nb E if #n even : 2 + #n/2 if #n even : 2 + #n/2
if #n odd : 2 + (#n+1)/2 if #n odd : 2 +
(#n+1)/2
CALLUP - #VGW -
CONFIO1 2
CONFIO4 2
CONFIO8 2
CS31CO 1 1 1
CS31QU - 1 1
CTU 2 - -
CTUH 2 - -
DT1 - 4 -
DWAES - 2 -
ESV 1 1 1
FEHSU - 4 -
FIFO - 4 -

ABB Control Page C-322 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

serie 40 &50 serie 90 serie 30

HLG - 2 -
INITS - 1 -
INITV - 1 -
INTK - 3 -
LDT - 1 -
LIFO - 3 -
LZB - 1 -
MAZ - 2 -
MAZD - 3 -
MOA 1 1 1
MODBUS 1 1 1
MOK 1 1 1
NPULSE 1 - -
PDM 1 3 1
PI 3 4 6
PIDT1 5 9 -
PT1 - 2 -
RDB - if #n even : #n/2 -
if #n odd : (#n+1)/2
RDDW - 2 * #n -
RDW - #n -
REC/EMAS 1 1 1
SEND/DRUCK 2 1 1
SFEHSU - 3 + #n/16 -
SINIT 1 1 1
TOF 1 - -
TON 1 - -
TP 1 - -
UHR 1 1 1
VGLEH - 1 -
VGLUH - 1 -
VRZ 3 2 3
VRZD - 3 -
VVZ - 2 -
WAES - 1 -

13 Runtimes

13.1 Definition

The runtime (in µs) is the time for the function to be read by the program during one
cycle.
The program cycle time (in ms) is then the runtime addition of all the functions in the
program.

ABB Control Page C-323 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

13.2 Runtime table (time in µs)

Binary Controller, serie 90 serie 30

functions serie 40, serie 50 (standard time + time (standard time + time
per additional output) per additional output)
& 6.6 + 2.3 20 + 6
/ 6.6 + 2.3 ??
= 4.3 + 2.3 14 + 8
=1 10.9 32
=R 4.3 + 2.3 15 + 9
=S 4.3 + 2.3 15 + 9
I- 13.2 45
I+ 13.2 45
MAJ - 36 -
RS 8.6 30
SR 8.6 30

Timer Controller, serie 90 serie 30

functions serie 40, serie 50 (standard time; time (standard time; time
in case of edge at in case of edge at
input signal) input signal)
ASV 45; 541 97; 551
ESV 38; 400 97; 554
MOA 36; 600 97; 552
MOK 20; 380 97; 554
PDM 35 1300
TIME_W
TOF - -
TON - -
TP - -
VVZ - 46; 566 if 0-1 edge; -
283 if 1-0 edge
W_TIME

Counter Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions serie 40, serie 50
CTU - -
CTUH - -
VRZ 92 241
VRZD - 38...113 according to -
the mode

Comparison Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions, serie 40, serie 50
word
< <12 ??
<= <12 ??
<> <12 <49
=? <12 <47
> <12 ??

ABB Control Page C-324 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

>= <12 ??
VGL3P - 48 -
VGLEH - 56 -
VGLUH - 58...63 -

Arithmetic Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions, serie 40, serie 50 (standard time + time (standard time + time
word per additional per additional
parameter) parameter)
+ <12 + 5 <46 + 18
- <12 + 5 <49 + 21
* <30 + 23 ??
: <31 + 24 <781 + 753
*: / MULDI 84 1430
= 7+5 28 + 14
BETR 28 42
COS1 - ?? -
MUL2N 30...35 + 4 per shift 72 + 15 per shift
NEG - -
SIN1 - ?? -
SQRT - 55...193 -
ZUDKW 10 20

Logical Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions, serie 40, serie 50
word
MASKE - 35...38 -
SHIFT - 37...78 according to -
the shift type + 1 per
bit position to be
shifted
WAND 28 46
WOR 29 46
WXOR 28 46

Program Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

control serie 40, serie 50
functions
=PE 2 4
ABORT - 10 -
CAL_FB - -
CALLUP 29 12
DI - -
DIN - <200 (KR91,KT93 : -
stand-alone);
<1000 (KT92 : stand-
alone)
up to 4800 with
master or slave CPU
DO - -

ABB Control Page C-325 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

DOUT - <200 (KR91,KT93 : -

stand-alone);
<1000 (KT92 : stand-
alone)
up to 4800 with
master or slave CPU
IOCON - ca. 0 -
LZB - 29 -
VTASK - -

CS31 Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions serie 40, serie 50
CONFIO1
CONFIO4
CONFIO8
CS31CO 100
CS31QU 60

Communicatio Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

n functions serie 40, serie 50 (standard time + time
per character)
AINIT - ?x -
APOLL - ?x -
AREC - ?x -
ASEND - ?x -
ASEND+ - ?x -
MODBUS -
REC / EMAS ? 332 + 135
SEND / ? 374 + 63
DRUCK
SINIT 25 865

Regulation Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions serie 40, serie 50
DT1 - 200 -
INTK - 189...197 -
PI 280 3600
PIDT1 318 without DT1; -
564 with DT1
PT1 - 106 -

Format Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

conversion serie 40, serie 50 (standard time + time (standard time + time
functions per planned binary per planned binary
variable) variable)
BCDDUAL / 88 365
BCDBIN
BCDDUALD / - 310 -
BCDDW
DUALBCD / 28 (value=0) up to 548

ABB Control Page C-326 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

BINBCD 162 (value=9999)

DUALBCDD / - 36...288 -
DWBCD
DWW 36...38 154
PACK4 56 168
PACK8 86 292
PACK16 153 540
PACKD4 - 67 -
PACKD8 - 103 -
PACKD16 - 175 -
PACKD24 - 247 -
PACKD32 - 319 -
UNPACK4 61.5 164
UNPACK8 99.5 296
UNPACK16 175.5 560
UNPACKD4 - 76 -
UNPACKD8 - 112 -
UNPACKD16 - 184 -
UNPACKD24 - 256 -
UNPACKD32 - 328 -
WDW 26 51

Comparison Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

function, serie 40, serie 50
double word
<D / VKLD - 35...36 -
=?D / VGLD - 35...37 -
>D / VGRD - 35...37 -

Arithmatic Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

function, serie 40, serie 50
double word
+D / ADDD - 49...52 -
-D / SUBD - 50...55 -
*D / MULD - 117...120 -
:D / DIVD - 300...324 -
=D / ZUWD - 31 -
BETRD - 32...36 -
MUL2ND - 34 + 6 per shift -
NEGD - 34 -
SQRT - x -

Logical Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

function, serie 40, serie 50
double word
DWAND - 49 -
DWOR - 35 -
DWXOR - 35 -
MASKED - 42 -
SHIFT - x -

ABB Control Page C-327 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

High order Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

functions serie 40, serie 50 per planned input E1 per planned input E1
ADRWA - 44 + 8 per operand -
EC0...ECn-1
AMELD - 57 + 31 per input -
E0...En-1
AMELDD - 64 + 41 per input -
E0...En-1
ANAI4_20 - 180 -
AWM - 26 -
AWT 30 40
AWTB 32 74
AWTD - 41 -
BEG 32...35 147
BEGD - 30...38 -
BITSU - 136 + 26 per word -
variable
BMELD 61 + 31 per input ?
E0...En-1
DMUX - 36 -
DMUXD - 38 -
DWUMC - 53 + 10 per -
entered ref. value
FEHSU - 90 + 10 per input -
B0...Bn-1
FIFO - 64 + 0...114 -
FKG - 136 + 9 per -
interpolation point
HLG - 126 -
IDLB - 35 -
IDLm / IDL 35 63
IDSB - 35 -
IDSm / IDS 35 99
INITS - 40 + 2.6 per memory -
word
INITV - 34 + 11 per additional -
VR1...VRn-1
LDT - x -
LIFO - 64 + 0...114 -
LIZU 19 127
MAX 22 + 9 74 + 64
MAXD - 29 + 13 -
MAZ - 36...40 -
MAZD - 49...58 -
MIN 35 + 7 74 + 64
MIND - 24 + 14 -
MUXR - 44.5 + 7.5 per -
additional output
A1...An-1

ABB Control Page C-328 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

MUXRD - 43 + 10 per additional -

output A1...An-1
NPULSE - -
SFEHSU - 83 + 22 per input -
B0...Bn-1
UHR 60 to display; 409 to display;
200 to set 4697 to set
USM - 225 -
UST - 31 -
USTD - 35 -
USTR - 35 -
USTRD - 43 -
WDEC - 22 + 4max. per -
entered ref.value
WUMC - 40 + 7.5 per -
entered comparison
value

Memory Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

access serie 40, serie 50
COPY 59 + 2 per copied 146 + 30 per copied
word word
DWAES - 27 -
DWOL - 26.5 if enable; -
19 if not
DWOS - 38 if enable; -
19 if not
FDEL - x -
FRD - x -
FWR - x -
IOR - 24 -
IOW - 24 -
RDB - 48 (with time WRB) + -
14 per var.
RDDW - 34 (with WRDW time) -
+ 28 per additional
output
RDW - 38 (with WRW time) + -
19 per additional
output
WAES - 23 no reading; -
33 reading
WOL 20 no reading; 146 + 48 if reading
33 reading
WOS - 25 no reading; -
39 reading
WRB - x -
WRDW - x -
WRW - x -
Special Controller, 90 serie 30 serie

ABB Control Page C-329 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Function block description

functions serie 40, serie 50

5F_ARC94 - x -
COUNTB - x -
COUNTW - x -
DWWW - x -
IDENT - x -
MODMASTK - x -
SETB - x -
TESTB - x -

ABB Control Page C-330 1SBC006099R1001 07/99

Publication No. FRCTL 0151 98 FR
Printed in France (B 07.99 SI)

As part of its on-going product improvement, ABB

reserves the right to modify the characteristics or the
products described in this document. The information
given is not-contractual. For further details please con-
tact the ABB company marketing these products in your
country.

ABB Control s.a.

10, rue Ampère Z.I. - B.P. 114
F-69685 Chassieu cedex / France
Telephone: +33 (0) 4 7222 1722
Telefax: +33 (0) 4 7222 1935

1777.6765.CLA Training v4 PDF
No ratings yet
1777.6765.CLA Training v4 PDF
54 pages
Amith Vayu Niyama
100% (1)
Amith Vayu Niyama
34 pages
TIA Portal Programming - Agein Private Limited
No ratings yet
TIA Portal Programming - Agein Private Limited
31 pages
QESV1138 01 AP1055D Slides
No ratings yet
QESV1138 01 AP1055D Slides
185 pages
Abt-Sys-Tsm01 2003-02
No ratings yet
Abt-Sys-Tsm01 2003-02
168 pages
2nd Summative Test
No ratings yet
2nd Summative Test
8 pages
Module 4 It New Era Prelim
No ratings yet
Module 4 It New Era Prelim
7 pages
Mitsubishi Q170M Quick Start Guide
No ratings yet
Mitsubishi Q170M Quick Start Guide
88 pages
Abb 07kt94
No ratings yet
Abb 07kt94
66 pages
SCOUT TIA en-US PDF
No ratings yet
SCOUT TIA en-US PDF
330 pages
Belden Copper Catalog 12.13
No ratings yet
Belden Copper Catalog 12.13
84 pages
401 Presentation: Group - II
No ratings yet
401 Presentation: Group - II
33 pages
Bracing Stiffness
No ratings yet
Bracing Stiffness
8 pages
GX Works3 Ver1 - Operating Manual SH (NA) - 081215-Y (12.19)
100% (2)
GX Works3 Ver1 - Operating Manual SH (NA) - 081215-Y (12.19)
802 pages
Ac31graf GB v211
No ratings yet
Ac31graf GB v211
464 pages
Amazon Echo Setup.9385515.Powerpoint
No ratings yet
Amazon Echo Setup.9385515.Powerpoint
5 pages
Motion Rm003 en P
No ratings yet
Motion Rm003 en P
707 pages
Cmos Schmitt Trigger
No ratings yet
Cmos Schmitt Trigger
6 pages
3BSE035981-600 A en System 800xa Control 6.0 AC 800M Binary and Analog Handling PDF
No ratings yet
3BSE035981-600 A en System 800xa Control 6.0 AC 800M Binary and Analog Handling PDF
670 pages
Manual Ihm B&R PLC Mapp300 - 400-Eng v2 - 20
No ratings yet
Manual Ihm B&R PLC Mapp300 - 400-Eng v2 - 20
610 pages
3BSE069489-602 - en Panel 800 Version 6 Panel Builder Programming and Installation 6.0-2
No ratings yet
3BSE069489-602 - en Panel 800 Version 6 Panel Builder Programming and Installation 6.0-2
440 pages
Sectona Tech Overview
No ratings yet
Sectona Tech Overview
17 pages
Advanced Programming With Python
No ratings yet
Advanced Programming With Python
9 pages
001 - TwinCAT Overview
100% (1)
001 - TwinCAT Overview
51 pages
3BUA000157-510 A en 800xa For Harmony 5.1 Configuration
No ratings yet
3BUA000157-510 A en 800xa For Harmony 5.1 Configuration
260 pages
Function Key
100% (1)
Function Key
3 pages
Trinitronkv28fx66b 1
No ratings yet
Trinitronkv28fx66b 1
78 pages
Panasonic FP PLC Manual
No ratings yet
Panasonic FP PLC Manual
1,336 pages
Simatic Net S7-Cps For Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning
No ratings yet
Simatic Net S7-Cps For Industrial Ethernet Configuring and Commissioning
320 pages
3BDD011933R0301 Freelance New Features History
100% (1)
3BDD011933R0301 Freelance New Features History
204 pages
Sherwin's Resume and Application Letter
No ratings yet
Sherwin's Resume and Application Letter
8 pages
Copy For OM Students
No ratings yet
Copy For OM Students
4 pages
Omron Programming Manual
No ratings yet
Omron Programming Manual
1,175 pages
Tutorials: Tutorial 1 Getting Started
No ratings yet
Tutorials: Tutorial 1 Getting Started
11 pages
Status: User Manual
100% (1)
Status: User Manual
95 pages
2PAA103858-111 B en Freelance Mounting and Installation AC 700F Controller
No ratings yet
2PAA103858-111 B en Freelance Mounting and Installation AC 700F Controller
90 pages
9ARD000014-610 A en Control AC 800M Ethernet IP DeviceNet Configuration
No ratings yet
9ARD000014-610 A en Control AC 800M Ethernet IP DeviceNet Configuration
244 pages
ABB PID Functional Description PDF
0% (1)
ABB PID Functional Description PDF
33 pages
Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects: Single-Speed Motor (P - Motor)
No ratings yet
Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects: Single-Speed Motor (P - Motor)
52 pages
Manual Operacion FLEXOTEMP
No ratings yet
Manual Operacion FLEXOTEMP
93 pages
XINJE PLC
No ratings yet
XINJE PLC
14 pages
Acción Psicológica - Home Page
No ratings yet
Acción Psicológica - Home Page
1 page
Safety Instructions ACS800 Multidrive and ACS800 Multidrive Modules
No ratings yet
Safety Instructions ACS800 Multidrive and ACS800 Multidrive Modules
14 pages
The Features of The Dell Dual Monitor Arm - MDA20 - Dell US
No ratings yet
The Features of The Dell Dual Monitor Arm - MDA20 - Dell US
7 pages
MELSEC IQ-R PID Control Function Block Library Reference
No ratings yet
MELSEC IQ-R PID Control Function Block Library Reference
94 pages
Siemens TCP Ip Ethernet Manual
No ratings yet
Siemens TCP Ip Ethernet Manual
85 pages
How To Use The Guide and Quiz: Select The Version. The Questions Are Identical
No ratings yet
How To Use The Guide and Quiz: Select The Version. The Questions Are Identical
11 pages
GX Works2 Ver1 - Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) SH (NA) - 080984-D (09.12)
0% (1)
GX Works2 Ver1 - Operating Manual (Simple Project, Function Block) SH (NA) - 080984-D (09.12)
102 pages
TC3 Modbus TCP: Manual
No ratings yet
TC3 Modbus TCP: Manual
58 pages
Din en 13215.2000-07 - 2637602
No ratings yet
Din en 13215.2000-07 - 2637602
20 pages
AB RSLogix 500
No ratings yet
AB RSLogix 500
33 pages
AC160 Profibus DP
No ratings yet
AC160 Profibus DP
84 pages
Redundancy PDF
No ratings yet
Redundancy PDF
192 pages
Siemens C - GROUP - 009 Manual
No ratings yet
Siemens C - GROUP - 009 Manual
104 pages
Introduction To SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
No ratings yet
Introduction To SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet
56 pages
Az-700 Dumps
No ratings yet
Az-700 Dumps
7 pages
2PAA113566-6000 en AC 800M 6.0 AC 800M DriveBus
No ratings yet
2PAA113566-6000 en AC 800M 6.0 AC 800M DriveBus
80 pages
HC900 Controller
No ratings yet
HC900 Controller
75 pages
Case Study On Semaphores
No ratings yet
Case Study On Semaphores
4 pages
Logix AOI For Modbus TCP - The Reynolds Company - Blog
No ratings yet
Logix AOI For Modbus TCP - The Reynolds Company - Blog
3 pages
PLC & HMI Interfacing For AC Servo Drive: Naveen Kumar E T.V.Snehaprabha Senthil Kumar
No ratings yet
PLC & HMI Interfacing For AC Servo Drive: Naveen Kumar E T.V.Snehaprabha Senthil Kumar
5 pages
TIA PRO1 13 OBs ENG
No ratings yet
TIA PRO1 13 OBs ENG
15 pages
CH7 - Workplace Correspondence
No ratings yet
CH7 - Workplace Correspondence
50 pages
18industrial Cables Belden
No ratings yet
18industrial Cables Belden
98 pages
02 - Programming
No ratings yet
02 - Programming
54 pages
3BSE041880R5021 CIO GetStart PDF
No ratings yet
3BSE041880R5021 CIO GetStart PDF
126 pages
Lecture PLC
No ratings yet
Lecture PLC
30 pages
3BSE041037-601 - en Compact HMI 6.0.1 Product Guide
No ratings yet
3BSE041037-601 - en Compact HMI 6.0.1 Product Guide
86 pages
Schrack Timer
No ratings yet
Schrack Timer
64 pages
PP 2500PC 20221010
No ratings yet
PP 2500PC 20221010
2 pages
67 Working Principle Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Honeywell
No ratings yet
67 Working Principle Ultraviolet Flame Sensor Honeywell
1 page
20 Step7 Basic v10.5 Quick Start en v11
No ratings yet
20 Step7 Basic v10.5 Quick Start en v11
36 pages
Foxboro 2500 Controller: Specification Sheet
No ratings yet
Foxboro 2500 Controller: Specification Sheet
8 pages
ABB ACS550 Drive Manual by Pass PDF
No ratings yet
ABB ACS550 Drive Manual by Pass PDF
37 pages
Recommendation
No ratings yet
Recommendation
3 pages
infoPLC Net L02 Advanced Micro800 PPT PDF
No ratings yet
infoPLC Net L02 Advanced Micro800 PPT PDF
19 pages
2VAA001455 A en S Control SPNIS21 SPNPM22 Cnet-To-HCU Communication Interface User Manual
No ratings yet
2VAA001455 A en S Control SPNIS21 SPNPM22 Cnet-To-HCU Communication Interface User Manual
107 pages
SINAMICS - V90 - Getting - Started - 012015 - en-US VERYGOOD PDF
No ratings yet
SINAMICS - V90 - Getting - Started - 012015 - en-US VERYGOOD PDF
82 pages
Beckhoff TwinCAT3 042012 e
No ratings yet
Beckhoff TwinCAT3 042012 e
40 pages
CoDesys Installation and Start
No ratings yet
CoDesys Installation and Start
19 pages
Scada Proposal
No ratings yet
Scada Proposal
5 pages
ACM User Guide
No ratings yet
ACM User Guide
21 pages
PLC Programming-Courses - XLSX - Sheet1
No ratings yet
PLC Programming-Courses - XLSX - Sheet1
2 pages
Demo Projects in "Getting Started of STEP 7 Basic V10.5 / V11"
No ratings yet
Demo Projects in "Getting Started of STEP 7 Basic V10.5 / V11"
2 pages
How To Use MAVE Instruction With FBD Programming
No ratings yet
How To Use MAVE Instruction With FBD Programming
4 pages
Operating Instructions G20... G120SE-IV - VFD - V4 - EN
No ratings yet
Operating Instructions G20... G120SE-IV - VFD - V4 - EN
72 pages
Revit Mass BIM
No ratings yet
Revit Mass BIM
3 pages
OOPS
No ratings yet
OOPS
3 pages
Wahid Khan - Piping & Mechanical Supervisor .
No ratings yet
Wahid Khan - Piping & Mechanical Supervisor .
21 pages